WO2020030064A1 - 信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储介质 - Google Patents

信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储介质 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020030064A1
WO2020030064A1 PCT/CN2019/099861 CN2019099861W WO2020030064A1 WO 2020030064 A1 WO2020030064 A1 WO 2020030064A1 CN 2019099861 W CN2019099861 W CN 2019099861W WO 2020030064 A1 WO2020030064 A1 WO 2020030064A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
bandwidth
signal
information
type
channel
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/099861
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
张淑娟
蒋创新
鲁照华
谢武生
杨暐
Original Assignee
中兴通讯股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 中兴通讯股份有限公司 filed Critical 中兴通讯股份有限公司
Priority to EP19846887.8A priority Critical patent/EP3836680A4/en
Priority to KR1020217007016A priority patent/KR20210040431A/ko
Priority to US17/266,990 priority patent/US20210314955A1/en
Publication of WO2020030064A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020030064A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/50—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/53—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on regulatory allocation policies
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/022—Site diversity; Macro-diversity
    • H04B7/024—Co-operative use of antennas of several sites, e.g. in co-ordinated multipoint or co-operative multiple-input multiple-output [MIMO] systems
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/02—Selection of wireless resources by user or terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003—Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005—Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT
    • H04L5/001—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT the frequencies being arranged in component carriers
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0044—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path allocation of payload
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/0051—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of dedicated pilots, i.e. pilots destined for a single user or terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446—Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0453—Resources in frequency domain, e.g. a carrier in FDMA
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/046—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to, but is not limited to, the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to but not limited to an information transmission method, monitoring method, device, base station, terminal, and storage medium.
  • MIMO Multiple input multiple output
  • NR New Radio Access Technology
  • Beam communication can reduce interference and enhance coverage.
  • beam communication is not a full-coverage communication, it is not robust. problem.
  • TRPs Transmission and Reception Points
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure provide an information transmission method, a monitoring method, a device, a base station, a terminal, and a storage medium, which solves the problem of how to effectively support multiple TRPs to serve a terminal effectively under a beam mechanism.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure provides an information transmission method, including:
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further provides an information transmission method, including:
  • the H resource groups correspond to H sets of configuration information of the channels and / or signals; the resources include time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a monitoring method, including:
  • the first communication node determines a candidate control channel to be monitored in a time unit according to at least one of the following information: an active bandwidth portion of a component carrier, a control channel resource group, and a set of search space groups. Quasi co-location reference signal configuration information of the candidate control channel of the user, and a conflict resolution solution for spatial receiving filter parameters of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit;
  • Control information is monitored on the candidate control channel determined to be monitored.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further provides an information transmission device, including: a first determination module and a first transmission module;
  • the first determining module is configured to determine N bandwidth portions in an activated state
  • the first transmission module is configured to transmit a channel and / or a signal on the activated N bandwidth portions
  • the first determining module is configured to determine D control channel resource groups
  • the first transmission module is configured to monitor control information in the D control channel resource groups, and transmit a channel and / or a signal according to the monitored control information;
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further provides an information transmission device, including: a second determination module and a second transmission module;
  • the second determining module is configured to determine a first resource; and determine a number H of resource groups included in the first resource;
  • the second transmission module is configured to transmit a channel and / or a signal on the first resource according to the H value
  • the H resource groups correspond to H sets of configuration information of the channels and / or signals; the resources include time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a monitoring device, including: a candidate control channel determination module and a control information monitoring module;
  • the candidate control channel determination module is configured to determine a candidate control channel to be monitored in a time unit according to at least one of the following information: an active bandwidth portion of a component carrier, a control channel resource group, a set of search space groups, and The quasi-co-located reference signal configuration information of the candidate control channel in the time unit is described, and a conflict resolution solution for the spatial receiving filter parameters of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit is described;
  • the control information monitoring module is configured to monitor control information on the candidate control channel determined to be monitored.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a base station, including: a first processor, a first memory, and a first communication bus;
  • the first communication bus is configured to implement connection and communication between the first processor and a first memory
  • the first processor is configured to execute one or more first programs stored in the first memory to implement the first information transmission method described above;
  • the first processor is configured to execute one or more second programs stored in the first memory to implement the second information transmission method.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a terminal, including: a second processor, a second memory, and a second communication bus;
  • the second communication bus is configured to implement connection and communication between the second processor and a second memory
  • the second processor is configured to execute one or more third programs stored in the second memory to implement the above-mentioned first information transmission method
  • the second processor is configured to execute one or more fourth programs stored in the second memory to implement the second information transmission method described above;
  • the second processor is configured to execute one or more fourth programs stored in the second memory to implement the foregoing monitoring method.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores one or more computer programs, and the one or more computer programs can be executed by one or more processors to implement the first type.
  • the information transmission method, monitoring method, device, base station, terminal, and storage medium provided in the embodiments of the present disclosure determine N active bandwidth parts by transmitting channels and / or signals on the activated N bandwidth parts; and / Or, determining D control channel resource groups, monitoring control information in the D control channel resource groups, and transmitting channels and / or signals according to the monitored control information. In this way, when each TRP and / or terminal performs information transmission in this way, multiple TRPs under the beam mechanism can be effectively supported to effectively serve one terminal.
  • the first resource is determined; the number H of resource groups included in the first resource is determined; a channel and / or a signal is transmitted on the first resource according to the H value;
  • the H resource groups correspond to H sets of configuration information of the channels and / or signals;
  • the resources include time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources.
  • the first communication node determines a candidate control channel to be monitored in a time unit according to at least one of the following information: an active bandwidth portion of a component carrier, a control channel resource group, and a set of search space groups.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of an information transmission method according to Embodiment 1 of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of another information transmission method according to Embodiment 1 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a multi-TRP transmission provided in Embodiment 2 of the present disclosure, in which there is no ideal Backhaul between TRPs;
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of independent configuration information corresponding to multiple bandwidth sections (BWP) in an active state in a component carrier (Component Carrier, CC) in a time unit provided in Embodiment 2 of the present disclosure;
  • BWP bandwidth sections
  • Component Carrier Component Carrier
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of multiple BWPs in an activated state in a CC configured independently and partially shared in a time unit provided in Embodiment 2 of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of part of a plurality of BWPs in an activated state in one CC configured independently and partly shared in another time unit provided in Embodiment 2 of the present disclosure;
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of overlapping frequency domains between multiple BWPs in an activated state in a time unit provided in Embodiment 2 of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a first frequency domain interval between multiple BWPs in an activated state in a time unit provided in Embodiment 2 of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a second frequency domain interval between multiple BWPs in an activated state in a time unit provided in Embodiment 2 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a frequency unit occupied by multiple BWPs in an activated state in a time unit provided in Embodiment 2 of the present disclosure, which is a subset of a frequency domain occupied by a predetermined BWP;
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of different TRPs corresponding to different BWPs provided in Embodiment 2 of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of division of a precoding group of multiple BWPs in accordance with Embodiment 2 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of multiple TRP transmissions provided in Embodiment 2 of the present disclosure, where different TRPs correspond to different control channel resource groups;
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of receiving different BWPs by different panels of a terminal according to Embodiment 3 of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of frequency division of N BWPs in an active state in the same period provided in Embodiment 3 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of different sets of time units corresponding to different activated BWP sets provided in Embodiment 3 of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of BWP switching in a time period provided by Embodiment 4 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of a BWP1 cycle in an activated state provided by Embodiment 5 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram illustrating that a plurality of BWPs in an activated state in two co-frequency CCs need to satisfy an agreed condition according to Embodiment 7 of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of different TRPs served by a same terminal to two CCs of the same frequency CC provided in Embodiment 7 of the present disclosure;
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram illustrating a situation in which one terminal and two TRPs remain connected, there is no ideal Backhaul between the two TRPs, and two TRPs can be independently scheduled;
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of different TRPs corresponding to different frequency domain groups included in a first resource indicated in a control signaling provided in Embodiment 11 of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of a division of a frequency domain group included in a first resource indicated in a control signaling provided in Embodiment 11 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic flowchart of a monitoring method according to Embodiment 12 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of scheduling two Physical Downlink Shared Channels (PDSCH) in two CCs according to Embodiment 14 of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of a control resource set (Control Resource Set, CORESET) where Downlink Control Information (DCI) 1_1 is provided according to Embodiment 14 of the present disclosure;
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic structural diagram of an information transmission device according to Embodiment 15 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic structural diagram of an information transmission device according to Embodiment 16 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of a monitoring device according to Embodiment 17 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station according to Embodiment 18 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 32 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to Embodiment 18 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram of beams of the same channel and / or signal scheduled by two TRPs in Embodiment 8 of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram of combining two sounding reference signals (Sounding Reference Signals, SRS) scheduled by two TRPs occupying the same beam into one SRS in Embodiment 8 of the present disclosure.
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signals
  • first, second, etc. may be used herein to describe various elements or operations, these elements or operations should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element or operation from another element or operation.
  • first condition may be referred to as the second condition, and similarly, the second condition may be referred to as the first condition without departing from the teachings of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are information transmission methods provided by the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the information transmission method in this embodiment can be applied to a terminal or a TRP (such as a base station). among them:
  • the information transmission method shown in FIG. 1 includes:
  • S101 Determine N bandwidth portions in an active state.
  • the terminal and / or the TRP may select N bandwidths that meet predetermined requirements from all BWPs (bandwidth parts) for activation, thereby determining N BWPs in an activated state.
  • the N bandwidth parts that the terminal and / or TRP are contracted to be activated need to meet the contract requirements.
  • S102 Transmit channels and / or signals on the activated N bandwidth parts.
  • the channel transmitted in this embodiment essentially refers to a channel signal.
  • the so-called transmission control channel is essentially a transmission control channel signal.
  • the information transmission method shown in FIG. 2 includes:
  • the terminal and / or the TRP may select D control channel resource groups that meet predetermined requirements from all control channel resource groups.
  • S202 Monitor control information in D control channel resource groups, and transmit channels and / or signals according to the monitored control information.
  • transmission channels and / or signals described in this embodiment include: transmission channels and / or signals, and / or reception channels and / or signals.
  • the two information transmission methods shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 may be adopted at the same time, or only one of them may be adopted.
  • the information transmission method should satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Feature 1 The N bandwidth portions satisfy the first type of predetermined conditions.
  • Feature 2 The D control channel resource groups satisfy a second type of predetermined condition.
  • Feature 3 The N bandwidth portions triggered by the control information in different control channel resource groups in the D control channel resource groups meet the aforementioned first type of predetermined conditions.
  • different types of channels and / or signals in the D1 type channels and / or signals meet at least one of the following characteristics: different types of channels and / or signals belong to different bandwidth portions of the N bandwidth portions; different types of channels and / or signals / Or signals are scheduled by control information in different control channel resource groups in the D control channel resource groups; different types of channels and / or signals belong to different component carriers; different types of channels and / or signals are associated with different group information identifiers; Among them, D1 is a positive integer.
  • D1 in this embodiment may be less than or equal to N.
  • the signal includes one or more of the following signals: a reference signal, a synchronization signal, a random access signal, a phase tracking signal, and the like.
  • the channel includes one or more of the following channels: a control channel, a data channel, a random access channel, and the like.
  • one signal belongs to only one bandwidth part, and among the N bandwidth parts, signals in different bandwidth parts are different.
  • the first type of predetermined conditions includes at least one of the following conditions:
  • Condition 12 There is an overlap between the frequency domain resources occupied by two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts.
  • the overlap in this embodiment may be all overlaps or partial overlaps. When they all overlap, the difference between the frequency domain resources occupied by the two bandwidths is empty; when they overlap, the difference between the frequency domain resources occupied by the two bandwidths is not empty.
  • Condition 13 The frequency domain interval between two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts meets a fourth type of predetermined condition.
  • the fourth type of predetermined conditions includes at least one of the following conditions 131-134:
  • Condition 131 The interval between the highest frequency domain position of the low frequency domain bandwidth part and the lowest frequency domain position of the high frequency domain bandwidth part among the two bandwidth parts is less than or equal to a first predetermined threshold.
  • Condition 132 The interval between the lowest frequency domain position of the low frequency domain bandwidth part and the highest frequency domain position of the high frequency domain bandwidth part of the two bandwidth parts is less than or equal to a second predetermined threshold.
  • Condition 133 The interval between the highest frequency domain position of the low frequency domain bandwidth part and the lowest frequency domain position of the high frequency domain bandwidth part among the two bandwidth parts is greater than or a third predetermined threshold.
  • Condition 134 The interval between the lowest frequency domain position of the low frequency domain bandwidth part and the highest frequency domain position of the high frequency domain bandwidth part of the two bandwidth parts is greater than a fourth predetermined threshold.
  • the first predetermined threshold value, the second predetermined threshold value, the third predetermined threshold value, and the fourth predetermined threshold value may be preset by an engineer according to actual needs or after a large amount of experimental analysis.
  • the first predetermined threshold may be smaller than the second predetermined threshold, and the third predetermined threshold may be smaller than the fourth predetermined threshold.
  • the first predetermined threshold may be larger than the third predetermined threshold, and the second predetermined threshold may be larger than The fourth predetermined threshold.
  • Condition 14 The union of N bandwidth parts is a predetermined subset of a bandwidth part.
  • Condition 15 The subcarrier interval configuration of the N bandwidth portions meets a fifth type of predetermined condition.
  • the fifth type of predetermined condition may be: the number of different subcarrier intervals in the N bandwidth sections is less than or equal to N1; so N1 is a positive integer less than or equal to N.
  • one subcarrier interval needs to be configured in each bandwidth section.
  • the number of different subcarriers configured in the N bandwidth sections should be less than or equal to N1.
  • Condition 16 The cyclic prefix of the N bandwidth portions meets a sixth type of predetermined condition.
  • the sixth type of predetermined condition may be: the number of different cyclic prefix types in the N bandwidth parts is less than or equal to N2; N2 is a positive integer less than or equal to N.
  • N bandwidth sections For example, in the N bandwidth sections, one cyclic prefix type needs to be configured in each bandwidth section, but the number of different ring prefix types configured in the N bandwidth sections should be less than or equal to N2.
  • Condition 17 The slot structure indication information of the N bandwidth parts meets a seventh type of predetermined condition.
  • the seventh type of predetermined conditions may include at least one of the following conditions 171-173:
  • the slot structure indication information includes a slot format indicator (Slot Format Indicator, SFI), and high-level common information tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon, tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon2, dedicated There are timeslot structures notified by the signaling tdd-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated.
  • SFI Slot Format Indicator
  • Condition 172 The intersection between the resources occupied by the downlink transmission domain in one of the N bandwidth portions and the resources occupied by the uplink transmission domain in the other bandwidth portion is empty.
  • the intersection between them is empty.
  • the intersection between the resources occupied by the downlink transmission domain in one bandwidth portion and the resources occupied by the uplink transmission domain of at least one of the remaining (N-1) bandwidth portions is empty.
  • Condition 173 The intersection between the resources occupied by the reserved domain in one bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts and the resources occupied by the transmission domain of the channel and / or signal of the other bandwidth part is empty.
  • the resources occupied by the reserved domain in one bandwidth section and the channel and / or signal of any one of the remaining (N-1) bandwidth sections are empty.
  • it may be: among the N bandwidth parts, the resources occupied by the reserved domain in one bandwidth part and the resources occupied by the transmission domain of the channel and / or signal of at least one bandwidth part of the remaining (N-1) bandwidth parts The intersection between them is empty.
  • the two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts described in this embodiment may be any two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts, or may be specific two bandwidths of the N bandwidth parts. section.
  • the N bandwidth parts are bandwidth parts ⁇ 1, 2, 3 ⁇
  • the two bandwidth parts of the above N bandwidth parts include the bandwidth part ⁇ 1, 2 ⁇
  • the two bandwidths of the N bandwidth parts are A combination of all the different bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts, for example, the two bandwidth parts include a bandwidth part ⁇ 1, 2 ⁇ , a bandwidth part ⁇ 1, 3 ⁇ , and a bandwidth part ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇ .
  • the second type of predetermined conditions includes at least one of the following conditions:
  • Condition 21 The intersection between the resources occupied by the D control channel resource groups is empty.
  • Condition 22 The control information in the D control channel resource groups needs to satisfy a preset condition.
  • different control information in the D control channel resource groups indicates that the transmission directions of the channels or signals on the same resource are the same, where the transmission directions include downlink transmission and uplink transmission.
  • Condition 23 The control information indicated by the control information in different control channel resource groups in the D control channel resource groups is in the same time unit as the active part of the bandwidth.
  • the indication information needs to meet preset conditions.
  • the preset appointment condition includes that the bandwidth portions in the active state in the same time unit indicated by the control information in different control resource groups are the same.
  • Condition 24 The number of bits included in the bandwidth part indication field in the control information in the D2 control channel resource group is determined according to the number of bandwidth parts configured in the component carrier.
  • Condition 25 The number of bits included in the bandwidth part indication field in the control information in the D3 control channel resource group is not determined according to the number of bandwidth parts configured in the component carrier.
  • D2 control channel resource groups and D3 control channel resource groups belong to D control channel resource groups;
  • D2 and D3 are integers less than or equal to D, and / or, the sum of D2 and D3 is equal to the D value.
  • the third type of predetermined conditions includes at least one of the following conditions:
  • Condition 31 There is an association relationship between the parameter configuration of the D1 channel and / or the signal.
  • Condition 32 The total transmission power of the D1 type channel and / or signal cannot exceed a predetermined first threshold.
  • Condition 33 The total received power of the D1 channel and / or signal cannot exceed a predetermined second threshold.
  • Condition 34 When the total transmission power of the D1 channel and / or signal exceeds a predetermined power value, the power priority of the D1 channel and / or signal is determined according to signaling information and / or an agreed rule.
  • Condition 35 When the total transmission power of the D1 type channel and / or signal exceeds a predetermined power value, the power scaling of each type of channel and / or signal in the D1 type channel and / or signal is determined according to signaling information or an agreed rule Weight.
  • Condition 36 The intersection between different bandwidth parts corresponding to the D1 type channel and / or signal is not empty.
  • Condition 37 The resources occupied by the D1 channels and / or signals overlap.
  • Condition 38 When the resources occupied by the two types of channels and / or signals in the D1 type channels and / or signals overlap, the transmission directions of the two types of channels and / or signals are the same.
  • the transmission direction includes downlink transmission and uplink transmission (that is, reception and transmission).
  • the resources described in this embodiment include at least one of time domain resources, frequency domain resources, code domain resources, space domain resources, port resources, and antenna resources.
  • the third type of predetermined conditions may include at least one of the following conditions:
  • Condition 40 The intersection between the resources occupied by the control channels in different bandwidth sections of the N bandwidth sections is empty.
  • Condition 41 The intersection between the resources occupied by the reference signal sets in different bandwidth sections among the N bandwidth sections is empty.
  • the D1 type channel and / or signal meets the third category of predetermined conditions:
  • each bandwidth part of the D1 bandwidth part includes a type of channel and / or signal in the D1 type channel and / or signal.
  • the D1 type channel and / or signal may not meet the third type of predetermined condition.
  • the D1 bandwidth sections are the bandwidth sections corresponding to the D1 type channels and / or signals.
  • the D1 type channel and / or signal can satisfy the third type of predetermined condition.
  • the D1 type channel and / or signal may not meet the third type of predetermined condition.
  • the parameter configuration of the two signals is related to each other and exhibits at least one of the following characteristics: 1.
  • the parameter configuration of the other signal can be obtained according to the parameter configuration of the one signal; 2.
  • Some parameter combinations are not expected to appear at the same time (for example, when parameter 1 of the first signal is configured as the first value, parameter 2 of the second signal is not expected to be configured as the second value.
  • parameter 1 and parameter 2 may be the same type of parameter , Or different types of parameters); 3.
  • the parameter configuration range of another signal can be obtained.
  • the association relationship when there is an association relationship between the parameter configurations of the D1 channel and / or signal, the association relationship includes at least one of the following relationships:
  • Relationship 1 The parameter configuration value of one type of channel and / or signal in the D1 type channel and / or signal is obtained.
  • Relationship 2 A parameter configuration value range of another type of channel and / or signal is obtained according to a parameter configuration value of one type of channel and / or signal in the D1 type channel and / or signal.
  • a certain type of channel and / or signal in the D1 type channel and / or signal may be any type of channel and / or signal in the D1 type channel and / or signal, and may also be a D1 type channel and / or signal. Or a certain type of channel and / or signal specified in the signal.
  • Relationship 3 In the D1 type channel and / or signal, the parameters of different types of channels and / or signals belonging to the first predetermined parameter type set have the same configuration.
  • Relationship 4 In the D1 type channel and / or signal, the configuration values of parameters in different types of channels and / or signals that belong to the second predetermined parameter type set are different.
  • the second predetermined parameter type set includes airspace parameters.
  • the spatial domain parameters of a channel and / or signal are represented by a reference signal; the spatial transmission filter parameters and / or spatial reception filter parameters of the channel and / or signal are obtained according to the spatial transmission filter parameters and / or spatial reception filter parameters of the reference signal .
  • Relationship 5 In the D1 type channel and / or signal, the agreed combination values of the parameters belonging to the third predetermined parameter type set in different types of channels and / or signals cannot occur simultaneously.
  • the agreed combination indicates a parameter type.
  • the first type of channel and / or signal is configured as A value
  • the second type of channel and / or signal cannot be configured as B value.
  • the configuration of the parameter type in the first type of channel and / or signal and the configuration of the parameter type in the second type of channel and / or signal constitute a combined configuration.
  • Relationship 6 The division and alignment of precoding resource groups associated with different types of channels and / or signals.
  • a precoding group in the first bandwidth part includes a precoding group in the second bandwidth part, and / or a precoding group in the second bandwidth part includes the first bandwidth part A precoding group.
  • Relationship 7 The intersection between the resources occupied by the D1 channels and / or signals is not empty.
  • Relationship 8 Type D1 channels and / or signals fall in the same time unit.
  • the first predetermined parameter configuration includes at least one of the following: subcarrier interval information, cyclic shift length information, time domain information of the demodulation reference signal, sequence information of the demodulation reference signal, and control The time domain configuration information corresponding to the channel signal, the transmission of whether precoding is enabled, the parameters of the scrambling sequence of the reference signal, the synchronization signal, the configuration of the time slot structure, and the measurement of the reference signal configuration.
  • the second predetermined parameter type set includes at least one of the following: a spatial domain parameter of a channel and / or a signal, and a scrambling sequence generation parameter of the channel.
  • the third predetermined parameter type set includes airspace parameters of the channel and / or signal.
  • Subcarrier interval information cyclic shift length information, time domain information of demodulated reference signals, sequence information of demodulated reference signals, time domain configuration information corresponding to control channel signals, transmission of precoding enable information, synchronization signals, measurement Reference signal, slot structure indication.
  • an association relationship may exist between the parameter configurations.
  • the N bandwidth portions may satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Feature 21 At least one of the N bandwidth portions is in a periodic activation state; the period of the periodic activation state is greater than or equal to one time unit.
  • the periodic activation state that is, the bandwidth part is automatically activated in a time unit that satisfies the period interval according to a set period.
  • the period is 2 (that is, there are two time units in each period)
  • the first time unit in the cycle is activated, that is, the bandwidth part is in time units 1, 3, 5, 7, Activated on 9 and inactive on time units 2, 4, 6, 8, 10.
  • Feature 22 At least one of the N bandwidth portions is in a semi-continuous activation state.
  • the semi-continuous activation state refers to whether the bandwidth part controls whether the bandwidth part is in an activated state or an inactive state by using received signaling. It should also be noted that in the semi-continuous activation state, when the bandwidth part is in the activated state, it is essentially in the periodic activated state automatically.
  • Feature 23 There is at least one main bandwidth part among the N bandwidth parts.
  • Feature 24 There is at least one secondary bandwidth part in the N bandwidth parts.
  • the bandwidth part when the N bandwidth parts satisfy the existence of the primary bandwidth part and / or the secondary bandwidth part, the bandwidth part should satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Feature 31 The channels and / or signals of the control channel scheduling of the main bandwidth part are in the secondary bandwidth part.
  • Feature 32 In the set of time units in which the main bandwidth part is activated, the minimum interval between time units is less than or equal to a predetermined interval value.
  • Feature 33 The time unit where the main bandwidth part is located is continuous.
  • Feature 34 There is at least one main bandwidth part in a time unit.
  • Feature 35 There is at least one main bandwidth part in a time unit other than the time gap existing when the main bandwidth part is switched.
  • Feature 36 The period of the auxiliary bandwidth part is in an activated state; wherein one period of the auxiliary bandwidth part includes one or more time units.
  • Feature 37 The common control channel is included in the main bandwidth section.
  • Feature 38 The common control channel is not included in the auxiliary bandwidth part.
  • Feature 39 Only the dedicated control channel is included in the auxiliary bandwidth part.
  • Feature 310 the auxiliary bandwidth part is in a semi-continuous activation state; wherein the period after the auxiliary bandwidth part is activated is in an activated state, and one period of the auxiliary bandwidth part includes one or more time units.
  • Feature 311 The control channel is not included in the secondary bandwidth portion.
  • Feature 312 The period and / or the period offset when the auxiliary bandwidth part is in an activated state is determined according to a predetermined rule or received signaling information.
  • Feature 313 The main bandwidth part and the secondary bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts are determined according to a predetermined rule or received signaling information.
  • a BWP identifier (Identifier, ID) is used to determine which is the primary bandwidth part and which is the secondary bandwidth part. For example, the ID with the smallest ID is the main bandwidth part, and the ID with the largest ID is the secondary bandwidth part.
  • Feature 314 When the CC to which the N bandwidth parts belong is the main CC in one CC group, there are main bandwidth parts in the N bandwidth parts.
  • the primary CC in a CC group represents a PCell (Primary Cell) in an MCG (Master Cell Group), and / or a Secondary Cell (Group) SCG (Secondary Cell Group). Primary Cell (Secondary Cell, PSCell) in the cell group).
  • PCell Primary Cell
  • MCG Master Cell Group
  • SCG Secondary Cell Group
  • PSCell Primary Cell
  • Feature 315 When the CC to which the N bandwidth parts belong is a secondary CC in a CC group, the N bandwidth parts are all secondary bandwidth parts.
  • the PCell in the MCG must have the main bandwidth portion, the other CCs in the MCG may have no main bandwidth portion; the PSCell in the SCG must have the main bandwidth portion, and the other CCs in the SCG may not have the main bandwidth portion.
  • Feature 316 When the CC to which the N bandwidth parts belong is an active CC, a main bandwidth part exists in the N bandwidth parts.
  • Feature 317 When the CCs to which the N bandwidth parts belong are inactive CCs, the N bandwidth parts are all secondary bandwidth parts.
  • the dynamic control information transmitted in the main bandwidth section carries the dynamic switching instruction information of the main bandwidth section.
  • the dynamic control information transmitted in the primary bandwidth section carries the dynamic switching instruction information of the secondary bandwidth section.
  • Feature 320 The number of bits in the bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information transmitted in the main bandwidth part is determined according to the number of bandwidth parts configured in the CC.
  • Feature 321 The number of bits in the bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information transmitted in the main bandwidth part is determined according to the number of bandwidth part sets configured in the CC.
  • Feature 322 The number of bits of the bandwidth indication field in the dynamic control information in the auxiliary bandwidth part is 0.
  • the N bandwidth parts may also satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Feature 41 An association relationship exists between the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part among the N bandwidth parts.
  • an association relationship between the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part indicates at least one of the following information: 1.
  • the other bandwidth part can be determined according to one of the bandwidth parts; 2.
  • the activation signaling of one bandwidth part is also simultaneously Another bandwidth part is activated; 3.
  • Some parameter combinations in these two bandwidth parts do not want to appear at the same time.
  • Feature 42 The first bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts belongs to the first bandwidth part group.
  • Feature 43 The second bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts belongs to the second bandwidth part group.
  • Feature 44 The first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts share a set of parameter configurations of channels and / or signals.
  • Feature 45 The parameter configuration of the channel and / or signal carried on the first bandwidth part and the parameter configuration of the channel and / or signal carried on the second bandwidth part among the N bandwidth parts satisfy a predetermined configuration condition.
  • Feature 46 The first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part are triggered by a signaling message.
  • the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part in this embodiment are two bandwidth parts among the N bandwidth parts.
  • the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part may be any two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts; the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part may also be specific two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts.
  • the N bandwidth parts are bandwidth parts ⁇ 1, 2, 3 ⁇
  • the combination of the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part corresponds to the bandwidth part ⁇ 1, 2 ⁇
  • the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part Is a combination of all the different bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts
  • the combination of the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part corresponds to a bandwidth part ⁇ 1, 2 ⁇ , a bandwidth part ⁇ 1, 3 ⁇ , and a bandwidth part ⁇ 2 , 3 ⁇ .
  • the determined N bandwidth parts may also meet at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the N bandwidth parts are N bandwidth parts that are active in the same time unit.
  • Feature 52 N bandwidth parts belong to one CC.
  • Feature 53 There is an intersection between the time resources in which the different bandwidth parts are active in the N bandwidth parts.
  • Feature 54 In the N bandwidth sections, there is a case where the channels and / or signals of the control channel scheduling of at least one bandwidth section are in another bandwidth section.
  • Feature 55 The information transmission directions of the N bandwidth parts are the same, where the information transmission directions include: a downlink transmission direction and an uplink transmission direction.
  • Feature 56 When N is greater than a predetermined value, a parameter in a parameter set corresponding to each bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts is a fixed value.
  • the parameter is a fixed value means that the parameter value is not dynamically notified in the DCI.
  • the parameter set includes at least one of the following parameters: a scrambling sequence parameter of the demodulation reference signal; and the number of time domain symbols included in a set of consecutive time domain symbols occupied by the demodulation reference signal.
  • Feature 57 The information field included in the control signaling in one of the N bandwidth sections is determined according to the value of N.
  • the signaling information when the value of N is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the signaling information does not include predetermined indication information.
  • the signaling information when the value of N is less than a predetermined value, the signaling information includes predetermined indication information.
  • the information field can be determined according to the predetermined instruction information.
  • the physical layer dynamic control information in the M1 bandwidth sections of the N bandwidth sections may carry the dynamic switching instruction information of the bandwidth section.
  • Feature 59 The physical layer dynamic control information in the M2 bandwidth sections of the N bandwidth sections cannot carry the dynamic switching instruction information of the bandwidth section.
  • Feature 60 M3 bandwidth sections of the N bandwidth sections include physical layer dynamic control information in a predetermined format.
  • the physical layer dynamic control information in a predetermined format in this embodiment includes a downlink control information format (Downlink Control Information Format, DCI format) 2_0.
  • DCI Format Downlink Control Information Format
  • Feature 61 M4 bandwidth sections of the N bandwidth sections do not include physical layer dynamic control information in a predetermined format.
  • M1, M2, M3, and M4 are non-negative integers less than or equal to N; and / or, the sum of M1 and M2 is equal to the value of N, and the sum of M3 and M4 is The sum is equal to the N value.
  • the bandwidth part switching process is not started; the bandwidth part index indicated by the physical layer control channel corresponds to When the bandwidth part does not belong to the N bandwidth parts, a bandwidth part switching process is started.
  • this embodiment provides a candidate control channel screening method when the total number of candidate control channels exceeds the terminal's blind detection capability.
  • Manner 1 When the total number of candidate control channels included in the N bandwidth sections is greater than the first predetermined value, the candidate control channels in the M bandwidth sections may be monitored according to a predetermined rule and / or signaling information.
  • M is an integer less than or equal to N, and the M bandwidth parts are M bandwidth parts among the N bandwidth parts. It should also be noted that the number of candidate control channels in the M bandwidth portions should be less than or equal to a first predetermined value.
  • the N bandwidth parts may be located in the same time unit.
  • Manner 2 When the total number of control channels included in the D control channel resource groups is greater than a second predetermined value, the control channels in the D4 control channel resource groups are monitored according to a predetermined rule and / or signaling information.
  • D4 control channel resource groups are D4 control channel resource groups among the D control channel resource groups.
  • the selected M bandwidth parts should satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the M bandwidth parts are bandwidth parts with higher priority among the N bandwidth parts.
  • Feature 62 The number of candidate control channels monitored in each bandwidth section of the M bandwidth sections is less than or equal to the number of candidate channels configured in the bandwidth section.
  • M bandwidth parts are from Q bandwidth part groups.
  • Q is a positive integer less than or equal to M, and N bandwidth parts belong to a set of bandwidth parts in the Q bandwidth part group.
  • Feature 64 The candidate control channel to be monitored is allocated in a predetermined proportion among the M bandwidth parts.
  • the M bandwidth parts when the M bandwidth parts satisfy the M bandwidth parts from the Q bandwidth part groups, it includes: the intersection between each bandwidth part group of the Q bandwidth part groups and the set consisting of M bandwidth parts is not empty ; And / or, at least one bandwidth part of the M bandwidth parts belongs to a bandwidth part group of the Q bandwidth part groups.
  • At least one of the following may be determined according to the signaling information and / or the agreed rules:
  • a set of time units corresponding to each bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts can be determined.
  • the bandwidth part will be activated in its corresponding set of time units.
  • At least one bandwidth part in each bandwidth part set in the T1 bandwidth part set is active in a time unit set corresponding to the bandwidth part set; and / or, N bandwidth parts belong to N The set of bandwidth parts corresponding to the time unit where the bandwidth part is located.
  • the number of bits of the bandwidth part indication domain in the dynamic control information is 0; when the bandwidth part indication domain can be obtained according to the component carrier When the configured number of bandwidth parts is obtained, the number of bits in the bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information is obtained according to the number of configured bandwidth parts in the component carrier.
  • bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information in a bandwidth part is obtained according to the number of bandwidth part sets configured in the component carrier.
  • the number of bits in the bandwidth part indication domain in the dynamic control information is 0; when the bandwidth part indication domain can be based on the component carrier
  • the number of bits of the bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information is obtained according to the number of bandwidth part sets configured in the component carrier.
  • a bandwidth part includes dynamic control information in a predetermined format.
  • the dynamic control information in a predetermined format may include DCI format 2_0.
  • a control channel resource group can include dynamic control information in a predetermined format.
  • the information transmission method further includes: determining whether a bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information in a bandwidth part needs to be obtained according to the number of bandwidth parts configured in the CC; and / or, determining a bandwidth part
  • the bandwidth part in the dynamic control information indicates whether the domain needs to be obtained according to the number of bandwidth part sets configured in the CC.
  • the determined N bandwidth parts should be from X CCs (X is a positive integer greater than 1), and / or the determined N bandwidth parts should be from X1 CC groups (X1 is greater than A positive integer of 1). Furthermore, the bandwidth part group where the N bandwidth parts are located can be determined according to the CC where the N bandwidth parts are located.
  • the determined D control channel resource groups should be from Y CCs, and / or should be from Y1 CC groups (Y and Y1 are positive integers greater than 1).
  • each CC should satisfy at least one of the following conditions:
  • Condition 41 There is overlap between the frequency domain resources of the first CC and the second CC.
  • first CC and the second CC are two CCs among X CCs; these two CCs may be any two CCs among X CCs, or may be specific two CCs among X CCs .
  • the CC in the first CC group has at least one associated CC in the second CC group.
  • first CC group and the second CC group are two CC groups in the X1 CC group.
  • the two CC groups may be any two CC groups in the X1 CC group, and may also be X1. Specific two CC groups in CC.
  • X1 is less than or equal to X and greater than or equal to 2.
  • the first CC group and the second CC group are two CC groups in the Y1 CC group, and the two CC groups may be any two CC groups in the Y1 CC group, or may be Y1 A specific two CC groups in each CC.
  • Y1 is less than or equal to Y and greater than or equal to 2.
  • the bandwidth part included in a CC group belongs to a bandwidth part group.
  • the bandwidth part included in a CC belongs to a bandwidth part group.
  • Condition 47 The parameter configuration of two CCs out of X CCs is related.
  • the above parameter configuration may include time slot structure indication information.
  • Condition 48 The parameter configuration of two CCs among the Y CCs is related.
  • the above parameter configuration may include time slot structure indication information.
  • the D control channel resource groups correspond to D reference signal sets, and each of the D control channel resource groups corresponds to a reference signal set.
  • the reference signal set satisfies at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the reference signal set is an uplink reference signal set used for a codebook.
  • the reference signal set is an uplink reference signal set used for a non-codebook.
  • the reference signal set is an aperiodic reference signal set.
  • Feature 74 The difference between the reference signal sets is not empty.
  • Feature 75 The reference signal associated with the spatial transmission filtering parameter of the demodulation reference signal scheduled by the control information in one control channel resource group among the D control channel resource groups belongs to the reference signal set corresponding to the one control channel resource group.
  • Feature 76 The reference signal associated with the spatial reception filtering parameter of the demodulation reference signal scheduled by the control information in one control channel resource group among the D control channel resource groups belongs to the reference signal set corresponding to the one control channel resource group.
  • Feature 77 The reference signal scheduled by the control information in one control channel resource group among the D control channel resource groups belongs to the reference signal set corresponding to the one control channel resource group.
  • G CCs can also be determined.
  • the G CCs satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the parameter configuration of the G CCs meets the eighth type of agreed conditions.
  • the eighth type of agreed conditions includes at least one of the following: the intersection of resources occupied by synchronization signals of different CCs with overlapping frequency domains is space; the same resources of different CCs with overlapping frequency domains The transmission directions of the channels or signals on the two channels must be consistent; different CCs with overlapping frequency domains share a set of slot structure configuration information.
  • G is a positive integer greater than or equal to two.
  • the type Z channel and / or signal in the type Z channel and / or signal may be transmitted according to the signaling information and / or agreed rules; And / or, when there is a conflict between the resources occupied by the Z-type channel and / or the signal, the third-type channel and / or signal may be transmitted according to the signaling information and / or the agreed rules.
  • the third-type channel and / or signal is obtained according to parameter information of at least two types of channels and / or signals in the Z-type channel and / or signal, and / or the third-type channel and / or signal and The intersection of class Z channels and / or signals is empty.
  • Z is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2
  • Z1 is a positive integer less than or equal to Z.
  • different types of channels and / or signals in the type Z channel and / or signal belong to different bandwidth portions of the determined N bandwidth portions (that is, different types of channels and / or signal bearers in the type Z channel and / or signal)
  • the different bandwidth portions of the N bandwidth portions determined by the domain); and / or, the different types of channels and / or signals in the type Z channel and / or signal are determined by the Z in the D control channel resource group determined Control information scheduling in different control channel resource groups in one control channel resource group;
  • / or the type Z channel includes at least one of the following channel types: a data channel, a control channel, and the type Z signal includes the following signal type at least One: measurement reference signal, demodulation reference signal, random access signal, synchronization signal, resource request signal, phase tracking signal; and / or different types of channels and / or signal associations in the type Z channel and / or signal Different group
  • the conflict includes at least one of the following conflicts:
  • Collision 1 There is overlap between the time domain resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or the signal.
  • Collision 2 There is overlap between the frequency domain resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or the signal.
  • Collision 3 There is overlap between the demodulation reference signal resources included in the type Z channel.
  • Collision 4 There is overlap between the reference signal resources included in the Z-type signal.
  • Collision 5 There is overlap between the airspace resources occupied by the Class Z channels and / or signals.
  • Collision 6 The airspace resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or the signal cannot be transmitted simultaneously on the first communication node.
  • Collision 7 There is overlap between the antenna resources occupied by the Z-channel and / or the signal.
  • Collision 8 Antenna resources occupied by the Z-type channel and / or signal cannot be transmitted simultaneously on the first communication node.
  • Collision 9 The group information to which the reference signal corresponding to the airspace resource occupied by the Z-type channel and / or the signal does not meet the agreed condition.
  • the time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal may overlap, and the spatial domain resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal may be Only when there is overlap, it is considered that there is a conflict between the resources occupied by the type Z channels and / or signals; and / or, the time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources occupied by the type Z channels and / or signals may overlap, and the type Z is The airspace resources occupied by the channel and / or signal are considered to conflict with the resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or the signal when the first communication node cannot transmit simultaneously; and / or, the resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or the signal When the time domain resources and / or the frequency domain resources overlap,
  • the first communication node is a communication node that transmits the Z1 type channel and / or signal.
  • the Z-type channel and / or signal meets at least one of the following conditions:
  • Condition 51 The spatial domain resources occupied by one type of channel and / or signal in the Z-type channel and / or signal are indicated by a reference signal, and the spatial transmission filter parameters and / or spatial reception filter parameters of the channel and / or signal are based on the space of the reference signal Obtain the transmission filtering parameters and / or the spatial receiving filtering parameters.
  • one type of channel and / or signal in the type Z channel and / or signal may be any type of channel and / or signal in the type Z channel and / or signal, and may also be Z A specific type of channel and / or signal in a type of channel and / or signal.
  • Condition 52 The airspace resources occupied by a type of channel and / or signal in the Z-type channel and / or signal are represented by reference signals, and the channel and / or signal and reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to a type of quasi-co-location parameter.
  • Condition 53 The airspace resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal cannot be transmitted on the first communication node at the same time, and the group information to which multiple reference signals associated with multiple airspace resources of the type Z channel and / or signal belong is not satisfied Under agreed conditions, and / or the multiple reference signals associated with multiple spatial domain resources including Class Z channels and / or signals are the same reference signal.
  • the group information to which the multiple reference signals belong does not satisfy an agreed condition, and the agreed condition includes that the multiple reference signals belong to the same reference signal group, and different reference signals in the same reference signal group can be sent simultaneously or Can be received at the same time, the reference signals of different reference signal groups cannot be sent or received at the same time, or the constraint condition includes that the multiple reference signals belong to different reference signal groups, wherein the reference signals in different reference signal groups can be simultaneously Send or receive at the same time, the reference signals in the same reference signal group cannot be sent or received at the same time.
  • the reference signal resource included in the reference signal resource group may be indicated by the second communication node to the first communication node through signaling information, and / or the first communication node feedbacks to the second communication node.
  • the type Z channel and / or signal is an uplink signal
  • the airspace resources of the type Z channel and / or signal are indicated by a Scheduling Request Indication (SRI)
  • SRI Scheduling Request Indication
  • at least Z corresponding to the type Z channel and / or signal indicated by the SRI SRS resources belong to the same group, but are different SRSs, indicating that this type Z channel and / or signal cannot be sent at the same time
  • at least Z SRS resources corresponding to the type Z channel and / or signal indicated by the SRI belong to different groups, then It indicates that this type Z channel and / or signal can be transmitted simultaneously.
  • the SRS measurement reference signal resources corresponding to the SRI belong to the same group, it indicates that the type Z channels and / or signals can be sent at the same time, and the different types belong to the type Z Channels and / or signals cannot be sent simultaneously.
  • the type Z channel and / or signal is a downlink signal
  • the airspace resources of the type Z channel and / or signal are indicated by TCI (transmission configuration configuration indicator)
  • TCI transmission configuration configuration indicator
  • the type Z channel and / or indicated in TCI At least Z downlink reference signals or synchronization signal resources corresponding to the signals belong to the same group, it indicates that the type Z channels and / or signals cannot be received at the same time; at least Z downlink references corresponding to the type Z channels and / or signals indicated in the TCI
  • the signal or synchronization signal resources belong to different groups, which indicates that the type Z channels and / or signals can be received at the same time.
  • the Z downlink reference signal / synchronous signal resources corresponding to TCI belong to the same group, it indicates that the type Z channels and / or signals can be received simultaneously; the Z corresponding to TCI
  • the downlink reference signal / synchronization signal resources belong to different groups, which indicates that the type Z channels and / or signals cannot be received at the same time.
  • group information to which the reference signal belongs in this embodiment may be the same as the group information identifier, or may be different.
  • Condition 54 The airspace resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal cannot be transmitted on the first communication node at the same time, and multiple reference signals associated with multiple airspace resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal are on the first communication node. Cannot transmit at the same time.
  • Priority of bandwidth portion associated with type Z channel and / or signal Priority of bandwidth portion associated with type Z channel and / or signal; priority of resource group of control channel associated with type Z channel and / or signal; priority of frequency domain bandwidth group associated with type Z channel and / or signal; Z Priority of CC or CC group associated with class channel and / or signal.
  • the type Z1 channel and / or signal is a channel and / or signal with a higher priority among the type Z channels and / or signals.
  • Priority of bandwidth portion associated with type Z channel and / or signal Priority of bandwidth portion associated with type Z channel and / or signal; priority of resource group of control channel associated with type Z channel and / or signal; priority of frequency domain bandwidth group associated with type Z channel and / or signal; Z Priority of CC or CC group associated with class channel and / or signal.
  • bandwidth parts associated with type Z channels and / or signals are the same; whether the control channel resource groups associated with type Z channels and / or signals are the same; whether the frequency domain bandwidth groups associated with type Z channels and / or signals are the same; Whether the CCs or CC groups associated with the signals are the same; and whether the group information identifiers associated with the class Z channels and / or the signals are the same.
  • the time domain resources of the SRS and the uplink physical control channel (PUCCH) overlap if at least one of the above information of the SRS and PUCCH is the same, it is considered to be a conflict, and one of them needs to be discarded, such as If the SRS or the PUCCH is discarded, at least one of the above information of the SRS and the PUCCH is different, it is considered that there is no conflict between the two, and both are transmitted.
  • PUCCH uplink physical control channel
  • the first communication node does not transmit the channels and / or signals included in the difference set of the type Z channel and / or signal and the type Z1 channel and / or signal.
  • Z2 is a non-negative integer less than or equal to Z1.
  • the parameter information in the first predetermined parameter set includes at least one of the following information: timing advance information, sequence information, antenna information, demodulation reference signal information, and number of transmission code blocks.
  • Z2 is a non-negative integer less than or equal to Z1.
  • the method when there is a conflict between the resources occupied by the Z-type channel and / or the signal, the method further includes performing at least one of the following operations:
  • the type Z channel and / or signal in the type Z channel and / or signal is transmitted according to signaling information and / or agreed rules.
  • the third-type channel and / or signal is transmitted according to signaling information and / or agreed rules.
  • the parameter information of the third type of channel and / or signal in this embodiment is obtained according to the configuration information of at least two types of channels and / or signals in the Z1 type channel and / or signal in the Z type channel and / or signal.
  • the parameter information includes at least one of the following information: power information, timing advance information, sequence information, antenna information, and port information.
  • the parameter information of the third type of channel and / or signal may also be obtained according to signaling information or an agreed rule.
  • conflicts in resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal include:
  • the first information associated with the Z-type channel and / or the signal is the same.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: a type Z channel and / or signal associated bandwidth portion, a type Z channel and / or signal associated control channel resource group, and a type Z channel and / or signal associated frequency domain bandwidth group. , CC or CC group associated with Z-type channel and / or signal, group information identifier associated with Z-type channel and / or signal.
  • the type Z channel includes at least one of the following channel types: data channel and control channel; the type Z signal includes at least one of the following signal types: measurement reference signal, demodulation reference signal, random access signal, synchronization signal , Resource request signals, and phase tracking signals.
  • the first information associated with the type Z channel and / or signal when the resources and / or reference signals occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal overlap, the first information associated with the type Z channel and / or signal is the same, the type Z channel and / or signal conflicts, and Z1 is less than the Z value; and / or, when the resources occupied by the Z-type channel and / or signal overlap, the first information associated with the Z-type channel and / or signal is different, and the Z-type channel and / or signal does not collide, And Z1 is equal to the Z value.
  • the above resources include at least one of the following resources: time domain resources, frequency domain resources, and air domain resources.
  • the information transmission method by determining N bandwidth sections in an active state; transmitting channels and / or signals on the activated N bandwidth sections; and / or, determining D control channel resource groups, in The control information is monitored in the D control channel resource groups, and channels and / or signals are transmitted according to the monitored control information.
  • each TRP and / or terminal performs information transmission, multiple TRPs under the beam mechanism can be effectively supported to effectively serve one terminal.
  • the system spectrum efficiency is increased, and / or the robustness of communication is improved.
  • the terminal can receive data transmission from multiple TRPs at the same time at the same time. As shown in Figure 3, the terminal can receive PDSCH1 and PDSCH2 in the same slot at the same time. Among them, PDSCH1 is sent by TRP1 and PDSCH2 is sent by TRP2. There is no ideal Backhaul between the two TRPs, so PDSCH1 is scheduled by DCI1, and PDSCH2 is scheduled by DCI2. Because the resources occupied by PDSCH1 and PDSCH2 may overlap, and if the parameter configuration of the channels and / or signals that allow two TRP transmissions can be different, it can be achieved by the following scheme.
  • a terminal In a time unit, a terminal is configured with N BWPs in an active state in a CC, and configuration information of each BWP configures parameter information of channels and / or signals in the BWP.
  • BWP1 and BWP2 can each configure their own physical downlink shared channel configuration (pdsch-config), physical downlink control channel configuration (pdcch-config), semi-static scheduling configuration (sps-configure), and wireless link monitoring.
  • Configuration radiolinkmonitoringconfigure
  • the specific meaning of the configuration of pdsch-config, pdcch-config, sps-configure and radiolinkmonitoringconfigure can refer to the protocol 38.331.
  • BWP1 and BWP2 configure their respective pdsch-config, pdcch-config, sps-configure, and radiolinkmonitoringconfigure.
  • This embodiment also does not exclude that only some configurations of BWP1 and BWP2 are configured independently, and some configurations are shared.
  • radiolinkmonitoringconfigure is shared, and the others are configured independently of BWP, of course, shared in Figure 5
  • the configuration is just an example, and this article does not exclude shared configurations from other configurations.
  • the configurations shared by BWP1 and BWP2 are radiolinkmonitoringconfigure and pdsch-config.
  • the shared configuration can be one or more of pdsch-config, pdcch-config, sps-configure, and radiolinkmonitoringconfigure.
  • a predetermined condition needs to be satisfied between N BWPs in an activated state in a time unit.
  • BWP2 is a subset of BWP1.
  • the predetermined conditions that BWP1 and BWP2 satisfy may also be one or more of the following conditions:
  • BWP1 and BWP2 belong to one CC.
  • Feature 2 There is overlap between the frequency domain resources included in BWP1 and the frequency domain resources included in BWP2, as shown in FIG. 7.
  • Feature 3 The interval between the highest frequency domain position of BWP1 and the lowest frequency domain position of BWP2 is less than or equal to a first predetermined value. As shown in FIG. 8, the first frequency domain interval is less than or equal to a first predetermined value, wherein the subcarrier number corresponding to the lowest frequency domain position of the BWP is less than or equal to the subcarrier number corresponding to the lowest frequency domain position of the BWP2.
  • the interval between the lowest frequency domain position of BWP1 and the highest frequency domain position of BWP2 is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold. As shown in FIG. 9, the second frequency domain interval is less than or equal to a second predetermined value, wherein the subcarrier number corresponding to the lowest frequency domain position of the BWP is less than or equal to the subcarrier number corresponding to the lowest frequency domain position of the BWP2.
  • BWP1 and BWP2 both belong to a predetermined BWP.
  • the frequency domain resources occupied by BWP1 and BWP2 in an activated state in a time unit are all a subset of the frequency domain resources occupied by BWP3.
  • Feature 6 There is an overlap between the effective time of BWP1 and BWP2. For example, in a slot, both BWPs are active.
  • the direction from the low subcarrier number to the high subcarrier number shown in Figs. 7-9 is also the direction from the low frequency domain position to the high frequency domain position.
  • the first frequency domain interval, the second frequency domain interval, the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value may be described by associating a reference subcarrier interval.
  • the overlap of frequency domain resources indicates that the frequency domain resources occupied by the two BWPs overlap.
  • the overlap can also be described by associating a reference subcarrier interval.
  • N BWPs that are active in the same time period.
  • the main purpose is to reduce the processing complexity of the terminal while ensuring that different TRPs correspond to different parameter configurations.
  • the interval between the N BWPs in the activated state should not be too large, or even overlapped, so the terminal side actually only uses one BWP for RF reception, but the high-level configuration can be: different BWPs have different configurations.
  • Different receiving panels of the terminal perform signal processing with corresponding BWP.
  • the terminal receives different BWPs using different digital receiving beams, but the radio frequency band is received only with a frequency domain resource that can include the union of the N BWPs.
  • BWP1 and BWP2 can be independently configured with some parameters. There is no certain constraint relationship between the independently configured parameters. In another implementation manner of this embodiment, it may be further restricted that although each BWP can configure parameters independently, a plurality of sets of parameters configured independently need to meet certain conditions.
  • the frequency domain resources occupied by BWP1 and BWP2 overlap, or the channels and / or signals in BWP1 overlap with the frequency domain resources occupied by channels and / or signals in BWP2 the channels and / or signals in BWP1
  • the configuration and the channel and / or signal configuration in BWP2 need to meet predetermined conditions.
  • the predetermined conditions to be met by the channel and / or signal configuration in BWP1 and the channel and / or signal configuration in BWP2 include one or more of the following conditions:
  • Condition 1 The resources occupied by the control channels corresponding to different bandwidth portions of the N bandwidth portions are orthogonal. For example, the intersection between the time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources occupied by all proprietary search spaces in BWP1 and the time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources occupied by all proprietary search spaces in BWP2 is empty . Because there is no ideal Backhual between TRP1 and TRP2, they are dispatched independently. At the same time that their data space separation has improved spectral efficiency, they need to ensure that their control channels are orthogonal and increase the robustness of the control channels. Each TRP transmits the control channel on the same time-frequency resource. When the space separation effect is not good, the robustness of the control channel cannot be guaranteed.
  • the resources occupied by the reference signals in different bandwidth portions of the N bandwidth portions are orthogonal, such as the resources occupied by DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal) in BWP1 and the DMRS occupied by BWP2
  • the resources are orthogonal.
  • the demodulation reference signal includes one or more of a demodulation reference signal of a control channel and a demodulation reference signal of a data channel.
  • the demodulation reference signal includes the demodulation reference signal of the control channel
  • the time-frequency resources occupied by the DCI in the two BWPs may overlap, but the demodulation reference signals of the two BWPs are orthogonal; or the two BWPs are orthogonal.
  • the orthogonality of the resources occupied by the two reference signals indicates that the intersection of the resources occupied by the two reference signals is empty.
  • the resources include at least one of the following resources: time domain resources, frequency domain resources, code domain resources, port resources, and air domain resources.
  • the code domain resource may be a pseudo-noise code (PN) sequence of the reference signal, or a code used for port code division multiplexing of the reference signal. For example, two ports perform code division multiplexing through a code of length 2, port 1 uses a [1, 1] code, and port 2 uses a [1, -1] code.
  • a spatial domain resource is associated with a reference signal, such as a reference signal in a beam training phase.
  • the spatial receiving filtering parameters associated with different reference signals are different, or the spatial transmitting filtering parameters associated with different reference signals are different.
  • Condition 3 When the total number of candidate control channels included in the N bandwidth parts is greater than a predetermined value, the candidate control channels in the M bandwidth parts are monitored according to a predetermined rule and / or signaling information, where the M The bandwidth part belongs to the N bandwidth parts, and M is an integer less than or equal to N.
  • M is an integer less than or equal to N.
  • the number of candidate control channels in BWP1 in slotn is C1
  • the number of candidate control channels in BWP2 is C2
  • C1 + C2 is greater than the predetermined value C3
  • Solution 3.1 Only monitor candidate control channels in a BWP.
  • BWP1 is the main BWP, and the performance of TRP1 corresponding to BWP1 reaching the terminal is better than the performance of TRP2 corresponding to BWP2 reaching the terminal. Only the candidate control channel in BWP1 is monitored.
  • Solution 3.2 The candidate control channels monitored in slotn are allocated in a predetermined proportion among M BWPs, where the M BWPs are M BWPs out of N BWPs, and M is a positive integer less than or equal to N. For example, take two TRPs as an example. In order to ensure the robustness of the communication, the links in both TRPs need to be maintained. To this end, (2/3) C candidate control channels are monitored in BWP1, and (2) / 3) C candidate control channels. The above is the case where the candidate control channels monitored in slotn are evenly distributed in BWP1 and BWP2. Of course, this embodiment does not exclude that the candidate monitoring control channels in slotn are not allocated in equal proportion among the M BWPs.
  • the M bandwidth parts are from Q bandwidth part groups.
  • the intersection between each bandwidth part group in the Q bandwidth part groups and the M bandwidth parts is not empty.
  • at least one bandwidth part among the M bandwidth parts belongs to the bandwidth part group.
  • the Q bandwidth partial groups are determined according to signaling sent by the base station to the terminal, and / or obtained according to a rule agreed in advance by the base station and the terminal.
  • Condition 3 There is an association relationship between the parameter configurations of the N channels and / or signals in the N bandwidth parts, and the association relationship between the two parameter configurations indicates at least one of the following: according to one channel and / or
  • the parameter configuration of the signal can obtain the parameter configuration of another channel and / or signal; certain parameter combinations of the two channels and / or signals do not want to appear at the same time, that is, when parameter 1 of the first signal is configured to the first value, Parameter 2 of the second signal is not desirably configured to a second value.
  • parameter 1 and parameter 2 can be the same type of parameters, or they can be different types of parameters.
  • the following parameters can be configured:
  • Parameter 1 The parameters of the scrambling sequences of the channels in the N bandwidth sections are different.
  • the PDSCH scramble sequence generation initialization parameters are shown in formula (1), and the specific scramble sequence generation can refer to the 38.211 protocol.
  • N ID, 1 can be configured for the PDSCH in BWP1
  • n ID, 2 can be configured for the PDSCH in BWP2, so that when PDSCH1 and PDSCH2 in FIG. 11 occupy the same time-frequency resources, they are added on the basis of space division.
  • the interference sequence is randomized to achieve a certain interference cancellation effect.
  • n ID is the temporary identification number of the terminal
  • q is the transmission block index
  • n ID is a parameter configured at a high level, which can be regarded as a virtual cell number.
  • Parameter two The generation parameters of the scrambled sequences of the reference signals in the N bandwidth sections are the same.
  • the PDSCH DMRS sequence generation initialization is shown in formula (2).
  • the DMRS sequences in these two BWPs must be the same, so that in (2) n SCID , l and One or more of them are the same.
  • one solution is It can also change dynamically, but TRP1 and TRP2 communicate through the implementation of two BWPs in the same time unit. The same is true for dynamic scheduling.
  • Another option is Not notified in DCI, that is, n SCID is not included in DCI, it can be achieved by configuring N ID to have only one value.
  • the specific meaning of each parameter in formula (2) can refer to the protocols 38.211 and 38.331.
  • Solution 1 The subcarrier spacing in different BWPs is restricted, and the cyclic shift length in different BWPs is the same.
  • the N BWPs obtain the DMRS information in the formula (2)
  • the N BWPs all refer to the same set (subcarrier interval, cyclic shift length) to obtain the And l.
  • BWP1 and BWP2 are obtained by referring to (subcarrier interval 3 and cyclic shift length 3).
  • the time domain symbol position where the demodulation reference signal is located is calculated as the time domain symbol index in the time unit corresponding to (subcarrier interval 3, cyclic shift length 3).
  • the number of time-domain symbols included in a set of consecutive time-domain symbols restricted by the demodulation reference signals in different BWPs is the same. That is, the single symbol and double symbol in 38.211 cannot be changed dynamically.
  • the protocols 38.211, 38.212, and 38.331 in order to achieve a single symbol and a double symbol that do not change dynamically, one way is to configure the maxLength to 1, which is fixed to a single symbol. Another way is to configure maxLength to 2, but the DCI does not carry notification information for the dynamic change of single symbol and double symbol, and is fixed to double symbols.
  • the DCI when the N value is greater than a predetermined value, the DCI includes first information indication information, and when the N value is less than or equal to the predetermined value, the DCI includes first information indication information.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following information: single symbol or double symbol indication information, and n SCID indication information.
  • Parameter three The division of the precoding resource group in the N bandwidth parts is aligned. Alignment means that a precoding group in the first bandwidth part includes a precoding group in the second bandwidth part, and / or a precoding group in the second bandwidth part includes a precoding group in the first bandwidth part, such as As shown in FIG. 12, a precoding group of BWP1 and a precoding group of BWP2 are the same, that is, a precoding group of BWP1 includes a precoding group of BWP2, and a precoding group of BWP2 also includes a precoding group of BWP1. A precoding group.
  • a precoding group indicates that the precoding of channel signals (such as PDSCH) falling in a precoding group is the same, and / or the precoding of reference signals (such as demodulating reference signals) falling in a precoding group is the same. . This is because the channels in both BWPs are the target channels of a terminal. If the precoding group is aligned, it is helpful for the terminal to do interference cancellation. Otherwise, one precoding group in PDSCH1 in FIG. 11 includes two precoding groups of PDSCH2. When the terminal receives PDSCH1, it is not easy to eliminate interference caused by PDSCH2.
  • Parameter four The configuration of the parameters belonging to the predetermined parameter set of the channels and / or signals in the N bandwidth sections is the same.
  • the configuration of radiolinkmonitoring as shown in FIG. 5 is shared by two BWPs, or the radiolinkmonitoring and pdsch-config are shared as shown in FIG. 6.
  • Figure 5 and Figure 6 are sharing methods. In this embodiment, it is not excluded that each BWP independently configures radiolinkmonitoring and / or pdsch-config, but only requires that the parameters of radiolinkmonitoring and / or pdsch-config configured in the two BWPs are the same. of.
  • the parameters in the predetermined parameter set may also be at least one of the following: rate matching information, measurement reference signal information, notification method of the precoding resource group (for details, refer to prb-BundlingType in protocol 38.331), and aperiodic measurement reference signal.
  • Parameter five When there is an intersection between time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources and / or reference signals occupied by the channels and / or signals in the N bandwidths, the channels and / or signals in the N bandwidths The transmission direction must be the same and cannot be on the same resource.
  • One TRP instructs the terminal to perform uplink transmission, and the other TRP instructs the terminal to perform downlink transmission.
  • BWP1 corresponding to TRP1
  • BWP2 corresponding to TRP2
  • the terminal performs downlink transmission; and / or BWP1 (corresponding to TRP2) cannot instruct the terminal to perform channel and / or signal transmission on the time domain and / or frequency domain resources indicated by the terminal in BWP1 (corresponding to TRP1).
  • the reserved field indicates that the terminal needs to perform rate matching on channels and / or signals in these fields, and cannot perform channel and / or signal transmission, and / or BWP1 and BWP2 share a slot structure indication information.
  • the foregoing adopts different BWPs configured for different TRPs, but the activated N BWPs configured for one terminal need to meet agreed conditions.
  • the configuration parameters of the channels and / or signals in the N bandwidth portions need to meet agreed conditions.
  • the following manner may be adopted: there is only one BWP that is active at a time in a CC, and through different control channels included in a BWP The resource group corresponds to different TRPs.
  • a BWP can include multiple sets of PDSCH / PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) / PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel) / configuration of reference signals and establishment
  • the correspondence between multiple sets of control channel resource groups and multiple sets of PDSCH / PUCCH / PUSCH / reference signals can also achieve different purposes for different TRP channels and / or signal configurations.
  • a CORESET in FIG. 13 is a control channel resource, and a CORESET group 1 may include one or more CORESETs.
  • both the DCI included in CORESET1 and CORESET2 can indicate BWP, but two BWPs that need to be activated by the same time unit indicated by two CORESET groups need to meet the agreed conditions that the N BWPs need to meet. Or it is agreed that the BWPs activated by CORESET group 1 and CORESET group 2 in the same time unit are the same.
  • a control channel resource in FIG. 13 is a CORESET.
  • a control channel resource in this embodiment may be a search space set, or a search space, or a candidate control channel, and of course, it may also be another control channel resource.
  • the group information identifier is 0 from TRP1 or sent to TRP2.
  • the group information identifier is 1 from TRP2 or sent to TRP2.
  • the association is different.
  • the channels and / or signals identified by the groups are different types of channels and / or signals, and their configuration needs to meet the above-mentioned constraints, or the above-mentioned association relationship exists between their parameter configurations.
  • N BWPs there are N BWPs that are activated in the same time period in a CC. While supporting the independent configuration parameters of the BWP corresponding to each TRP, the N BWPs must be kept as far away as possible, so that the terminal side Receiving channels and / or signals based on a larger BWP that can include these N BWPs can reduce terminal power consumption.
  • N BWPs that are active in the same time period in a CC need frequency division.
  • the BWP is frequency division, which increases robustness and reduces power consumption.
  • Each panel on the terminal side only handles a relatively small bandwidth.
  • panel1 on the terminal only handles BWP1 bandwidth
  • panel2 on the terminal only handles BWP2 bandwidth.
  • the link between the terminal and one TRP is interrupted, and the link between the terminal and another TRP can also be maintained.
  • the frequency domain distribution of BWP1 and BWP2 in FIG. 14 is shown in FIG. 15. It can be seen that there is no overlap between the frequency domain resources occupied by BWP1 and BWP2.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC-CE Medium Access Control-Control Element
  • a time unit may be a slot or an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) symbol, and the time domain length may also be a subframe.
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • a correspondence relationship between the T1 time unit set and the T1 activated BWP set, and / or a correspondence relationship between the T1 time unit set and the T1 default BWP set may be determined.
  • the correspondence relationship may be notified in a control signaling.
  • time units included in one time unit set in the T1 time unit set are discontinuous.
  • T1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the time units among the T1 time units appear in turn.
  • Embodiment 4 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 4:
  • a predetermined condition is satisfied between N BWPs in an activated state in the same time unit.
  • the set of BWPs in the activated state at time t1 is ⁇ BWP1, BWP2 ⁇
  • the set of BWPs in the activated state at t2 is ⁇ BWP3, BWP4 ⁇
  • the control channel in the BWP1 and / or BWP2 in the activated state at t1 triggers the BWP in the activation t2 period to be ⁇ BWP3, BWP4 ⁇ .
  • BWP1 in Figure 17 corresponds to TRP1 and BWP2 corresponds to TRP2, and there is no ideal backhaul between TRP1 and TRP2, if both TRP1 and TRP2 can dynamically indicate the BWP switch instruction information, it will cause the dynamic control signaling in BWP1 corresponding to TRP1 to be triggered.
  • the BWP triggered by the dynamic control signaling of BWP2 corresponding to TWP2 and TRP2 cannot meet the predetermined conditions that need to be satisfied between N BWPs that are active in the same time period. To this end, there are the following options:
  • Solution 1 Only the DCI transmitted in one BWP of the N BWPs has the BWP dynamic switching indication information, for example, the DCI in the main BWP has the BWP dynamic switching indication information, and the other BWP cannot have the dynamic switching indication information. After one BWP is switched, the other BWP is also switched. Or after one BWP is switched, another BWP needs to be switched or deactivated if it does not meet the agreed conditions (it should be noted that "deactivation" indicates that the BWP is not in an activated state). Thus even if multiple BWPs are configured in one CC.
  • the control channel included in the BWP includes BWP handover instruction information, that is, the bandwidth part indication information (Bandwidth part indicator) in the DCI 1_1 or DCI 0_1 in the protocol 38.212.
  • the number of bits is not only obtained according to the number of BWPs configured in the CC, but also determined according to whether BWP_Indicator_Present is configured in the BWP where DCI1_1 or DCI0_1 is located.
  • the number of bits in the Bandwidth indicator indicator of DCI1_1 and / or DCI0_1 transmitted in this BWP is obtained according to the number of BWP configured in CC.
  • the Bandwidth part indicator of the DCI1_1 and / or DCI0_1 indicates that the number of bits in the domain is 0, even if the number of BWPs configured in the CC where the BWP is located is greater than one.
  • BWP_Indicator_Present signaling may also be referred to as an enabling domain in which the BWP indication domain in the DCI can be obtained according to the number of bandwidth portions configured in the CC, and BWP_Indicator_Present may also be referred to as another name.
  • BWP_Indicator_Present For example, if BWP_Indicator_Present is enabled in BWP1, the number of bits in the Bandwidth Part Indicator field of DCI1_1 and / or DCI0_1 in BWP1 can be greater than 0, which can indicate the dynamic switching of BWP.
  • BWP_Indicator_Present is disabled in BWP2, and the number of bits in the Bandwidth part indicator field of DCI1_1 and / or DCI0_1 in BWP2 is 0. That is, DCI1_1 and / or DCI0_1 in BWP2 cannot indicate the dynamic switching of BWP.
  • the Bandwidth part indicator indicator in the above DCI1_1 and / or DCI0_1 indicates a BWP. Further, when BWP switching is instructed in DCI1_1 and / or DCI0_1 in BWP1, such as shown in FIG. 17, it indicates switching from ⁇ BWP1, BWP2 ⁇ to ⁇ BWP3, BWP4 ⁇ , DCI1_1 and / or Bandwidth part indicator in DCI0_1.
  • Each indication value in can correspond to one or more BWPs, and the high-level signaling needs to establish the corresponding relationship shown in Table 1.
  • the BWP switching action is not initiated.
  • the difference set is not empty, the BWP switching action is started. If there are two currently activated BWPs in Table 1, and the BWP indicated in the DCI is activated as ⁇ BWP5 ⁇ in Table 1, the activated BWPs can be changed from two to one.
  • the BWP_Indicator_Present signaling should be referred to as an enablement domain in the DCI indicating whether the BWP domain can be obtained according to the number of bandwidth part sets configured in the CC.
  • the number of bits in the Bandwidth indicator indication field is obtained based on the number of bandwidth part sets configured in the CC. As shown in Table 1, ⁇ BWP1, BWP2 ⁇ , ⁇ BWP3, BWP4 ⁇ , ⁇ BWP5 ⁇ , ⁇ BWP6 BWP7 ⁇ 4 BWP sets, so the number of bits in the Bandwidth part indicator field is 4; when disabled, even if multiple BWP sets are configured in the CC, the Bandwidth part indicator field in the control signaling in the BWP The number of bits is 0.
  • the intersection between the bandwidth parts included in the different bandwidth part sets in Table 1 is empty, and this embodiment does not exclude that the intersection between the bandwidth parts included in the different bandwidth part sets is not empty.
  • a BWP set may also be an empty set. When the BWP set is an empty set, it indicates that multiple currently activated BWPs are deactivated.
  • BWP_Indicator_Present in BWP.
  • this value can also be configured in CORESET or search space.
  • BWP_Indicator_Present in the control information in one CORESET group is enabled, and BWP_Indicator_Present in the control information in another CORESET group. Disabled. That is, the number of bits in the BWP indication field in the DCI in the CORESET group is 0, even if the number of candidate BWP sets included in the CC is greater than one.
  • Both BWP / two CORESET groups can trigger new BWP dynamically. If the N BWPs that are active at the same time do not meet the conditions agreed in the second or third embodiment, the terminal will deactivate some of them. BWP. Further, the terminal may notify the base station of the deactivated BWP information, or only notify the base station of the deactivation action. Or when the N BWPs do not satisfy the constraints, the terminal requests the base station to deactivate one or more BWPs.
  • Embodiment 5 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 5:
  • a BWP is activated periodically. For example, a BWP is activated on ⁇ slotn, slotn + T, slotn + 2T, ..., slotn + kT, 7-8 ⁇
  • the slot is in an inactive state, where T is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1. This needs to configure the period of the BWP and the period offset information in the control signaling for configuring the BWP.
  • the BWP1 period is in an active state and inactive between the two periods.
  • a BWP is semi-persistently activated, that is, the BWP can be activated through control signaling in a periodic activation state, or the BWP can be deactivated through control signaling, so that the BWP Inactive, similar to semi-continuous reference signal.
  • the BWP can be periodic or semi-persistent
  • the terminal may not receive any signals on these time units, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal.
  • the terminal does not receive any channels and / or signals, at least not any channels and / or signals in this CC.
  • Embodiment 6 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 6
  • the primary BWP and the secondary BWP have at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the control channel scheduling signal of the main bandwidth part is in the auxiliary bandwidth part. That is, the control information of the main bandwidth part can schedule the channels and / or signals of the auxiliary bandwidth part, but the control information of the auxiliary bandwidth part cannot schedule the channels and / or signals of the main bandwidth part; or the control channel is not included in the auxiliary bandwidth part. And / or, in this embodiment, the main bandwidth part includes a common control channel, and the auxiliary bandwidth part does not include a common control channel. The information obtained based on the common control information of the main bandwidth part can be used for the auxiliary bandwidth part.
  • Feature two The minimum interval between time units in the time unit set in which the main bandwidth part is in an activated state is less than or equal to a predetermined value.
  • the time unit in which the main bandwidth portion is located is continuous.
  • Feature three There is at least one main bandwidth part in a time unit.
  • Feature four Except for the switching time of the two main bandwidth parts (that is, the time gap existing when the main bandwidth part is switched), at least one main bandwidth part exists in one time unit.
  • one period includes more than one time unit, that is, at least one main bandwidth part exists in each time unit, that is, each The signal sent by the base station to the terminal in each time unit can be sent at least through the main bandwidth part, otherwise the base station needs to send a signal to the terminal in a time unit, but there is no main bandwidth part in this time unit, the control channel cannot be sent, or the signal is not If the secondary bandwidth part is periodic or semi-continuous.
  • the auxiliary bandwidth part is in a period activation state, wherein one cycle of the auxiliary bandwidth part includes one or more time units.
  • the auxiliary bandwidth part is semi-continuously activated, wherein one cycle of the auxiliary bandwidth part includes one or more time units.
  • the secondary bandwidth part when activated, it is in a periodical activation state, and thus has a period.
  • Feature 7 The terminal determines a period and / or a period offset in which the auxiliary bandwidth part is in an activated state according to a predetermined rule or received signaling information. For example, the period of the secondary bandwidth part and the period offset are notified in the signaling information.
  • Feature eight The primary bandwidth part and the secondary bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts are determined according to a predetermined rule or received signaling information.
  • the signaling information it is notified which of the N bandwidth parts are the primary bandwidth part and which are the secondary bandwidth part.
  • the bandwidth part identification number such as bwp-Id in the protocol 38.331
  • the component carriers to which the N bandwidth parts belong are secondary component carriers in a component carrier group, all the N bandwidth parts are secondary bandwidth parts.
  • the PCell in the MCG must have the main bandwidth portion, the other CCs in the MCG may not have the main bandwidth portion, the PSCell in the SCG must have the main bandwidth portion, and the other CCs in the SCG may not have the main bandwidth portion.
  • the N bandwidth parts are all secondary bandwidth parts.
  • the dynamic control information transmitted in the main bandwidth section carries the dynamic switching instruction information of the main bandwidth section.
  • the dynamic control information transmitted in the main bandwidth section carries the dynamic switching instruction information of the auxiliary bandwidth section.
  • Feature thirteenth The number of bits in the bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information transmitted in the main bandwidth part is obtained according to the number of bandwidth parts configured in the component carrier. Refer to the seventh embodiment, that is, BWP_Indicator_Present is enabled in the main bandwidth part.
  • Feature fourteen The number of bits in the bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information transmitted in the main bandwidth part is obtained according to the number of bandwidth part sets configured in the component carrier.
  • Feature fifteen The number of bits in the bandwidth indication field of the dynamic control information in the auxiliary bandwidth part is 0. Referring to the seventh embodiment, that is, BWP_Indicator_Present is disabled in the auxiliary bandwidth part.
  • Embodiment 7 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 7:
  • a predetermined condition needs to be satisfied between BWPs in an activated state included in two CCs.
  • the BWP in the activated state in CC1 is BWP1
  • the BWP in the activated state in CC2 is BWP2.
  • BWP1 and BWP2 need to meet agreed conditions, and / or parameters between channels and / or signals included in BWP1 and channels and / or signals included in BWP2 need to meet agreed conditions.
  • the agreed condition may be one or more of the constraint conditions in the first embodiment and the second embodiment.
  • the frequency domain resources occupied by CC1 and CC2 are overlapped, except that their configuration can be independently configured by each CC according to the configuration in protocol 38.331.
  • This embodiment also does not exclude that the frequency domains occupied by the two CCs that have an association relationship intersect, and they do not necessarily overlap completely.
  • the two CCs that are related may also have no intersection between the occupied frequency domains.
  • the two CCs correspond to two TRPs, respectively.
  • the activated BWPs included in the two CCs need to meet agreed conditions, and specifically include that the activated BWPs included in the two CCs in one time unit need to meet agreed conditions.
  • Solution 1 Of the two CCs that have an association relationship, only one CC includes BWP handover indication information in the control signaling.
  • the BWP handover instruction information indicates the BWP handover situation in the two CCs.
  • the control signaling in CC1 includes the BWP handover instruction information, which indicates the BWP dynamic handover instruction information in CC1 and CC2.
  • the dynamic handover instruction information indicates the current BWP
  • the corresponding CC does not start the BWP handover related process.
  • CC2 may still include a control channel.
  • Both CCs may include a control channel for BWP dynamic switching indication information.
  • the terminal informs the base station of this information, and / or the terminal abandons the reception of channels and / or signals in one BWP.
  • the association between the CC in MCG and the CC in SCG needs to be established. relationship.
  • the configuration parameters of the two CCs that have an associated relationship need to meet the agreed conditions, and / or the configuration parameters of the channels and / or signals in the two CCs that have an associated relationship need to meet the agreed conditions.
  • there is an overlap between the frequency domain resources between the two CCs that have an association relationship it does not exclude that there is no overlap between the frequency domain resources between the two CCs that have an association relationship, but there is an overlap in the airspace resources occupied by the two CCs.
  • the time slot structure indication of two CCs is limited, CC1 (corresponding to TRP1) instructs the UE to perform uplink transmission in the time domain and / or frequency domain, and CC2 (corresponding to TRP2) cannot instruct the UE to perform uplink transmission, and / or two
  • the CC shares a slot structure indication field, where the slot structure indication information includes the slot format indicator (Slot Format Indicator, SFI) indicated in DCI format 2_0, and high-level public information tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon, tdd-UL -DL-ConfigurationCommon2, the structure of the time slot notified by the proprietary signaling tdd-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated, and also includes the semi-persistent channel, periodic reference signal, semi-continuous reference signal, and the channel and / or signal notified in the DCI.
  • SFI Slot Format Indicator
  • Embodiment 8 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 8
  • one terminal UE and two TRPs remain connected. There is no ideal Backhaul between the two TRPs.
  • the two TRPs can be scheduled independently. While increasing the airspace dimension to increase the throughput rate, the UE is increased. Robustness.
  • two TRPs correspond to two CORESET groups or two BWPs or two CCs.
  • TRP1 schedules PUSCH1 and TRP2 schedules PUSCH2.
  • PUSCH1 and PUSCH2 are only time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources overlap, but the demodulation reference signals they occupy are orthogonal, and the space domain resources they occupy are space.
  • the transmission filtering parameters are different, and the terminals can shoot their transmission beams at the same time, and their total transmission power does not exceed the threshold, so it is considered that there is no collision between PUSCH1 and PUSCH2.
  • the terminal uses two panels to send PUSCH1 and PUSCH2 to two TRPs, respectively.
  • PUSCH1 and PUSCH2 occur in at least one of the following situations, they are considered to be in conflict: there is a non-orthogonal demodulation reference signal in the demodulation reference signal set they occupy; the space occupied by the transmission filter parameters are the same; or The spatial transmission filter parameters of the terminals cannot be played simultaneously; the total of their transmit power exceeds the threshold.
  • Solution 1 Select one of them to send according to the signaling information and / or the agreed rules.
  • the selected PUSCH is a PUSCH with a higher priority.
  • the priority of TRP can be reflected by the priority of the following information: CORESET group / BWP / CC.
  • Solution 2 There is an overlap between two PUSCHs, and one of the PUSCHs is selected for transmission. The part that does not overlap in the two PUSCHs is still transmitted in both PUSCHs.
  • PUSCH1 occupies demodulation reference signal port ⁇ 1, 2, 3 ⁇
  • PUSCH2 occupies demodulation reference signal port ⁇ 3, 4, 5 ⁇ , and they occupy the same demodulation reference signal port 3. Only one channel can be sent on this demodulation reference signal port, such as selecting PUSCH1. Then PUSCH1 is transmitted on the demodulation reference signal port ⁇ 1, 2, 3 ⁇ , and PUSCH2 is transmitted on the port ⁇ 4, 5 ⁇ .
  • PUSCH1 occupies ⁇ beam 1 in panel1, beam 2 in panel2 ⁇
  • PUSCH2 occupies ⁇ beam 3 in panel1, beam 4 in panel3 ⁇ . Since a panel can only emit one transmission beam at a time, if there is overlap in the panels, a collision occurs.
  • each panel corresponds to a sounding reference signal set (SRS)
  • each beam corresponds to a sounding reference signal resource (SRS)
  • SRS sounding reference signal resource
  • the PUSCH1 spatial transmission filter parameter corresponds to ⁇ resource1 in set1, resource2 in set2 ⁇
  • the PUSCH2 spatial filter parameter corresponds to ⁇ resource3 in set1, resource4 in set3 ⁇ , because they correspond to the same set1, the terminal cannot simultaneously Type reduction1 in set1 and resource3 in set1.
  • ⁇ resource3 in set3 ⁇ to send PUSCH2.
  • PUSCH1 occupies demodulation reference signal port ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4 ⁇
  • PUSCH2 occupies demodulation reference signal port ⁇ 3, 5, 6 ⁇ . Because two PUSCHs on port 3 collide, only PUSCH2 is transmitted on port 3, and Port ⁇ 1, 2 ⁇ of PUSCH1 is a transport block (each transport block can independently perform channel decoding), and ⁇ 3, 4 ⁇ is another transport block. For this reason, although only conflicts occur on port 3, the time to discard is Discard all ports ⁇ 3, 4 ⁇ .
  • the sequences are orthogonal, where the sequence orthogonal includes Orthogonal Code (OCC) orthogonality, or different cyclic shifts occupying the same Zadoff-chu (ZC) sequence), they are also conflicting. Since both TRPs want to measure the same transmission beam, SRS1 and SRS2 can be combined into one measurement reference signal SRS3 (that is, the third type of signal).
  • sequence length of SRS3 is the length of the non-intersection part + the intersection part in the frequency domain resources occupied by SRS1 and SRS2, as shown in FIG. 34. It is also possible to adjust the time advance (TA) and power information of SRS3 so that both TRPs can receive SRS3.
  • the TA of SRS3 is the maximum of the TAs corresponding to SRS1 and SRS2, and the power is the maximum of the power of both.
  • the power / TA information of SRS3 can also be notified to the terminal by the base station through signaling information and / or agreed rules, so that the terminal knows what value of SRS3 power / TA information is used when SRS1 and SRS2 conflict and are transmitted using SRS3.
  • the foregoing description uses two types of uplink channels and / or signal conflicts as an example.
  • discard one of them when resources occupied by multiple types of channels and / or signals scheduled by a TRP conflict, discard one of them.
  • One method for example, when the time domain resources occupied by the SRS / PUSCH overlap, one of them is discarded according to the priority. For example, if the time domain resources occupied by the PUSCH and PUCCH are in conflict, one of them is discarded according to the priority.
  • these two types of channels and / or signals are sent to different TRPs, and there is no ideal Backhaul between the two TRPs, then such a rule should not be sampled.
  • time domains of SRS and PUSCH overlapped to different TRPs are not considered to be conflicts, they can be sent to different TRPs at the same time.
  • time domains of SRS and PUSCH overlapped to the same TRP are considered, they are considered to be conflicted. Are conflicting, schedule one of them according to agreed rules.
  • TRP1 schedules PDSCH1
  • TRP2 schedules PDSCH2
  • PDSCH1 and PDSCH2 are only time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources overlap, but the demodulation reference signals they occupy are orthogonal, and the airspace resources they occupy are spatial transmission
  • the filtering parameters are different, and the terminals can shoot their receiving beams at the same time, so that PDSCH1 and PDSCH2 do not collide.
  • the terminal uses two panels to receive the PDSCH1 and PDSCH2 sent by the two TRPs.
  • the spatial resources occupied by the two types of uplink channels and / or signals overlap, indicating that the reference signals associated with the transmission spatial filters of the two types of uplink channels and / or signals are the same reference signal, such as the transmission spatial filtering of PUSCH1.
  • the device associates SRS1, that is, the transmission spatial filter of PUSCH1 is obtained according to the transmission spatial filter of SRS1.
  • SRS1 that is, the transmission spatial filter of PUSCH1 is obtained according to the transmission spatial filter of SRS1.
  • the two types of uplink channels and / or airspace resource terminals occupied by the signals cannot be sent at the same time.
  • the group information to which the two reference signals associated with the spatial filtering parameters associated with the transmission of the two types of channels and / or signals do not meet the agreed conditions such as Two reference signals belong to the same group but are different SRS, indicating that the spatial transmission filtering parameters of the two reference signals cannot be transmitted at the same time, and two reference signals belonging to different groups indicate that the two types of channels and / or signals Spatial filtering parameters can be sent simultaneously by the terminal.
  • two reference signals belong to the same group, it means that the spatial transmission filtering parameters of the two reference signals can be sent at the same time, and two reference signals belong to different groups, it means that the spatial filtering parameters of the two types of channels and / or signals cannot be transmitted by the terminal. Send at the same time.
  • the airspace resource terminals occupied by the two types of downlink channels and / or signals cannot be received simultaneously, and the group information to which the two reference signals associated with the reception spatial filtering parameters of the two types of channels and / or signals do not meet the agreed conditions, such as Two reference signals belong to the same group but are different downlink signals, indicating that the spatial reception filtering parameters of the two reference signals cannot be received at the same time, and two reference signals belonging to different groups indicate that the two types of channels and / or signals are Spatial filtering parameters can be received simultaneously by the terminal.
  • two reference signals belong to the same group, it means that the spatial reception filtering parameters of the two reference signals can be received at the same time, and two reference signals belong to different groups, it means that the spatial filtering parameters of the two types of channels and / or signals cannot be received by the terminal. Receive at the same time.
  • the overlapping of the two airspace resources includes at least one of the following: the reference signals associated with the two airspace resources are the same; the group information to which the reference signals associated with the two airspace resources do not meet the agreed condition; The two reference signal communication nodes associated with the airspace resources cannot transmit at the same time.
  • the two reference signals have an overlap, and the two reference signals are not orthogonal.
  • different types of channels and / or signals include one or more of the following situations: Type I channels and Type II channels, Type I channels and Type II signals, Type I signals and Type II Type signals, first type channels and signals and second type channels and signals, and first type channels and second types of channels and signals, wherein different types of channels and / or signals belong to different bandwidth portions of the N bandwidth portions ; And / or, the different types of channels and / or signals are scheduled by control information in different control channel resource groups among Z control channel resource groups in the D control channel resource groups, and / or the type Z
  • the channel includes at least one of the following channel types: a data channel and a control channel
  • the type Z signal includes at least one of the following signal types: measurement reference signal, demodulation reference signal, random access signal, synchronization signal, resource request signal, and phase Tracking signal.
  • the channel includes one or more of the following channels: a control channel, a data channel, and a broadcast channel.
  • the signal includes at least one of the following signals: a demodulation reference signal, a phase tracking reference signal, a measurement reference signal, a synchronization signal, and a random access signal.
  • the association between the two pieces of information includes at least one of the following: one piece of information can be used to obtain another piece of information, the configuration range of one piece of information can be obtained according to the configuration of one piece of information, and some combined values of the two pieces of information Cannot appear at the same time.
  • the resources include at least one of the following resources: time domain resources, frequency domain resources, space domain resources, sequence resources, antenna resources, and port resources.
  • the uplink channel and / or signal is a channel and / or signal sent to TRP1.
  • the group information identifier is 1.
  • the uplink channel and / or signal is a channel and / or signal sent to TRP2, and the channels and / or signals associated with different group identifiers are different types of channels and / or signals.
  • Embodiment 10 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 10:
  • An information transmission method is provided in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, including:
  • the first resource may be determined according to the obtained first control signaling.
  • the information transmission method provided in this embodiment can be applied to both a TRP (such as a base station) and a terminal.
  • the first control signaling When applied to a base station, the first control signaling may be generated by the base station itself.
  • the first control signaling may be sent by the base station to the terminal.
  • the base station and / or the terminal itself has resources, and the base station and / or the terminal may determine which resources to use as the first resources among the existing resources according to the acquired first control signaling.
  • the terminal originally has 100 resource blocks, and the terminal may determine which resource blocks are the first resources according to the first control signaling.
  • S222 Determine the number H of resource groups included in the first resource.
  • the resource group in this embodiment refers to a group divided by the first resource, and the resource group is composed of at least one basic resource unit (such as a resource block).
  • the resource group is composed of at least one basic resource unit (such as a resource block).
  • the resource blocks with numbers 1-10 can be divided into a resource group
  • the resource blocks with numbers 11-20 can be divided into a resource group.
  • S223 Transmit a channel and / or a signal on the first resource according to the H value.
  • the resources include time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources.
  • H resource groups correspond to H sets of configuration information of channels and / or signals.
  • the H resource groups satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Each resource group in the H resource groups corresponds to K quasi-co-located reference signal sets, and the K group demodulation reference signals in the resource group correspond to the K quasi-co-located reference signal sets corresponding to the resource group.
  • the demodulation reference signal in the demodulation reference signal group and the reference signal in the corresponding quasi-co-location reference signal set satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to a class of quasi-co-location parameters.
  • Each of the H resource groups corresponds to a demodulation reference signal set, and the channels in the resource group are transmitted on the demodulation reference signal set.
  • one demodulation reference signal set includes K1 demodulation reference signal groups, and K1 is a positive integer.
  • Each of the H resource groups corresponds to a channel, and the frequency domain resources occupied by the channel belong to the resource group.
  • H resource groups correspond to H groups of Acknowledgement (ACK) / Non-Acknowledgement (NACK) information; wherein a set of ACK / NACK information includes a predetermined number of bits, and / or The information in a set of ACK / NACK information is fed back jointly.
  • ACK Acknowledgement
  • NACK Non-Acknowledgement
  • the demodulation reference signals in one demodulation reference signal group satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship
  • the demodulation reference signals in different demodulation reference signal groups do not satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship
  • the method further includes acquiring first control information and / or second control information; and determining division information of H resource groups included in the first resource according to the first control information and / or the second control information. / Or H steps to configure information.
  • the first control information may be obtained before the first resource is determined, and the second control information may be obtained before the number H of the resource groups included in the first resource is determined.
  • one or more of the information indicated in the first control information and / or the parameter information required for decoding the first control information, and / or the configuration information indicated in the first control information may be used. Species to determine the H value.
  • the first control information may directly carry grouping information, and then the H value may be directly determined according to the grouping information.
  • the first control information satisfies at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the first control information includes H1 resource group information.
  • the first control information includes H3 sets of configuration information.
  • the second control information includes H2 resource group information.
  • the second control information includes H4 sets of configuration information.
  • H1, H2, H3, and H4 are all non-negative integers.
  • the first control information and the second control information may instruct the terminal or the TRP to divide the resource group.
  • the resource group information here can indicate the division of the resource group.
  • the division of resource groups can also be indicated according to the configuration information.
  • the configuration information includes at least one of the following information:
  • Channel quasi-co-location reference signal set channel demodulation reference signal information, channel ACK / NACK information, channel number information and signal information.
  • the first resource is determined; the number H of resource groups included in the first resource is determined; a channel and / or a signal is transmitted on the first resource according to the H value; wherein the H Each resource group corresponds to the H-set configuration information of the channel and / or signal; the resources include time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources.
  • Embodiment 11 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 11:
  • the first resource is notified in the first control signaling, and the terminal determines the number H of resource groups included in the first resource according to the signaling information or an agreed rule.
  • the second control signaling indicates the division of the resource group, and / or at least one of the following information corresponding to the resource group: a quasi co-location reference signal set, a demodulation reference signal set, ACK / NACK information, and the number of channels.
  • different frequency domain groups correspond to different TRPs, that is, downlink data sent by TRP1 is transmitted in frequency domain group 1, and downlink data sent by TRP2 is transmitted in frequency domain group 2.
  • the first frequency signal is notified in the first control signaling.
  • the first frequency domain is a PRB occupied in a BWP (for example, the BWP includes 100 Physical Resource Blocks (PRBs)).
  • the domain includes PRB ⁇ 3, 4, 6, 10, 11, 25, 45 ⁇ , and the terminal determines the frequency domain group included in the first frequency domain through signaling information or an agreed rule. If it is determined to be one frequency domain group, there is no second control signaling. If it is determined to be two frequency domain groups, the second control signaling further informs the division of the frequency domain group included in the first frequency domain. As shown in FIG. 24, the first frequency domain group includes PRB ⁇ 4, 11, 45, 57 ⁇ , and the second frequency domain group includes PRB ⁇ 3, 6, 10, 25 ⁇ .
  • the second control signaling may notify the PRB occupied by each frequency domain group in the first frequency domain.
  • the union of the PRBs occupied by the data transmitted by the two TRPs can be obtained through the first frequency domain notified in the first control signaling, and then in the second control signaling Notification of the division of frequency domain groups.
  • the method of this embodiment can save overhead, and can also reduce the blind detection control of the terminal when multiple TRP and single TRP are dynamically switched. The complexity of the channel.
  • the second information corresponding to each frequency domain group needs to be determined.
  • the second information includes at least one of the following: quasi-co-located reference signal information, demodulated reference signal information, ACK / NACK information, and the number of channels.
  • One or more of the second information corresponding to each frequency domain group may be notified in the first control signaling, and / or the division of the frequency domain group may also be notified in the first control signaling.
  • the terminal obtains the number H of the frequency domain group according to the information, so as to determine whether there is second control signaling.
  • the second control signaling may notify the second information corresponding to each frequency domain group not notified in the first control signaling.
  • the first control signaling notifies two sets of quasi-co-located reference signals, and the terminal knows that the number of frequency domain groups H is two.
  • the number of domain groups H is 1.
  • the demodulated signal information may be a demodulated reference signal port set corresponding to each resource group, or may be pattern information of a demodulated reference signal corresponding to each resource group. That is, the pattern information in different resource groups can be different.
  • the demodulation reference signal type (DMRS type 1) and DMRS type 2 information in different resource groups can be different.
  • pattern also includes other time domain, sequence and other information.
  • one way of notifying the quasi-co-located reference signal set is that one quasi-co-located reference signal set corresponds to one demodulated reference signal set.
  • the demodulation reference signal in the demodulation reference signal set satisfies a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the demodulation reference signal in the demodulation reference signal set and a reference signal in the quasi-co-location reference signal set are related to a type.
  • the quasi-co-location parameter satisfies the quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the demodulation reference signal set in the above manner includes a demodulation reference signal group.
  • each of the one demodulation reference signal set may include more than one demodulation reference signal group.
  • the demodulation reference signals located in one demodulation reference signal group satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship; different demodulation reference signal groups do not satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship; one DMRS set includes one or two DMRSs Group, each DMRS group corresponds to a quasi-co-located reference signal set.
  • the reference signals in the quasi-co-located reference signal set corresponding to the DMRS and the DMRS in the DMRS group satisfy a quasi-co-located relationship with respect to a type of quasi-co-located parameter.
  • one or more pieces of second information may also be shared by two frequency domain groups, for example, the demodulation reference signal sets corresponding to the two frequency domain groups are the same.
  • the H value is determined by one or more of the following methods:
  • Method 1 The information indicated in the first control information, such as displaying the indicated H value.
  • Method 2 Decoding the parameter information required for the first control information.
  • the parameter information required for decoding the first control information may include one of the following parameters: Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) information of the first control information, and demodulation reference signal information of the first control information. For example, if the CRC is the first sequence, then H is the first value. If the CRC is the second sequence, then H is the second value.
  • CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
  • the demodulation reference signal sequence of the first control information is a first sequence, and H is a first value.
  • the demodulation reference signal sequence of the first control information is a second sequence, and H is a second value.
  • the demodulation reference signal of the first control information indicates a demodulation reference signal of a control channel where the first control information is located.
  • the quasi co-location reference signal of the demodulation reference signal of the first control information belongs to the first group, then H is the first value;
  • the quasi co-location reference signal information of the demodulation reference signal of the first control information belongs to the second group, then H is the second value.
  • the division of the quasi-co-location reference signal group is negotiated in advance.
  • Method three demodulation reference signal information of the channel indicated in the first control information. As described above, the number of demodulation reference signal groups included in the demodulation reference signal set is an H value.
  • Method four the frequency domain group division information indicated in the first control information.
  • the number of frequency domain groups is the value of H.
  • Method five quasi-co-located reference signal set information indicated in the first control information.
  • the number of the quasi-co-located reference set is the value of H;
  • the first resource may be a frequency domain resource.
  • the first resource may also be a time domain resource. At this time, it is determined that the number of time domain resource groups included in the first time domain resource is H.
  • the H resource groups correspond to H sets of configuration information.
  • the configuration information includes at least one of the following: a demodulation reference signal set, a quasi co-location reference signal set, ACK / NACK information, channel number information, and H1 resource group information in H resource groups is first.
  • the control signaling is notified, and the H2 resource group information is notified in the second control signaling.
  • / or H3 sets of configuration information are notified in the first control signaling, and H4 sets of configuration information are notified in the second control signaling.
  • H1, H2, H3, and H4 are non-negative integers
  • Embodiment 12 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 12
  • This embodiment provides a monitoring method, as shown in FIG. 25, including:
  • the first communication node determines a candidate control channel to be monitored in a time unit according to at least one of the following information: an active bandwidth portion of a component carrier, a control channel resource group, and a set of search space groups.
  • the time The quasi co-location reference signal configuration information of the candidate control channel in the unit, and the conflict resolution solution of the spatial receiving filter parameters of the plurality of candidate control channels in the time unit.
  • S252 Listen for control information on the candidate control channel for which monitoring is determined.
  • demodulation reference signals of multiple control channels with overlapping time domains in the time unit do not satisfy the QCL relationship with respect to the spatial reception parameters.
  • a solution for conflicting reception filtering parameters of multiple candidate control channels is determined according to at least one of the following information:
  • the determined candidate control channel should satisfy:
  • the demodulation reference signal of the candidate control channel monitored by the first communication node and the reference signal associated with the spatial receiving parameter selected in the spatial receiving parameter conflict resolution solution of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit are related to one
  • the quasi-co-location parameters satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the reference signal associated with the spatial receive parameter selected in the solution is not related to a class of quasi co-location parameters
  • the first communication node does not listen to the candidate control channel.
  • the candidate control channel satisfies at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Each control channel resource group in the plurality of control channel resource groups includes at least one monitoring candidate control channel.
  • Each set of search space groups includes at least one monitored candidate control channel in the set of each search space group.
  • Each of the plurality of bandwidth sections activated in one component carrier includes at least one monitoring candidate control channel.
  • the candidate control channel for monitoring meets at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Feature 21 Candidate control channels monitored in a time unit are allocated in multiple control channel resource groups according to a predetermined ratio.
  • Feature 22 The candidate control channels monitored in a time unit are allocated in a set of multiple search space groups according to a predetermined ratio.
  • Feature 23 The candidate control channel monitored in a time unit is allocated in a predetermined proportion among a plurality of bandwidth parts activated in a component carrier.
  • Feature 24 The allocation of the candidate control channels monitored in a time unit among multiple control channel resource groups is determined according to the conflict resolution solution of the spatial reception filtering parameters of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit.
  • Feature 25 According to a conflict resolution solution of spatial receiving filtering parameters of multiple candidate control channels in a time unit, determine the allocation situation of the candidate control channels monitored in a time unit among a set of multiple search space groups.
  • Feature 26 Determine the allocation of the candidate control channels monitored in a time unit among multiple bandwidth portions activated in a component carrier according to the conflict resolution solution of the spatial reception filtering parameters of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit.
  • control channel resource group to which the control channel resource belongs can be determined according to the frequency domain bandwidth where the control channel resource is located, where the frequency domain bandwidth includes at least one of the following: a component carrier and a bandwidth portion.
  • control channel in a time unit meets at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Feature 31 The number of control channels in a time unit is greater than a predetermined control channel number threshold.
  • Feature 32 The number of control channels in a time unit is greater than or equal to the number of candidate control channels determined to be monitored in the time unit.
  • the first communication node determines a candidate control channel to be monitored in a time unit according to at least one of the following information: an active bandwidth portion of a component carrier, a control channel resource group, and a set of search space groups.
  • Embodiment 13 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 13:
  • the terminal determines a candidate control channel to be monitored in a time unit according to at least one of the following information: an active bandwidth portion of a component carrier, a control channel resource group, and a search A set of space groups, quasi-co-located reference signal configuration information of candidate control channels in the time unit, and conflict resolution solutions for spatial reception filtering parameters of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit.
  • control information is monitored on the candidate control channel determined to be monitored.
  • the spatial reception filtering parameters of multiple candidate control channels in a time unit conflict :
  • the demodulation reference signals of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit do not satisfy the QCL relationship with respect to the spatial reception parameters, and do not satisfy the QCL relationship.
  • the demodulation reference signals of multiple candidate control channels that overlap in the time domain in the time unit do not satisfy the QCL relationship with respect to the spatial reception parameters; the demodulation reference signals of the plurality of control channels do not satisfy the QCL relationship with respect to the spatial reception parameters, including the The quasi-co-location reference signals of the demodulation reference signals of the multiple control channels with respect to the spatial reception filtering parameters do not satisfy the QCL relationship. Failure to satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship indicates that the receiving beams of multiple control channels on the terminal side are different. When the terminal can only play one receiving beam in one time unit or one time domain symbol, it is necessary to determine the tradeoff of the multiple receiving beams.
  • Multiple candidate control channels with overlapping time domains in the time unit cannot be received by the first communication node simultaneously; the multiple candidate control channels cannot be received by the first communication node simultaneously, including solutions of the multiple candidate control channels.
  • the tuned reference signal cannot be received by the first communication node at the same time, and / or the quasi-co-location reference signal of the plurality of candidate control channels with respect to a spatial reception parameter cannot be received by the first communication node.
  • the demodulation reference signal of the candidate control channel monitored by the first communication node in a time unit and the reference signal associated with the spatial reception parameter selected in the spatial reception parameter conflict resolution solution of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit are related to a class Quasi-co-location parameters satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship; and / or,
  • the first type of quasi co-location parameter is not satisfied.
  • the first communication node does not listen to the candidate control channel.
  • the candidate control channel corresponding to the other receiving beam is discarded; or when receiving beams are colliding, using part of the receiving beam, the receiving beam of the candidate control channel corresponding to the discarded receiving beam is changed to conflict Receive beam selected in the solution.
  • Each control channel resource group in the plurality of control channel resource groups includes at least one listening candidate control channel.
  • Each set of search space groups in the set of multiple search space groups includes at least one monitored candidate control channel.
  • Each of the plurality of bandwidth sections activated in one component carrier includes at least one listening candidate control channel.
  • different TRPs in FIG. 3 and FIG. 13 correspond to different CORESET groups / different search space groups / BWPs.
  • candidate control channel beams collide and / or when the number of control channels is greater than the terminal capability, each TRP Some candidate control channels must be reserved to ensure that the TRP can keep working with the terminal.
  • Candidate control channels monitored in a time unit are allocated in a plurality of control channel resource groups according to a predetermined ratio.
  • the candidate control channels monitored in a time unit are allocated in a predetermined proportion in a set of multiple search space groups.
  • the candidate control channel monitored in a time unit is allocated in a predetermined proportion among a plurality of bandwidth parts activated in the one component carrier.
  • different TRPs in FIG. 3 and FIG. 13 correspond to different CORESET groups / different search space groups / BWPs.
  • candidate controls between TRPs The channel leaving depends on the above-mentioned predetermined ratio. Specifically, some candidate control channels may be reserved for each TRP, so as to ensure that the TRP can keep working with the terminal, or it can be reserved only to the TRP with stronger terminal performance and terminal communication.
  • a control channel resource group to which the control channel resource belongs is determined according to a frequency domain bandwidth where the control channel resource is located.
  • the frequency domain bandwidth includes at least one of the following: a component carrier and a bandwidth portion.
  • the control channel resources included in a CC / BWP belong to a control channel resource group.
  • the number of control channels in a time unit is greater than a predetermined threshold. It should be noted here that the control channel in one time unit is the control channel in one time unit obtained according to the configuration information. For example, according to the configuration information slotn, 8 control channels are included, but the terminal can only monitor 6 control channels at most. For this reason, 2 need to be discarded, and the monitoring candidate control channel is determined to be 6 of the 8 ones.
  • the number of control channels in one time unit is greater than or equal to the number of candidate control channels determined for monitoring in the time unit, wherein the control channel included in one time unit is a time unit obtained according to the configuration information of the base station Included in the control channel. For example, according to the configuration information, it is determined that the control channel included in a time unit is 80, but the terminal capacity is limited, and the number of candidate control channels that the terminal can monitor in a time unit is only 44. Among the 80 control channels, 44 control channels are selected.
  • a beam conflict solution is determined first (that is, a part of a plurality of quasi-co-reference signal sets is selected) . For example, two receive beams are selected from the four receive beams, and the control channels corresponding to the remaining two receive beams are not monitored. If the number of control channels corresponding to the selected receiving beam does not exceed a predetermined value, the control channels corresponding to the selected receiving beam are determined as control channels that the terminal needs to monitor, and these control channels are no longer discarded.
  • the control channel to be monitored is further selected according to the control channel resource group / search space group / BWP information.
  • the beams of the control channels collide first ensure that at least one control channel of the different control channel resource group / search space group / BWP information needs to be monitored, and then determine a beam conflict solution of the control channel.
  • each TRP includes 2 receivers and a total of 4 receive beams, and the terminal can only send out two receive beams, so the 2 receive beams need to correspond to two TRPs instead of one TRP.
  • the two receiving beams selected by the terminal can only come from one TRP.
  • Embodiment 14 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 14:
  • a method for monitoring a control channel including:
  • the load of the first type of control information format is determined according to at least one of the following information: the time unit in which the first type of control information format is located, the number of load types associated with the first type of control information format, and the type M control information format Corresponding total number of types of load, signaling information, the bandwidth portion where the signal scheduled by the first type of control information format is located, and the component carrier where the signal scheduled by the first type of control information format is located.
  • control information format is DCI format.
  • the number of load types associated with the first type of control information format is determined according to at least one of the following information:
  • the bandwidth part indicates the number of bits corresponding to the domain.
  • the number of bits corresponding to the component carrier indication domain in the first type of control information format is the number of bits corresponding to the component carrier indication domain in the first type of control information format.
  • the bandwidth part in the first type of control information format indicates the number of bandwidth parts included in a bandwidth part set corresponding to a domain.
  • the parameter configuration of a bandwidth part includes at least one of the following: configuration information of resources occupied by the bandwidth part, and parameter configuration of signals in the bandwidth part.
  • control channel information format meets at least one of the following conditions in different time units:
  • the first type of control channel information format has different loads in different time units.
  • the first type of control channel information format has different load types in different time units.
  • DCI1_1 can schedule two PDSCHs in two CCs.
  • the first DCI1_1 schedules PDSCH1, and the second DCI1_1 schedules PDSCH2.
  • the information included in the first DCI1_1 needs to be understood with the parameters configured in CC1, and the information included in the second DCI1_1 needs to be understood with the parameters configured in CC1.
  • the frequency domain resource notification domain in the first DCI1_1 should be understood in the frequency domain resources of the BWP included in CC1
  • the frequency domain resource notification domain in the second DCI1_1 should be understood in the frequency domain resources of the BWP included in CC2. .
  • the number of bits required in the frequency domain indicator domain in DCI1_1 is different, so that the number of DCI1_1 load types in a slot can be two.
  • the more diverse the parameters in the CORESET where DCI1_1 is located for example, the DCI included in CORESET1 configured in CORESET1 includes the TCI indication field, and the DCI included in CORESET2 configured in CORESET2 does not include the TCI indication field, as shown in FIG. 27. Will make the number of DCI1_1 aggregated in a slot greater than 1. The above factors will affect the number of load types of a DCI1_1, so that the number of load types / loads of DCI1_1 in different time units will appear.
  • control information format may be monitored according to the determined load.
  • the payload of the first type of control information format satisfies at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the number of load types associated with the first type of control information format in the time unit is less than or equal to a first predetermined threshold, the number of load types of the first type of control information format in the time unit is greater than or equal to one.
  • the first load of the first type of control information format in the time unit is adjusted to a second load.
  • the first load is adjusted to the second load, which can be adjusted in one of the following ways: the first load is adjusted to the second load by adding 0, and / or the first load is adjusted to the first load by truncating. Two loads.
  • the number of load types associated with the first type of control information format in the time unit is greater than a third predetermined threshold, the number of load types of the first type of control information format in the time unit is adjusted to a predetermined value.
  • the adjustment is a predetermined value, which means that the F1 load is adjusted to the F2 load by adjusting the first load to the second load, where F2 is an integer less than or equal to F1.
  • the number of load types of the first type control information format in the time unit is greater than or equal to one.
  • the third load of the first type control information format in the time unit is adjusted to a fourth load.
  • the third load is adjusted to the fourth load, which can be adjusted in one of the following ways: the third load is adjusted to the fourth load by adding 0, and / or the third load is adjusted to be the truncated method to Fourth load.
  • the number of types of load of the first type control information format in the time unit is adjusted to a predetermined value.
  • the first load and the second load are two loads of the first type of control information format in the time unit, and the third load and the fourth load are the first type of the time unit. Two payloads of the control message format.
  • the large load is truncated to a small load, or the small load is supplemented by 0 to a large load, thereby reducing the blind detection load of the terminal.
  • the load of DCI1_1 does not need to be adjusted.
  • DCI1_1 when a slot includes all DCI types (including DCI1_1, DCI0_1, DCI1_0, DCI0_0) and the number of load types is greater than or equal to 4, DCI1_1 needs to be adjusted to two loads, thereby reducing the blind detection load of the terminal. However, when the total number of DCI types in a slot is less than 4, the load of DCI1_1 does not need to be adjusted. At this time, the number of DCI1_1 loads can be greater than 2. For example, a terminal in a slot only needs to monitor DCI1_1 and does not need to Other DCI format types.
  • the load of the type of control information format satisfies at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the number of load types associated with the first type of control information format is less than or equal to a seventh predetermined threshold, the number of load types of the first type of control information format is greater than or equal to one.
  • the first load of the first type of control information format is adjusted to a second load.
  • the number of load species associated with the first type of control information format is greater than a ninth predetermined threshold, the number of load species associated with the first type of control information format is adjusted to a predetermined value.
  • the number of load types of the first type control information format is greater than or equal to one.
  • the third load of the first type of control information format is adjusted to a fourth load.
  • the number of load types of the first type control information format is adjusted to a predetermined value.
  • the first load and the second load are two loads of the first type of control information format in the time unit, and the third load and the fourth load are the first type of the time unit. Two payloads of the control message format.
  • the number of load types associated with the control information format of one type is the number of load types corresponding to multiple search spaces where the control information format of the type is located in a bandwidth portion.
  • Figures 26 and 27 determine whether a type of DCI1_1 load in a time unit is greater than a predetermined value, or whether the number of load types of all DCI formats included in a time unit is greater than a predetermined value. Whether the load of DCI format is adjusted. In another implementation manner of this embodiment, whether the number of load types of a type of DCI format that the terminal needs to monitor in multiple time units included in a certain period of time is greater than a predetermined value, or whether the number of load units that need to monitor in the multiple time units Whether the number of load types of the M-type DCI format is greater than a predetermined value, and determines whether the load of the one type of DCI format is adjusted.
  • the number of kinds of loads is smaller than a predetermined value, but the absolute value of the difference between the number of bits included in different loads is smaller than a predetermined value. It is not necessary to have a plurality of types of DCI format loads, and one type is adopted, so at this time, the savings on DCI loads are limited, and the terminal blind detection load is also increased.
  • determining the load of the first type of control information format according to the signaling information is characterized in that:
  • the signaling information includes load determination manner information in the first type of control information format; and / or,
  • the signaling information includes indication information, and the indication information indicates whether a load of the first type of control information format is determined according to first information; wherein the first information includes at least one of the following information: the first The time unit where the type control information format is located, the number of load types associated with the first type of control information format, and the total number of types of loads corresponding to the type M control information format.
  • the load of a type of control information format is determined as described above.
  • the above method can be used to determine it; when the load is not determined based on the first information, it can be used Conventional rules, such as a type of control information format, have only one payload in all time units.
  • type M control channel format satisfies one of the following characteristics:
  • the type M control channel format is a type M control channel format that the first communication node needs to monitor in a time unit.
  • the type M control channel format is a type M control channel format that the first communication node needs to monitor in a bandwidth portion of a time unit.
  • the M-type control channel format is a M-type control channel format that the first communication node needs to monitor in the bandwidth portion.
  • the first communication node is a communication node monitoring the M-type control channel format.
  • the load of the first type of control information format is determined according to at least one of the following manners:
  • the first load of the first type of control information format is adjusted to a second load.
  • the first load is obtained according to the first configuration of the one type of parameter in the first control channel resource
  • the second load is obtained according to the second configuration of the one type of parameter in the second control channel resource.
  • all CORESET configurations do not include TCI, so there is only one type of load. If part of the configuration includes TCI, and part of the configuration does not include TCI, there can be two types of load tree.
  • the load types of the first type of control information format caused by different signal configurations in the different bandwidths The number is greater than a predetermined value. For example, although the configurations of multiple scheduled CCs are different, when the load caused by the configuration of multiple CCs is the same, the number of loads does not increase as the number of CCs increases.
  • FIG. 28 is an information transmission device 28 provided in this embodiment, including a first determination module 281 and a first transmission module 282. among them:
  • the first determining module 281 is configured to determine N bandwidth portions in an activated state.
  • the first determination module 281 may select, from all BWPs, N bandwidths that meet predetermined requirements for activation, thereby determining N BWPs in an activated state. Or, the N bandwidth parts that the terminal and / or TRP are contracted to be activated need to meet the contract requirements.
  • the first transmission module 282 is configured to transmit channels and / or signals on the activated N bandwidth portions.
  • the channel transmitted in this embodiment essentially refers to a channel signal.
  • the so-called transmission control channel is essentially a transmission control channel signal.
  • the first determining module 281 is configured to determine D control channel resource groups.
  • the first determining module 281 may select D control channel resource groups that meet predetermined requirements from all control channel resource groups.
  • the first transmission module 282 is configured to monitor control information in the D control channel resource groups, and transmit a channel and / or a signal according to the monitored control information.
  • transmission channels and / or signals described in this embodiment include: transmission channels and / or signals, and / or reception channels and / or signals.
  • the N bandwidth portions and / or D control channel resource groups should satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Feature 1 The N bandwidth portions satisfy the first type of predetermined conditions.
  • Feature 2 The D control channel resource groups satisfy a second type of predetermined condition.
  • Feature 3 The N bandwidth portions triggered by the control information in different control channel resource groups in the D control channel resource groups meet the aforementioned first type of predetermined conditions.
  • channels and / or signals in the D1 type channel and / or signal belong to different bandwidth portions of the N bandwidth portions; and / or, different types of channels and / or in the D1 channel and / or signal
  • the signals are scheduled by control information in different control channel resource groups in the D control channel resource groups.
  • D1 in this embodiment may be less than or equal to N.
  • the signal includes one or more of the following signals: a reference signal, a synchronization signal, a channel signal, and the like.
  • the channel includes one or more of the following channels: a control channel, a data channel, a random access channel, and the like.
  • one signal belongs to only one bandwidth part, and among the N bandwidth parts, signals in different bandwidth parts are different.
  • the first type of predetermined conditions includes at least one of the following conditions:
  • N bandwidth parts belong to a CC (component carrier).
  • Condition 12 There is an overlap between the frequency domain resources occupied by two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts.
  • the overlap in this embodiment may be all overlaps or partial overlaps. When they all overlap, the difference between the frequency domain resources occupied by the two bandwidths is empty; when they overlap, the difference between the frequency domain resources occupied by the two bandwidths is not empty.
  • Condition 13 The frequency domain interval between two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts meets a fourth type of predetermined condition.
  • the fourth type of predetermined conditions includes at least one of the following conditions 131-134:
  • Condition 131 The interval between the highest frequency domain position of the low frequency domain bandwidth part and the lowest frequency domain position of the high frequency domain bandwidth part among the two bandwidth parts is less than or equal to a first predetermined threshold.
  • Condition 132 The interval between the lowest frequency domain position of the low frequency domain bandwidth part and the highest frequency domain position of the high frequency domain bandwidth part in the two bandwidth parts is less than or equal to a second predetermined threshold.
  • Condition 133 The interval between the highest frequency domain position of the low frequency domain bandwidth part and the lowest frequency domain position of the high frequency domain bandwidth part among the two bandwidth parts is greater than a third predetermined threshold.
  • Condition 134 The interval between the lowest frequency domain position of the low frequency domain bandwidth part and the highest frequency domain position of the high frequency domain bandwidth part of the two bandwidth parts is greater than a fourth predetermined threshold.
  • the first predetermined threshold value, the second predetermined threshold value, the third predetermined threshold value, and the fourth predetermined threshold value may be preset by an engineer according to actual needs or after a large amount of experimental analysis.
  • the first predetermined threshold may be smaller than the second predetermined threshold, and the third predetermined threshold may be smaller than the fourth predetermined threshold.
  • the first predetermined threshold may be larger than the third predetermined threshold, and the second predetermined threshold may be larger than The fourth predetermined threshold.
  • Condition 14 The union of N bandwidth parts is a predetermined subset of a bandwidth part.
  • Condition 15 The subcarrier interval configuration of the N bandwidth portions meets a fifth type of predetermined condition.
  • the fifth type of predetermined condition may be: the number of different subcarrier intervals in the N bandwidth sections is less than or equal to N1; so N1 is a positive integer less than or equal to N.
  • one subcarrier interval needs to be configured in each bandwidth section.
  • the number of different subcarriers configured in the N bandwidth sections should be less than or equal to N1.
  • Condition 16 The cyclic prefix of the N bandwidth portions meets a sixth type of predetermined condition.
  • the sixth type of predetermined condition may be: the number of different cyclic prefix types in the N bandwidth parts is less than or equal to N2; N2 is a positive integer less than or equal to N.
  • N bandwidth sections For example, in the N bandwidth sections, one cyclic prefix type needs to be configured in each bandwidth section, but the number of different ring prefix types configured in the N bandwidth sections should be less than or equal to N2.
  • Condition 17 The slot structure indication information of the N bandwidth parts meets a seventh type of predetermined condition.
  • the seventh type of predetermined conditions may include at least one of the following conditions 171-173:
  • the slot structure indication information includes SFI and high-level public information tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon, tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon2, and proprietary signaling tdd-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated notification
  • the structure of the time slot and the specific meaning of these signaling can refer to the protocols 38.331 and 38.213.
  • Condition 172 The intersection between the resources occupied by the downlink transmission domain in one of the N bandwidth portions and the resources occupied by the uplink transmission domain in the other bandwidth portion is empty.
  • the intersection between them is empty.
  • the intersection between the resources occupied by the downlink transmission domain in one bandwidth portion and the resources occupied by the uplink transmission domain of at least one of the remaining (N-1) bandwidth portions is empty.
  • Condition 173 The intersection between the resources occupied by the reserved domain in one bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts and the resources occupied by the transmission domain of the channel and / or signal of the other bandwidth part is empty.
  • the resources occupied by the reserved domain in one bandwidth section and the channel and / or signal of any one of the remaining (N-1) bandwidth sections are empty.
  • it may be: among the N bandwidth parts, the resources occupied by the reserved domain in one bandwidth part and the resources occupied by the transmission domain of the channel and / or signal of at least one bandwidth part of the remaining (N-1) bandwidth parts The intersection between them is empty.
  • the two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts described in this embodiment may be any two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts, or may be specific two bandwidths of the N bandwidth parts. section.
  • the second type of predetermined conditions includes at least one of the following conditions:
  • Condition 21 The intersection between the resources occupied by the D control channel resource groups is empty.
  • Condition 22 The control information in the D control channel resource groups needs to satisfy a preset condition.
  • Condition 23 The control information indicated by the control information in different control channel resource groups in the D control channel resource groups is in the same time unit as the active part of the bandwidth.
  • the indication information needs to meet preset conditions.
  • the preset appointment condition includes that the bandwidth portions in the active state in the same time unit indicated by the control information in different control resource groups are the same.
  • Condition 24 The number of bits included in the bandwidth part indication field in the control information in the D2 control channel resource group is determined according to the number of bandwidth parts configured in the component carrier.
  • Condition 25 The number of bits included in the bandwidth part indication field in the control information in the D3 control channel resource group is not determined according to the number of bandwidth parts configured in the component carrier.
  • D4 control channel resource groups include control information in a predetermined format.
  • D5 control channel resource groups do not include control information in a predetermined format.
  • Condition 28 The time slot structures indicated by different control information resource groups in the D control channel resource groups need to meet agreed conditions
  • the agreed conditions include that the intersection between the resources occupied by the downlink transmission domain indicated by the control information in one control channel resource group and the resources occupied by the uplink transmission domain indicated by the control information in the other control channel resource group is empty. And / or, the intersection between the resources occupied by the reserved domain indicated by the control information in one control channel resource group and the resources occupied by the transmission domain indicated by the control information in the other control channel resource group is empty.
  • Control channel resource group in which the control channel resource is located is determined according to the frequency domain bandwidth or the frequency domain bandwidth group in which the control channel resource is located.
  • the frequency domain bandwidth includes a component carrier and / or a bandwidth portion.
  • the D2, D3, D4, and D5 control channel resource groups belong to the D control channel resource groups;
  • D2, D3, D4, and D5 are integers less than or equal to D, and / or, the sum of D2 and D3 Is equal to the D value, and / or, the sum of D4 and D5 is equal to the D value.
  • the third type of predetermined conditions includes at least one of the following conditions:
  • Condition 31 There is an association relationship between the parameter configuration of the D1 channel and / or the signal.
  • Condition 32 The total transmission power of the D1 type channel and / or signal cannot exceed a predetermined first threshold.
  • Condition 33 The total received power of the D1 channel and / or signal cannot exceed a predetermined second threshold.
  • Condition 34 When the total transmission power of the D1 channel and / or signal exceeds a predetermined power value, the power priority of the D1 channel and / or signal is determined according to signaling information and / or an agreed rule.
  • Condition 35 When the total transmission power of the D1 type channel and / or signal exceeds a predetermined power value, the power scaling of each type of channel and / or signal in the D1 type channel and / or signal is determined according to signaling information or an agreed rule Weight.
  • Condition 36 The intersection between different bandwidth parts corresponding to the D1 type channel and / or signal is not empty.
  • Condition 37 The resources occupied by the D1 channels and / or signals overlap.
  • Condition 38 When the resources occupied by the two types of channels and / or signals in the D1 type channels and / or signals overlap, the transmission directions of the two types of channels and / or signals are the same.
  • the transmission direction includes downlink transmission and uplink transmission (that is, reception and transmission).
  • the resources described in this embodiment include at least one of a time domain resource, a frequency domain resource, a code domain resource, an air domain resource, and a port resource.
  • the third type of predetermined conditions may include at least one of the following conditions:
  • Condition 39 The resources occupied by the control channels in different bandwidth sections of the N bandwidth sections are orthogonal.
  • Condition 40 The intersection between the resources occupied by the reference signal sets in the different bandwidth sections of the N bandwidth sections is empty.
  • the D1 type channel and / or signal meets the third category of predetermined conditions:
  • each bandwidth part of the D1 bandwidth part includes a type of channel and / or signal in the D1 type channel and / or signal.
  • the D1 type channel and / or signal may not meet the third type of predetermined condition.
  • the D1 bandwidth section is the bandwidth section corresponding to the D1 channel and / or signal.
  • the D1 type channel and / or signal can satisfy the third type of predetermined condition.
  • the D1 type channel and / or signal may not meet the third type of predetermined condition.
  • the parameter configuration of the two signals is related to each other and exhibits at least one of the following characteristics: 1.
  • the parameter configuration of the other signal can be obtained according to the parameter configuration of the one signal; 2.
  • Some parameter combinations are not expected to appear at the same time (for example, when parameter 1 of the first signal is configured as the first value, parameter 2 of the second signal is not expected to be configured as the second value.
  • parameter 1 and parameter 2 may be the same type of parameter , Or different types of parameters).
  • the association relationship when there is an association relationship between the parameter configurations of the D1 channel and / or signal, the association relationship includes at least one of the following relationships:
  • Relationship 1 The parameter configuration value range of another type of channel and / or signal is obtained according to the parameter configuration value of one type of channel and / or signal in the D1 type channel and / or signal.
  • a certain type of channel and / or signal in the D1 type channel and / or signal may be any type of channel and / or signal in the D1 type channel and / or signal, and may also be a D1 type channel and / or signal. Or a certain type of channel and / or signal specified in the signal.
  • Relationship 2 In the D1 type channel and / or signal, the configuration of the parameters belonging to the first predetermined parameter type set in different types of channels and / or signals is the same.
  • Relationship 3 In the D1 type channel and / or signal, the configuration values of parameters in different types of channels and / or signals that belong to the second predetermined parameter type set are different.
  • the second predetermined parameter type set includes airspace parameters.
  • the spatial domain parameters of a channel and / or signal are represented by a reference signal; the spatial transmission filter parameters and / or spatial reception filter parameters of the channel and / or signal are obtained according to the spatial transmission filter parameters and / or spatial reception filter parameters of the reference signal .
  • Relationship 4 In the D1 type channel and / or signal, the agreed combination values of parameters in different types of channels and / or signals that belong to the third predetermined parameter type set cannot occur simultaneously.
  • the agreed combination indicates a parameter type.
  • the first type of channel and / or signal is configured as A value
  • the second type of channel and / or signal cannot be configured as B value.
  • the configuration of the parameter type in the first type of channel and / or signal and the configuration of the parameter type in the second type of channel and / or signal constitute a combined configuration.
  • the division of the precoding resource groups associated with different types of channels and / or signals is aligned.
  • a precoding group in the first bandwidth part includes a precoding group in the second bandwidth part, and / or a precoding group in the second bandwidth part includes the first bandwidth part A precoding group.
  • Relationship 5 The intersection between the resources occupied by the D1 channels and / or signals is not empty.
  • Relationship 6 Type D1 channels and / or signals fall in the same time unit.
  • the first predetermined parameter type set includes at least one of the following: subcarrier interval information, cyclic shift length information, time domain information of a demodulation reference signal, and sequence information of a demodulation reference signal.
  • the time domain configuration information corresponding to the control channel signal, transmission of whether precoding is enabled, and the scrambling sequence of the reference signal generates parameters.
  • the second predetermined parameter type set includes at least one of the following: a spatial domain parameter of a channel and / or a signal, and a scrambling sequence generation parameter of the channel.
  • the third predetermined parameter type set includes airspace parameters of the channel and / or signal.
  • Subcarrier interval information cyclic shift length information, time domain information of demodulated reference signals, sequence information of demodulated reference signals, time domain configuration information corresponding to control channel signals, and information on whether precoding is enabled.
  • an association relationship may exist between the parameter configurations.
  • the N bandwidth portions may satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Feature 21 At least one of the N bandwidth portions is in a periodic activation state; the period of the periodic activation state is greater than or equal to one time unit.
  • the periodic activation state that is, the bandwidth part is automatically activated in a time unit that satisfies the period interval according to a set period.
  • the period is 2 (that is, there are two time units in each period)
  • the first time unit in the cycle is activated, that is, the bandwidth part is in time units 1, 3, 5, 7, Activated on 9 and inactive on time units 2, 4, 6, 8, 10.
  • Feature 22 At least one of the N bandwidth portions is in a semi-continuous activation state.
  • the semi-continuous activation state refers to whether the bandwidth part controls whether the bandwidth part is in an activated state or an inactive state by using received signaling. It should also be noted that in the semi-continuous activation state, when the bandwidth part is in the activated state, it is essentially in the periodic activated state automatically.
  • Feature 23 There is at least one main bandwidth part among the N bandwidth parts.
  • Feature 24 There is at least one secondary bandwidth part in the N bandwidth parts.
  • the bandwidth part when the N bandwidth parts satisfy the existence of the primary bandwidth part and / or the secondary bandwidth part, the bandwidth part should satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Feature 31 The channels and / or signals of the control channel scheduling of the main bandwidth part are in the secondary bandwidth part.
  • Feature 32 In the set of time units in which the main bandwidth part is activated, the minimum interval between time units is less than or equal to a predetermined interval value.
  • Feature 33 The time unit where the main bandwidth part is located is continuous.
  • Feature 34 There is at least one main bandwidth part in a time unit.
  • Feature 35 There is at least one main bandwidth part in a time unit other than the time gap existing when the main bandwidth part is switched.
  • Feature 36 The period of the auxiliary bandwidth part is in an activated state; wherein one period of the auxiliary bandwidth part includes one or more time units.
  • Feature 37 The common control channel is included in the main bandwidth section.
  • Feature 38 The common control channel is not included in the auxiliary bandwidth part.
  • Feature 39 Only the dedicated control channel is included in the auxiliary bandwidth part.
  • Feature 310 the auxiliary bandwidth part is in a semi-continuous activation state; wherein the period after the auxiliary bandwidth part is activated is in an activated state, and one period of the auxiliary bandwidth part includes one or more time units.
  • Feature 311 The control channel is not included in the secondary bandwidth portion.
  • Feature 312 The period and / or the period offset when the auxiliary bandwidth part is in an activated state is determined according to a predetermined rule or received signaling information.
  • Feature 313 The main bandwidth part and the secondary bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts are determined according to a predetermined rule or received signaling information.
  • the ID of the BWP is used to determine which is the primary bandwidth portion and which is the secondary bandwidth portion. For example, the ID with the smallest ID is the main bandwidth part, and the ID with the largest ID is the secondary bandwidth part.
  • Feature 314 When the CC to which the N bandwidth parts belong is the main CC in one CC group, there are main bandwidth parts in the N bandwidth parts.
  • the main CC in a CC group represents a PCell in the MCG and / or an SPCell in the SCG.
  • Feature 315 When the CC to which the N bandwidth parts belong is a secondary CC in a CC group, the N bandwidth parts are all secondary bandwidth parts.
  • the PCell in the MCG must have the main bandwidth portion, the other CCs in the MCG may have no main bandwidth portion; the PSCell in the SCG must have the main bandwidth portion, and the other CCs in the SCG may not have the main bandwidth portion.
  • Feature 316 When the CC to which the N bandwidth parts belong is an active CC, a main bandwidth part exists in the N bandwidth parts.
  • Feature 317 When the CCs to which the N bandwidth parts belong are inactive CCs, the N bandwidth parts are all secondary bandwidth parts.
  • the dynamic control information transmitted in the main bandwidth section carries the dynamic switching instruction information of the main bandwidth section.
  • the dynamic control information transmitted in the primary bandwidth section carries the dynamic switching instruction information of the secondary bandwidth section.
  • Feature 320 The number of bits in the bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information transmitted in the main bandwidth part is determined according to the number of bandwidth parts configured in the CC.
  • Feature 321 The number of bits in the bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information transmitted in the main bandwidth part is determined according to the number of bandwidth part sets configured in the CC.
  • Feature 322 The number of bits of the bandwidth indication field in the dynamic control information in the auxiliary bandwidth part is 0.
  • the N bandwidth portions may also be at least one of the following characteristics that are satisfied:
  • Feature 41 An association relationship exists between the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part among the N bandwidth parts.
  • an association relationship between the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part indicates at least one of the following information: 1.
  • the other bandwidth part can be determined according to one of the bandwidth parts; 2.
  • the activation signaling of one bandwidth part is also simultaneously Another bandwidth part is activated; 3.
  • Some parameter combinations in these two bandwidth parts do not want to appear at the same time.
  • Feature 42 The first bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts belongs to the first bandwidth part group.
  • Feature 43 The second bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts belongs to the second bandwidth part group.
  • Feature 44 The first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts share a set of parameter configurations of channels and / or signals.
  • Feature 45 The parameter configuration of the channel and / or signal carried on the first bandwidth part and the parameter configuration of the channel and / or signal carried on the second bandwidth part among the N bandwidth parts satisfy a predetermined configuration condition.
  • Feature 46 The first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part are triggered by a signaling message.
  • first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part in this embodiment are two bandwidth parts among the N bandwidth parts.
  • the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part may be any two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts; the first bandwidth part and the second bandwidth part may also be specific two bandwidth parts of the N bandwidth parts.
  • the determined N bandwidth parts may also meet at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the N bandwidth parts are N bandwidth parts that are active in the same time unit.
  • Feature 52 N bandwidth parts belong to one CC.
  • Feature 53 There is an intersection between the time resources in which the different bandwidth parts are active in the N bandwidth parts.
  • Feature 54 In the N bandwidth sections, there is a case where the channels and / or signals of the control channel scheduling of at least one bandwidth section are in another bandwidth section.
  • Feature 55 The information transmission directions of the N bandwidth parts are the same, wherein the information transmission directions include: a downlink transmission direction and an uplink transmission direction.
  • Feature 56 When N is greater than a predetermined value, a parameter in a parameter set corresponding to each bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts is a fixed value.
  • the parameter is a fixed value means that the parameter value is not dynamically notified in the DCI.
  • the parameter set includes at least one of the following parameters: a scrambling sequence parameter of the demodulation reference signal; and the number of time domain symbols included in a set of consecutive time domain symbols occupied by the demodulation reference signal.
  • Feature 57 The information field included in the control signaling in one of the N bandwidth sections is determined according to the value of N.
  • the signaling information when the value of N is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the signaling information does not include predetermined indication information; when the value of N is less than the predetermined value, the signaling information includes predetermined indication information.
  • the predetermined instruction information can determine the information domain.
  • the physical layer dynamic control information in the M1 bandwidth sections of the N bandwidth sections may carry the dynamic switching instruction information of the bandwidth section.
  • Feature 59 The physical layer dynamic control information in the M2 bandwidth sections of the N bandwidth sections cannot carry the dynamic switching instruction information of the bandwidth section.
  • M1 and M2 are both positive integers less than or equal to N, and the sum of M1 and M2 is less than or equal to N.
  • the bandwidth part switching process is not started; the bandwidth part index indicated by the physical layer control channel corresponds to When the bandwidth part does not belong to the N bandwidth parts, a bandwidth part switching process is started.
  • this embodiment provides a candidate control channel screening method that the information transmission device can perform when the total number of candidate control channels exceeds the terminal's blind detection capability.
  • Manner 1 When the total number of candidate control channels included in the N bandwidth sections is greater than the first predetermined value, the candidate control channels in the M bandwidth sections may be monitored according to a predetermined rule and / or signaling information.
  • M is an integer less than or equal to N, and the M bandwidth parts are M bandwidth parts among the N bandwidth parts. It should also be noted that the number of candidate control channels in the M bandwidth portions should be less than or equal to a first predetermined value.
  • the N bandwidth parts may be located in the same time unit.
  • Manner 2 When the total number of control channels included in the D control channel resource groups is greater than a second predetermined value, the control channels in the D4 control channel resource groups are monitored according to a predetermined rule and / or signaling information.
  • D4 control channel resource groups are D4 control channel resource groups among the D control channel resource groups.
  • the selected M bandwidth parts should satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the M bandwidth parts are bandwidth parts with higher priority among the N bandwidth parts.
  • Feature 62 The number of candidate control channels monitored in each bandwidth section of the M bandwidth sections is less than or equal to the number of candidate channels configured in the bandwidth section.
  • M bandwidth parts are from Q bandwidth part groups.
  • Q is a positive integer less than or equal to M, and N bandwidth parts belong to a set of bandwidth parts in the Q bandwidth part group.
  • Feature 64 The candidate control channel to be monitored is allocated in a predetermined proportion among the M bandwidth parts.
  • the M bandwidth parts when the M bandwidth parts satisfy the M bandwidth parts from the Q bandwidth part groups, it includes: the intersection between each bandwidth part group of the Q bandwidth part groups and the set consisting of M bandwidth parts is not empty ; And / or, at least one bandwidth part of the M bandwidth parts belongs to a bandwidth part group of the Q bandwidth part groups.
  • At least one of the following may be determined according to the signaling information and / or the agreed rules:
  • a set of time units corresponding to each bandwidth part of the N bandwidth parts can be determined.
  • the bandwidth part will be activated in its corresponding set of time units.
  • At least one bandwidth part in each bandwidth part set in the T1 bandwidth part set is active in a time unit set corresponding to the bandwidth part set; and / or, N bandwidth parts belong to N The set of bandwidth parts corresponding to the time unit where the bandwidth part is located.
  • the number of bits of the bandwidth part indication domain in the dynamic control information is 0; when the bandwidth part indication domain can be obtained according to the component carrier When the configured number of bandwidth parts is obtained, the number of bits in the bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information is obtained according to the number of configured bandwidth parts in the component carrier.
  • bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information in a bandwidth part is obtained according to the number of bandwidth part sets configured in the component carrier.
  • the number of bits in the bandwidth part indication domain in the dynamic control information is 0; when the bandwidth part indication domain can be based on the component carrier
  • the number of bits of the bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information is obtained according to the number of bandwidth part sets configured in the component carrier.
  • a bandwidth part includes dynamic control information in a predetermined format.
  • the dynamic control information in a predetermined format may include DCI format 2_0.
  • the information transmission method further includes: determining whether a bandwidth part indication field in the dynamic control information in a bandwidth part needs to be obtained according to the number of bandwidth parts configured in the CC; and / or, determining a bandwidth part
  • the bandwidth part in the dynamic control information indicates whether the domain needs to be obtained according to the number of bandwidth part sets configured in the CC.
  • the determined N bandwidth parts should be from X CCs (X is a positive integer greater than 1), and / or the determined N bandwidth parts should be from X1 CC groups (X1 is greater than A positive integer of 1). Furthermore, the bandwidth part group where the N bandwidth parts are located can be determined according to the CC where the N bandwidth parts are located.
  • the determined D control channel resource groups should be from Y CCs, and / or should be from Y1 CC groups (Y and Y1 are positive integers greater than 1).
  • each CC should satisfy at least one of the following conditions:
  • Condition 41 There is overlap between the frequency domain resources of the first CC and the second CC.
  • first CC and the second CC are two CCs among X CCs; these two CCs may be any two CCs among X CCs, or may be specific two CCs among X CCs .
  • the CC in the first CC group has at least one associated CC in the second CC group.
  • first CC group and the second CC group are two CC groups in the X1 CC group.
  • the two CC groups may be any two CC groups in the X1 CC group, and may also be X1. Specific two CC groups in CC.
  • X1 is less than or equal to X and greater than or equal to 2.
  • the first CC group and the second CC group are two CC groups in the Y1 CC group, and the two CC groups may be any two CC groups in the Y1 CC group, or may be Y1 A specific two CC groups in each CC.
  • Y1 is less than or equal to Y and greater than or equal to 2.
  • the bandwidth part included in a CC group belongs to a bandwidth part group.
  • the bandwidth part included in a CC belongs to a bandwidth part group.
  • Condition 47 The parameter configuration of two CCs out of X CCs is related.
  • the above parameter configuration may include time slot structure indication information.
  • Condition 48 The parameter configuration of two CCs among the Y CCs is related.
  • the above parameter configuration may include time slot structure indication information.
  • the D control channel resource groups correspond to D reference signal sets, and each of the D control channel resource groups corresponds to a reference signal set.
  • the reference signal set satisfies at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the reference signal set is an uplink reference signal set used for a codebook.
  • the reference signal set is an uplink reference signal set used for a non-codebook.
  • the reference signal set is an aperiodic reference signal set.
  • Feature 74 The difference between the reference signal sets is not empty.
  • Feature 75 The reference signal associated with the spatial transmission filtering parameter of the demodulation reference signal scheduled by the control information in one control channel resource group among the D control channel resource groups belongs to the reference signal set corresponding to the one control channel resource group.
  • Feature 76 The reference signal associated with the spatial reception filtering parameter of the demodulation reference signal scheduled by the control information in one control channel resource group among the D control channel resource groups belongs to the reference signal set corresponding to the one control channel resource group.
  • Feature 77 The reference signal scheduled by the control information in one control channel resource group among the D control channel resource groups belongs to the reference signal set corresponding to the one control channel resource group.
  • the type Z channel and / or signal in the type Z channel and / or signal may be transmitted according to the signaling information and / or agreed rules; And / or, when there is a conflict between the resources occupied by the Z-type channel and / or the signal, the third-type channel and / or signal may be transmitted according to the signaling information and / or the agreed rules.
  • the third-type channel and / or signal is obtained according to parameter information of at least two types of channels and / or signals in the Z-type channel and / or signal, and / or the third-type channel and / or signal and The intersection of class Z channels and / or signals is empty.
  • Z is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2
  • Z1 is a positive integer less than or equal to Z.
  • different types of channels and / or signals in the type Z channel and / or signal belong to different bandwidth portions of the determined N bandwidth portions (that is, different types of channels and / or signal bearers in the type Z channel and / or signal)
  • the different bandwidth portions of the N bandwidth portions determined by the domain); and / or, the different types of channels and / or signals in the type Z channel and / or signal are determined by the Z in the D control channel resource group determined Control information scheduling in different control channel resource groups in one control channel resource group; and / or the type Z channel includes at least one of the following channel types: a data channel, a control channel, and the type Z signal includes the following signal type at least One: measurement reference signal, demodulation reference signal, random access signal, synchronization signal, resource request signal, phase tracking signal.
  • the conflict includes at least one of the following conflicts:
  • Collision 1 There is overlap between the time domain resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or the signal.
  • Collision 2 There is overlap between the frequency domain resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or the signal.
  • Collision 3 There is overlap between the demodulation reference signal resources included in the type Z channel.
  • Collision 4 There is overlap between the reference signal resources included in the Z-type signal.
  • Collision 5 There is overlap between the airspace resources occupied by the Class Z channels and / or signals.
  • Collision 6 The airspace resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or the signal cannot be transmitted simultaneously on the first communication node.
  • Collision 7 There is overlap between the antenna resources occupied by the Z-channel and / or the signal.
  • Collision 8 Antenna resources occupied by the Z-type channel and / or signal cannot be transmitted simultaneously on the first communication node.
  • Collision 9 The group information to which the reference signal corresponding to the airspace resource occupied by the Z-type channel and / or the signal does not meet the agreed condition.
  • the time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal may overlap, and the spatial domain resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal may be Only when there is overlap, it is considered that there is a conflict between the resources occupied by the type Z channels and / or signals; and / or, the time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources occupied by the type Z channels and / or signals may overlap, and the type Z is The airspace resources occupied by the channel and / or signal are considered to conflict with the resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal only when the first communication node cannot transmit at the same time; and / or, they When the time domain resources and / or the frequency domain resources overlap, and the antenna resources occupied by the Z-channel
  • the first communication node is a communication node that transmits the Z1 type channel and / or signal.
  • the type Z channel and / or signal is an uplink signal.
  • the spatial domain resources of the type Z channel and / or signal are indicated by the SRI.
  • At least Z SRS measurement reference signal resources corresponding to the type Z channel and / or signal indicated by the SRI belong to the same group.
  • different SRSs indicate that the type Z channels and / or signals cannot be sent simultaneously; belonging to different groups indicates that the type Z channels and / or signals can be sent simultaneously.
  • the SRS measurement reference signal resources corresponding to the SRI belong to the same group, it indicates that the type Z channels and / or signals can be sent at the same time, and the different types belong to the type Z Channels and / or signals cannot be sent simultaneously.
  • the type Z channel and / or signal is a downlink signal
  • the airspace resources of the type Z channel and / or signal are indicated by TCI (transmission configuration configuration indicator)
  • TCI transmission configuration configuration indicator
  • the type Z channel and / or indicated in TCI At least Z downlink reference signals or synchronization signal resources corresponding to the signals belong to the same group, it indicates that the type Z channels and / or signals cannot be received at the same time; on the contrary, belonging to different groups indicates that the type Z channels and / or signals can be received simultaneously .
  • the Z downlink reference signal / synchronous signal resources corresponding to TCI belong to the same group, it indicates that the type Z channels and / or signals can be received at the same time; if they belong to different groups, It indicates that this type Z channel and / or signal cannot be received at the same time.
  • the Z-type channel and / or signal meets at least one of the following conditions:
  • Condition 51 The spatial domain resources occupied by one type of channel and / or signal in the Z-type channel and / or signal are indicated by a reference signal, and the spatial transmission filter parameters and / or spatial reception filter parameters of the channel and / or signal are based on the space of the reference signal Obtain the transmission filtering parameters and / or the spatial receiving filtering parameters.
  • one type of channel and / or signal in the type Z channel and / or signal may be any type of channel and / or signal in the type Z channel and / or signal, and may also be Z A specific type of channel and / or signal in a type of channel and / or signal.
  • Condition 52 The airspace resources occupied by a type of channel and / or signal in the Z-type channel and / or signal are represented by reference signals, and the channel and / or signal and reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to a type of quasi-co-location parameter.
  • Condition 53 The airspace resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal cannot be transmitted on the first communication node at the same time, and the group information to which multiple reference signals associated with multiple airspace resources of the type Z channel and / or signal belong is not satisfied Under agreed conditions, and / or the multiple reference signals associated with multiple spatial domain resources including Class Z channels and / or signals are the same reference signal.
  • the reference signal resource included in the reference signal resource group may be indicated by the second communication node to the first communication node through signaling information, and / or the first communication node feedbacks to the second communication node.
  • Condition 54 The airspace resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or the signal cannot be transmitted at the first communication node at the same time, and the multiple reference signals associated with the multiple airspace resources included by the type Z channel and / or the signal cannot be simultaneously transmitted at the first communication node. transmission.
  • Priority of bandwidth portion associated with type Z channel and / or signal Priority of bandwidth portion associated with type Z channel and / or signal; priority of resource group of control channel associated with type Z channel and / or signal; priority of frequency domain bandwidth group associated with type Z channel and / or signal; Z Priority of CC or CC group associated with class channel and / or signal.
  • the type Z1 channel and / or signal is a channel and / or signal with a higher priority among the type Z channels and / or signals.
  • Priority of bandwidth portion associated with type Z channel and / or signal Priority of bandwidth portion associated with type Z channel and / or signal; priority of resource group of control channel associated with type Z channel and / or signal; priority of frequency domain bandwidth group associated with type Z channel and / or signal; Z Priority of CC or CC group associated with class channel and / or signal.
  • bandwidth parts associated with type Z channels and / or signals are the same; whether the control channel resource groups associated with type Z channels and / or signals are the same; whether the frequency domain bandwidth groups associated with type Z channels and / or signals are the same; And / or whether the CC or CC group associated with the signal is the same.
  • the first communication node does not transmit the channels and / or signals included in the difference set of the type Z channel and / or signal and the type Z1 channel and / or signal.
  • Z2 is a non-negative integer less than or equal to Z1.
  • the parameter information in the first predetermined parameter set includes at least one of the following information: timing advance information, sequence information, antenna information, demodulation reference signal information, and number of transmitted code blocks.
  • Z2 is a non-negative integer less than or equal to Z1.
  • the method when there is a conflict between the resources occupied by the Z-type channel and / or the signal, the method further includes performing at least one of the following operations:
  • the type Z channel and / or signal in the type Z channel and / or signal is transmitted according to signaling information and / or agreed rules.
  • the third-type channel and / or signal is transmitted according to signaling information and / or agreed rules.
  • the parameter information of the third type of channel and / or signal in this embodiment is obtained according to the configuration information of at least two types of channels and / or signals in the Z1 type channel and / or signal in the Z type channel and / or signal.
  • the parameter information includes at least one of the following information: power information, timing advance information, sequence information, antenna information, and port information.
  • the parameter information of the third type of channel and / or signal may also be obtained according to signaling information or an agreed rule.
  • conflicts in resources occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal include:
  • the first information associated with the Z-type channel and / or the signal is the same.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: a type Z channel and / or signal associated bandwidth portion, a type Z channel and / or signal associated control channel resource group, and a type Z channel and / or signal associated frequency domain bandwidth group. CCs or CC groups associated with, Z-type channels and / or signals.
  • the type Z channel includes at least one of the following channel types: data channel and control channel; the type Z signal includes at least one of the following signal types: measurement reference signal, demodulation reference signal, random access signal, synchronization signal , Resource request signals, and phase tracking signals.
  • the first information associated with the type Z channel and / or signal when the resources and / or reference signals occupied by the type Z channel and / or signal overlap, the first information associated with the type Z channel and / or signal is the same, the type Z channel and / or signal conflicts, and Z1 is less than the Z value; and / or, when the resources occupied by the Z-type channel and / or signal overlap, the first information associated with the Z-type channel and / or signal is different, and the Z-type channel and / or signal does not collide, And Z1 is equal to the Z value.
  • the above resources include at least one of the following resources: time domain resources, frequency domain resources, and air domain resources.
  • the information transmission device by determining N bandwidth sections in an active state; transmitting channels and / or signals on the activated N bandwidth sections; and / or, determining D control channel resource groups, in The control information is monitored in the D control channel resource groups, and channels and / or signals are transmitted according to the monitored control information.
  • each TRP and / or terminal performs information transmission, multiple TRPs under the beam mechanism can be effectively supported to effectively serve one terminal.
  • FIG. 29 is an information transmission device 29 provided in this embodiment, including: a second determination module 291 and a second transmission module 292. among them:
  • the second determining module 291 is configured to determine a first resource; and determine a number H of resource groups included in the first resource.
  • the second transmission module 292 is configured to transmit a channel and / or a signal on the first resource according to the H value.
  • the H resource groups correspond to the H sets of configuration information of the channels and / or signals; the resources include time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources.
  • the second determination module 291 may determine the first resource according to the acquired first control signaling.
  • the information transmission device provided in this embodiment can be applied to both a TRP (such as a base station) and a terminal.
  • the first control signaling When applied to a base station, the first control signaling may be generated by the base station itself.
  • the first control signaling may be sent by the base station to the terminal.
  • the base station and / or the terminal itself has resources, and the second determining module 291 may determine which resources to use as the first resources among the existing resources according to the obtained first control signaling. For example, there are 100 resource blocks in the terminal. The second determination module 291 may determine which resource blocks are the first resources according to the first control signaling.
  • the resource group in this embodiment refers to a group divided by the first resource, and the resource group is composed of at least one basic resource unit (such as a resource block).
  • the resource group is composed of at least one basic resource unit (such as a resource block).
  • the resource blocks with numbers 1-10 can be divided into a resource group
  • the resource blocks with numbers 11-20 can be divided into a resource group.
  • the H resource groups satisfy at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Each resource group in the H resource groups corresponds to K quasi-co-located reference signal sets, and the K group demodulation reference signals in the resource group correspond to the K quasi-co-located reference signal sets corresponding to the resource group.
  • the demodulation reference signal in the demodulation reference signal group and the reference signal in the corresponding quasi-co-location reference signal set satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to a class of quasi-co-location parameters.
  • Each of the H resource groups corresponds to a demodulation reference signal set, and the channels in the resource group are transmitted on the demodulation reference signal set.
  • one demodulation reference signal set includes K1 demodulation reference signal groups, and K1 is a positive integer.
  • Each of the H resource groups corresponds to a channel, and the frequency domain resources occupied by the channel belong to the resource group.
  • H resource groups correspond to H groups of ACK / NACK information; wherein: a group of ACK / NACK information includes a predetermined number of bits, and / or information in a group of ACK / NACK information is jointly fed back.
  • the demodulation reference signals in one demodulation reference signal group satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship
  • the demodulation reference signals in different demodulation reference signal groups do not satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship
  • the second determining module 291 may further obtain the first control information and / or the second control information; and determine the H resources included in the first resource according to the first control information and / or the second control information. Steps for dividing information into groups and / or H configuration information.
  • the first control information may be obtained before the first resource is determined, and the second control information may be obtained before the number H of the resource groups included in the first resource is determined.
  • one or more of the information indicated in the first control information and / or the parameter information required for decoding the first control information, and / or the configuration information indicated in the first control information may be used. Species to determine the H value.
  • the first control information may directly carry grouping information, and then the H value may be directly determined according to the grouping information.
  • the first control information satisfies at least one of the following characteristics:
  • the first control information includes H1 resource group information.
  • the first control information includes H3 sets of configuration information.
  • the second control information includes H2 resource group information.
  • the second control information includes H4 sets of configuration information.
  • H1, H2, H3, H4 are all non-negative integers.
  • the first control information and the second control information may instruct the terminal or the TRP to divide the resource group.
  • the resource group information here can indicate the division of the resource group.
  • the division of resource groups can also be indicated according to the configuration information.
  • the configuration information includes at least one of the following information:
  • Channel quasi-co-location reference signal set channel demodulation reference signal information, channel ACK / NACK information, channel number information and signal information.
  • the first resource is determined; the number H of resource groups included in the first resource is determined; a channel and / or a signal is transmitted on the first resource according to the H value; wherein the H Each resource group corresponds to the H-set configuration information of the channel and / or signal; the resources include time domain resources and / or frequency domain resources.
  • Embodiment 17 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 17:
  • FIG. 30 is a monitoring device 30 provided in this embodiment, including: a candidate control channel determination module 301 and a control information monitoring module 302. among them:
  • the candidate control channel determination module 301 is configured to determine a candidate control channel to be monitored in a time unit according to at least one of the following information: an active bandwidth portion of a component carrier, a control channel resource group, and a set of search space groups.
  • the control information monitoring module 302 is configured to monitor control information on a candidate control channel determined to be monitored.
  • demodulation reference signals of multiple control channels with overlapping time domains in the time unit do not satisfy the QCL relationship with respect to the spatial reception parameters.
  • the monitoring device 30 determines a spatial receiving filter parameter conflict solution of multiple candidate control channels according to at least one of the following information:
  • the determined candidate control channel should satisfy:
  • the demodulation reference signal of the candidate control channel monitored by the first communication node and the reference signal associated with the spatial receiving parameter selected in the spatial receiving parameter conflict resolution solution of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit are related to one
  • the quasi-co-location parameters satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the reference signal associated with the spatial receive parameter selected in the solution is not related to a class of quasi co-location parameters
  • the first communication node does not listen to the candidate control channel.
  • the candidate control channel satisfies at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Each control channel resource group in the plurality of control channel resource groups includes at least one monitoring candidate control channel.
  • Each set of search space groups includes at least one monitored candidate control channel in the set of each search space group.
  • Each of the plurality of bandwidth sections activated in one component carrier includes at least one monitoring candidate control channel.
  • the candidate control channel for monitoring meets at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Feature 21 Candidate control channels monitored in a time unit are allocated in multiple control channel resource groups according to a predetermined ratio.
  • Feature 22 The candidate control channels monitored in a time unit are allocated in a set of multiple search space groups according to a predetermined ratio.
  • Feature 23 The candidate control channel monitored in a time unit is allocated in a predetermined proportion among a plurality of bandwidth parts activated in a component carrier.
  • Feature 24 The allocation of the candidate control channels monitored in a time unit among multiple control channel resource groups is determined according to the conflict resolution solution of the spatial reception filtering parameters of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit.
  • Feature 25 According to a conflict resolution solution of spatial receiving filtering parameters of multiple candidate control channels in a time unit, determine the allocation situation of the candidate control channels monitored in a time unit among a set of multiple search space groups.
  • Feature 26 Determine the allocation of the candidate control channels monitored in a time unit among multiple bandwidth portions activated in a component carrier according to the conflict resolution solution of the spatial reception filtering parameters of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit.
  • control channel resource group to which the control channel resource belongs can be determined according to the frequency domain bandwidth where the control channel resource is located, where the frequency domain bandwidth includes at least one of the following: a component carrier and a bandwidth portion.
  • control channel in a time unit meets at least one of the following characteristics:
  • Feature 31 The number of control channels in a time unit is greater than a predetermined control channel number threshold.
  • Feature 32 The number of control channels in a time unit is greater than or equal to the number of candidate control channels determined to be monitored in the time unit.
  • a candidate control channel to be monitored in a time unit is first determined according to at least one of the following information: an active bandwidth portion of a component carrier, a control channel resource group, and a set of search space groups. Quasi-co-location reference signal configuration information of candidate control channels in a time unit, and a conflict resolution solution for spatial reception filtering parameters of multiple candidate control channels in the time unit; and then monitoring control information on the candidate control channel that is determined to be monitored . This ensures that when multiple TRPs serve the terminal under the beam mechanism, the blind detection of the control channel by the terminal is effective, and effectively supports multiple TRPs to serve one terminal effectively under the beam mechanism.
  • Embodiment 18 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 18:
  • This embodiment provides a base station. As shown in FIG. 31, it includes a first processor 311, a first memory 312, and a first communication bus 313. among them:
  • the first communication bus 313 is configured to implement connection and communication between the first processor 311 and the first memory 312.
  • the first processor 311 is configured to execute one or more first programs stored in the first memory 312 to implement the information transmission method according to any one of the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment.
  • the first processor 311 is configured to execute one or more first programs stored in the first memory 312 to implement the information transmission method according to the tenth embodiment and / or the eleventh embodiment.
  • This embodiment provides a terminal. As shown in FIG. 32, it includes a second processor 321, a second memory 322, and a second communication bus 323. among them:
  • the second communication bus 323 is configured to implement connection and communication between the second processor 321 and the second memory 322.
  • the second processor 321 is configured to execute one or more third programs stored in the second memory 322 to implement the information transmission method according to any one of the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment.
  • the second processor 321 is configured to execute one or more fourth programs stored in the second memory 322 to implement the information transmission method according to the tenth embodiment and / or the eleventh embodiment.
  • the second processor 321 is configured to execute one or more fifth programs stored in the second memory 322 to implement the information transmission method according to the twelfth embodiment and / or the thirteenth embodiment.
  • This embodiment also provides a storage medium including a volatile or non-volatile memory implemented in any method or technology for storing information such as computer-readable instructions, data structures, computer program modules, or other data. Volatile, removable or non-removable media.
  • Storage media include, but are not limited to, RAM (Random Access Memory, Random Access Memory), ROM (Read-Only Memory, Read-Only Memory), EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) Or other memory technology, CD-ROM (Compact Disc Read-Only Memory), digital versatile disc (DVD) or other optical disc storage, magnetic box, magnetic tape, disk storage or other magnetic storage device, or can Any other medium for storing the desired information and accessible by the computer.
  • Computer-executable instructions are stored in the storage medium provided in this embodiment, and the computer-executable instructions can be executed by one or more processors to implement the steps of the information transmission method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 8, And / or implement the steps of the information transmission method according to Embodiment 10 and / or Embodiment 11; and / or implement the steps of the information transmission method according to Embodiment 12 and / or Embodiment 13. I will not repeat them here.
  • a communication medium typically contains computer-readable instructions, data structures, computer program modules, or other data in a modulated data signal such as a carrier wave or other transmission mechanism, and may include any information delivery medium. Therefore, this application is not limited to any specific combination of hardware and software.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本文提供了一种信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储介质，通过确定N个处于激活状态的带宽部分；在激活的N个带宽部分上传输信道和/或信号；和/或，确定D个控制信道资源组，在D个控制信道资源组中监听控制信息，根据监听到的控制信息传输信道和/或信号。

Description

信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储介质
本申请要求在2018年08月08日提交中国专利局、申请号为201810899188.6的中国专利申请的优先权，该申请的全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本公开涉及但不限于通信技术领域，具体而言，涉及但不限于一种信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储介质。
背景技术
多入多出(Multiple input multiple output，MIMO)技术作为通信的核心技术，可以大大提高频谱利用率。新无线接入技术(New Radio Access Technology，NR)的核心技术之一是基于波束的通信，波束通信可以降低干扰和增强覆盖，但是由于波束通信不是全覆盖的通信，存在鲁棒性不强的问题。
当采用多个TRP(Transmission and Reception Point，发射及接收点)给一个终端服务时，由于多个TRP往往是物理位置有一定的距离，从而到达终端的路径的多样性得到保证，这就可以有效提高频谱效率，同时也可以大大提高通信的鲁棒性。
但是如何有效支持波束机制下的多个TRP给一个终端服务，特别是多个TRP之间没有理想Backhaul(信号隧道)的时候，支持多个TRP独立调度时，如何有效支持波束机制下多个TRP给一个终端有效服务，就成为了一个亟待解决的问题。
发明内容
本公开实施例提供一种信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储介质，解决了如何有效支持波束机制下多个TRP给一个终端有效服务的问题。
本公开实施例提供了一种信息传输方法，包括：
确定N个处于激活状态的带宽部分；在激活的所述N个带宽部分上传输信道和/或信号；
和/或，
确定D个控制信道资源组，在所述D个控制信道资源组中监听控制信息，根据监听到的控制信息传输信道和/或信号；
所述N和D均为正整数。
本公开实施例还提供了一种信息传输方法，包括：
确定第一资源；
确定第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H；
根据所述H值在所述第一资源上传输信道和/或信号；
其中，所述H个资源组和所述信道和/或信号的H套配置信息对应；所述资源包括时域资源和/或频域资源。
本公开实施例还提供了一种监听方法，包括：
第一通信节点根据如下信息中的至少之一确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道：一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分，控制信道资源组，搜索空间组的集合，所述时间单元中的候选控制信道的准共址参考信号配置信息，所述时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案；
在确定监听的所述候选控制信道上监听控制信息。
本公开实施例还提供了一种信息传输装置，包括：第一确定模块和第一传输模块；
所述第一确定模块用于，确定N个处于激活状态的带宽部分；
所述第一传输模块用于，在激活的所述N个带宽部分上传输信道和/或信号；
和/或，
所述第一确定模块用于，确定D个控制信道资源组
所述第一传输模块用于，在所述D个控制信道资源组中监听控制信息，根据监听到的控制信息传输信道和/或信号；
所述N和D均为正整数。
本公开实施例还提供了一种信息传输装置，包括：第二确定模块和第二传输模块；
所述第二确定模块用于，确定第一资源；以及确定第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H；
所述第二传输模块用于，根据所述H值在所述第一资源上传输信道和/或信号；
其中，所述H个资源组和所述信道和/或信号的H套配置信息对应；所述资源包括时域资源和/或频域资源。
本公开实施例还提供了一种监听装置，包括：候选控制信道确定模块和控制信息监听模块；
所述候选控制信道确定模块用于，根据如下信息至少之一确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道：一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分，控制信道资源组，搜索空间组的集合，所述时间单元中的候选控制信道的准共址参考信号配置信息，所述时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案；
所述控制信息监听模块用于，在确定监听的所述候选控制信道上监听控制信息。
本公开实施例还提供了一种基站，包括：第一处理器、第一存储器以及第一通信总线；
所述第一通信总线用于实现所述第一处理器和第一存储器之间的连接通信；
所述第一处理器用于执行所述第一存储器中存储的一个或者多个第一程序，以实现上述第一种信息传输方法；
或，所述第一处理器用于执行所述第一存储器中存储的一个或者多个第二程序，以实现上述第二种信息传输方法。
本公开实施例还提供了一种终端，包括：第二处理器、第二存储器以及第二通信总线；
所述第二通信总线用于实现所述第二处理器和第二存储器之间的连接通信；
所述第二处理器用于执行所述第二存储器中存储的一个或者多个第三程序，以实现上述第一种信息传输方法；
或，所述第二处理器用于执行所述第二存储器中存储的一个或者多个第四程序，以实现上述第二种信息传输方法；
或，所述第二处理器用于执行所述第二存储器中存储的一个或者多个第四程序，以实现上述监听方法。
本公开实施例还提供一种存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有一个或者多个计算机程序，所述一个或者多个计算机程序可被一个或者多个处理器执行，以实现第一种信息传输方法，或实现上述第二种信息传输方法，或实现上述监听方法。
本公开实施例提供的信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储 介质，通过确定N个处于激活状态的带宽部分；在激活的N个带宽部分上传输信道和/或信号；和/或，确定D个控制信道资源组，在D个控制信道资源组中监听控制信息，根据监听到的控制信息传输信道和/或信号。这样各个TRP和/或终端都这样进行信息传输时，即可有效支持波束机制下多个TRP给一个终端有效服务。
此外，本公开实施例中通过确定第一资源；确定第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H；根据所述H值在所述第一资源上传输信道和/或信号；其中，所述H个资源组和所述信道和/或信号的H套配置信息对应；所述资源包括时域资源和/或频域资源。这样在各个TRP和/或终端都这样进行信息传输时，即可有效支持了波束机制下多个TRP给一个终端有效服务，同时降低终端的控制信道盲检复杂度也可以有效节省信令开销。
此外，本公开实施例中通过第一通信节点根据如下信息至少之一确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道：一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分，控制信道资源组，搜索空间组的集合，所述时间单元中的候选控制信道的准共址参考信号配置信息，所述时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案；进而在确定监听的所述候选控制信道上监听控制信息。从而保证了在波束机制下多个TRP给终端进行服务时，保证在终端能力受限的场景下，终端监听各个TRP发送的控制信道，或者只监听部分TRP发送的控制信道，有效支持了波束机制下多个TRP给一个终端有效服务。
附图说明
图1为本公开实施例一提供的一种信息传输方法的流程示意图；
图2为本公开实施例一提供的另一种信息传输方法的流程示意图；
图3为本公开实施例二提供的一种多TRP传输中，TRP之间没有理想Backhaul的示意图；
图4为本公开实施例二提供的一种一个时间单元中，一个成员载波(Component Carrier，CC)中处于激活状态的多个带宽部分(Bandwidth part，BWP)各自对应独立配置信息的示意图；
图5为本公开实施例二提供的一种一个时间单元中，一个CC中处于激活状态的多个BWP部分配置独立配置，部分配置共享的示意图；
图6为本公开实施例二提供的另一种一个时间单元中，一个CC中处于激活状态的多个BWP部分配置独立配置，部分配置共享的示意图；
图7为本公开实施例二提供的一个时间单元中，处于激活状态的多个BWP 之间频域有重叠的示意图；
图8为本公开实施例二提供的一个时间单元中，处于激活状态的多个BWP之间的第一频域间隔示意图；
图9为本公开实施例二提供的一个时间单元中，处于激活状态的多个BWP之间的第二频域间隔示意图；
图10为本公开实施例二提供的一个时间单元中，处于激活状态的多个BWP占有的频域都是一个预定BWP占有的频域的子集的示意图；
图11为本公开实施例二提供的一种不同TRP对应不同BWP的示意图；
图12为本公开实施例二提供的一种多个BWP的预编码组的划分是对齐的示意图；
图13为本公开实施例二提供的一种多个TRP传输中，不同TRP对应不同的控制信道资源组的示意图；
图14为本公开实施例三提供的一种终端的不同面板(panel)接收不同BWP的示意图；
图15为本公开实施例三提供的一种同一时段处于激活状态的N个BWP是频分的示意图；
图16为本公开实施例三提供的一种不同时间单元集合对应不同的激活BWP集合的示意图；
图17为本公开实施例四提供的一种一个时间段内BWP切换示意图；
图18为本公开实施例五提供的一种BWP1周期处于激活状态的示意图；
图19为本公开实施例七提供的一种两个同频CC中处于激活状态的多个BWP之间需要满足约定条件的示意图；
图20为本公开实施例七提供的一种两个同频CC中的不同CC对应给同一个终端服务的不同TRP的示意图；
图21为本公开实施例八提供的一个终端和两个TRP保持连接，两个TRP之间没有理想Backhaul，两个TRP可以独立调度的情况示意图；
图22为本公开实施例十提供的一种信息传输方法的流程示意图；
图23为本公开实施例十一提供的一个控制信令中指示的第一资源包括的不同频域组对应不同TRP的示意图；
图24为本公开实施例十一提供的一个控制信令中指示的第一资源包括的频域组的划分情况示意图；
图25为本公开实施例十二提供的一种监听方法的流程示意图；
图26为本公开实施例十四提供的一种调度两个CC中的两个物理下行共享信道(Physical Downlink Shared Channel，PDSCH)的示意图；
图27为本公开实施例十四提供的一种下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information，DCI)1_1所在的控制资源集合(Control Resource Set，CORESET)的示意图；
图28为本公开实施例十五提供的一种信息传输装置的结构示意图；
图29为本公开实施例十六提供的一种信息传输装置的结构示意图；
图30为本公开实施例十七提供的一种监听装置的结构示意图；
图31为本公开实施例十八提供的一种基站的结构示意图；
图32为本公开实施例十八提供的一种终端的结构示意图；
图33为本公开实施例八中两个TRP调度的信道和/或信号的波束相同的示意图；
图34为本公开实施例八中将两个TRP调度的占有相同波束的两个探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal，SRS)合并为一个SRS的示意图。
具体实施方式
根据参考附图更详细地描述本公开构思的各个实施例。但是，本公开构思可被以很多不同的形式具体实施，并且不应被理解为仅限于所示出的实施例。相反，提供这些实施例以使本公开将会透彻和完整，并且将向本领域技术人员全面地传达本公开构思的范围。贯穿上面描述和附图，相同的参考数字和标记代表相同或者类似的元素。
应当理解的是，尽管这里可能使用术语第一、第二等来描述各种元件或操作，但是这些元件或操作不应被这些术语限制。这些术语只被用来将一个元件或操作与另一个元件或操作加以区分。例如，第一条件可以被称为第二条件，并且类似地，第二条件可以被称为第一条件而不偏离本公开的教导。
这里使用的术语仅仅是为了描述特定实施例，并非旨在限制本公开构思。如这里所使用的，单数形式“一”、“一个”和“该”预期也包括复数形式，除非上下文清楚地另有指示。还应当理解的是，术语“包含”或“包括”在本说明书中被使用时，规定了存在所陈述的特征、区域、部分、步骤、操作、元件，和/或部件，但是不排除存在或者添加一个或更多个其他的特征、区域、部分、步骤、操作、元件、部件，和/或其组。
除非另外定义，否则这里使用的所有术语(包括技术和科学术语)具有和本公开所属技术领域的技术人员通常理解的相同的含义。还应当理解的是，例如在常用词典中定义的术语应该被解释为具有与其在相关技术和/或本公开的上下文中的含义相符的含义，并且将不会以理想化或者过于形式化的意义解释，除非这里明确地如此定义。
下面通过具体实施方式结合附图对本公开实施例作进一步详细说明。
实施例一：
参见图1和图2所示，图1和图2为本公开实施例一提供的信息传输方法。本实施例中的信息传输方法可以应用于终端上，也可以应用于TRP上(如基站上)。其中：
图1所示的信息传输方法包括：
S101：确定N个处于激活状态的带宽部分。
应当理解的是，在本实施例中，终端和/或TRP可以在所有的BWP(Bandwidth part，带宽部分)中选择符合预定要求的N个带宽进行激活从而确定出N个处于激活状态的BWP。或者终端和/或TRP约定处于激活状态的N个带宽部分需要满足约定要求。
S102：在激活的N个带宽部分上传输信道和/或信号。
应当理解的是，本实施例中传输的信道实质指的是信道信号。例如所谓传输控制信道实质即为传输控制信道信号。
图2所示的信息传输方法包括：
S201：确定D个控制信道资源组。
应当理解的是，在本实施例中，终端和/或TRP可以在所有的控制信道资源组中选择符合预定要求的D个控制信道资源组。
S202：在D个控制信道资源组中监听控制信息，根据监听到的控制信息传输信道和/或信号。
还应当理解的是，本实施例中所述的传输信道和/或信号包括：发送信道和/或信号，和/或接收信道和/或信号。
需要说明的是，本实施例中图1和图2所示的两种信息传输方法可以同时被采用，也可以仅采用其中的一种。
在本实施例中提供的信息传输方法中，信息传输方法应当满足如下特征中 的至少一种：
特征1：N个带宽部分满足第一类预定条件。
特征2：D个控制信道资源组满足第二类预定条件。
特征3：D个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息触发的N个带宽部分满足前述第一类预定条件。
特征4：D1类信道和/或信号满足第三类预定条件。
这里需要说明的是，D1类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号满足如下特征至少之一：不同类信道和/或信号属于N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分；不同类信道和/或信号由D个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度；不同类信道和/或信号属于不同的成员载波；不同类信道和/或信号关联不同的组信息标识；其中，D1为正整数。
特别需要说明的是，如果不同类的信道和/或信号是根据不同的带宽部分划分的，则一个带宽部分对应所述一类信道或信号，因此本实施例中D1可以小于等于N。
在本实施例中，信号包括如下信号中的一种或者多种：参考信号，同步信号，随机接入信号，相位跟踪信号等。信道包括如下信道中的一种或者多种：控制信道，数据信道，随机接入信道等。
在本实施例中，一个信号只属于一个带宽部分，在N个带宽部分中，不同的带宽部分中的信号不同。
在本实施例中，第一类预定条件包括以下条件中的至少一种：
条件11：N个带宽部分属于一个CC。
条件12：N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分占有的频域资源之间有重叠。
需要说明的是，本实施例中的重叠可以是全部重叠，也可以是部分重叠。在全部重叠时，即两个带宽部分占有的频域资源之间的差集为空；在部分重叠时，即两个带宽部分占有的频域资源之间的差集非空。
条件13：N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分之间的频域间隔满足第四类预定条件。
在本实施例中，第四类预定条件包括以下条件131-134中的至少一种：
条件131：两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最高频域位置和高频域带宽部分的最低频域位置之间的间隔小于等于第一预定阀值。
条件132：两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最低频域位置和高频域带宽 部分的最高频域位置之间的间隔小于或等于第二预定阀值。
条件133：两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最高频域位置和高频域带宽部分的最低频域位置之间的间隔大于或第三预定阀值。
条件134：两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最低频域位置和高频域带宽部分的最高频域位置之间的间隔大于第四预定阀值。
需要说明的是，上述第一预定阀值、第二预定阀值、第三预定阀值和第四预定阀值可由工程师根据实际需要或大量实验分析后预先设定。其中，第一预定阀值可以小于第二预定阀值，第三预定阀值可以小于第四预定阀值；同时，第一预定阀值可以大于第三预定阀值，第二预定阀值可以大于第四预定阀值。
条件14：N个带宽部分的并集是预定的一个带宽部分的子集。
条件15：N个带宽部分的子载波间隔配置满足第五类预定条件。
在本实施例中，第五类预定条件可以是：N个带宽部分中的不同子载波间隔的个数小于或等于N1；所N1为小于或等于N的正整数。
例如N个带宽部分中，每个带宽部分中需要配置一个子载波间隔，此时N个带宽部分配置的不同子载波数应当小于或者等于N1。
条件16：N个带宽部分的循环前缀满足第六类预定条件。
在本实施例中，第六类预定条件可以是：N个带宽部分中的不同循环前缀类型的个数小于或等于N2；N2为小于或等于N的正整数。
例如N个带宽部分中，每个带宽部分中需要配置一个循环前缀类型，但是N个带宽部分配置的不同环前缀类型的个数应当小于或者等于N2。
条件17：N个带宽部分的时隙结构指示信息满足第七类预定条件。
在本实施例中，第七类预定条件可以包括以下条件171-173中的至少一种：
条件171：N个带宽部分服从同一个时隙结构指示信息。
需要说明的是，在本实施例中，时隙结构指示信息包括时隙格式指示(Slot Format Indicator，SFI)，以及高层公共信息tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon，tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon2，专有信令tdd-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated通知的时隙结构，这些信令的具体意义，可以参考协议38.331和38.213。
条件172：N个带宽部分中的一个带宽部分中下行传输域占有的资源和另一个带宽部分的上行传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。
这里需要说明的是，具体可以是：N个带宽部分中，一个带宽部分中下行传输域占有的资源和其余的(N-1)个带宽部分中的任意一个带宽部分的上行传 输域占有的资源之间交集为空。或者，可以是：N个带宽部分中，一个带宽部分中下行传输域占有的资源和其余的(N-1)个带宽部分中的至少一个带宽部分的上行传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。
条件173：N个带宽部分中的一个带宽部分中预留域占有的资源和另一个带宽部分的信道和/或信号的传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。
这里需要说明的是，具体可以是：N个带宽部分中，一个带宽部分中预留域占有的资源和其余的(N-1)个带宽部分中的任意一个带宽部分的信道和/或信号的传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。或者，可以是：N个带宽部分中，一个带宽部分中预留域占有的资源和其余的(N-1)个带宽部分中的至少一个带宽部分的信道和/或信号的传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。
还需要说明的是，本实施例中所述的N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分可以是N个带宽部分中的任意两个带宽部分，也可以是N个带宽部分中的特定两个带宽部分。比如N个带宽部分为带宽部分{1，2，3}，则上述N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分包括带宽部分{1，2}，或者所述N个带宽部分中的两个带宽为所述N个带宽部分的所有不同带宽部分的组合，比如两个带宽部分包括带宽部分{1，2}，带宽部分{1，3}，带宽部分{2，3}。
在本实施例中，第二类预定条件包括以下条件中的至少一种：
条件21：D个控制信道资源组占有的资源之间交集为空。
条件22：D个控制信道资源组中的控制信息之间需要满足预设条件。
比如D个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信息指示相同资源上的信道或信号的传输方向一致，其中，传输方向包括下行传输和上行传输。
条件23：D个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息指示的相同时间单元处于激活状态的带宽部分指示信息需要满足预设约定条件。
在本实施例中，预设约定条件包括不同控制资源组中的控制信息指示的相同时间单元中处于激活状态的带宽部分是相同的。
条件24：D2个控制信道资源组中的控制信息中带宽部分指示域包括的比特数根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分个数确定。
条件25：D3个控制信道资源组中的控制信息中带宽部分指示域包括的比特数不根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分个数确定。
其中，D2个控制信道资源组和D3个控制信道资源组属于D个控制信道资源组；D2、D3为小于或者等于D的整数，和/或，D2与D3的和等于D值。
在本实施例中，第三类预定条件包括以下条件中的至少之一：
条件31：D1类信道和/或信号的参数配置之间存在关联关系。
条件32：D1类信道和/或信号的发送功率总和不能超过预定第一门限。
条件33：D1类信道和/或信号的接收功率总和不能超过预定第二门限。
条件34：D1类信道和/或信号的发送功率总和超过预定功率值时，根据信令信息和/或约定规则确定所述D1类信道和/或信号的功率优先级。
条件35：D1类信道和/或信号的发送功率总和超过预定功率值时，根据信令信息或者约定规则确定所述D1类信道和/或信号中的每一类信道和/或信号的功率缩放权值。
条件36：D1类信道和/或信号对应的不同带宽部分之间的交集非空。
条件37：D1类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠。
条件38：D1类信道和/或信号中的两类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠时，两类信道和/或信号的传输方向相同。
需要说明的是，传输方向包括下行传输和上行传输(即接收和发送)。
条件39：D1类同步信号占有的资源之间的交集为空。
应当理解的是，本实施例中所述的资源包括时域资源、频域资源、码域资源、空域资源、端口资源和天线资源中的至少一种。
还应当理解的是，在D1类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号属于N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分时，第三类预定条件可以包括以下条件中的至少一种：
条件40：N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分中的控制信道占有的资源之间的交集为空。
条件41：N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分中的参考信号集合占有的资源之间的交集为空。
需要说明的是，在以下情况中的至少一种情况下，D1类信道和/或信号满足第三类预定条件：
在D1个带宽部分之间的交集非空时，D1类信道和/或信号可以满足第三类预定条件。其中：D1个带宽部分中的每一个带宽部分包括D1类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号。
需要说明的是，在D1个带宽部分之间的交集为空时，D1类信道和/或信号可以不满足第三类预定条件。
还需要说明的是，由于不同带宽部分中的信道和/或信号类不同，因此D1 个带宽部分即为D1类信道和/或信号对应的带宽部分。
在D1类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠时，D1类信道和/或信号可以满足第三类预定条件。
需要说明的是，在D1类信道和/或信号占有的资源没有重叠时，D1类信道和/或信号可以不满足第三类预定条件。
应当说明的是，本实施例中，两个信号的参数配置存在关联关系表现出如下至少一种特性：1、根据一个信号的参数配置可以得到另一个信号的参数配置；2、两个信号的某些参数组合不希望同时出现(例如第一信号的参数1配置为第一值的时候，第二信号的参数2不希望配置为第二值。其中参数1和参数2可以是同一类型的参数，也可以是不同类型的参数)；3、根据一个信号的参数配置可以得到另一个信号的参数配置范围。
本实施例中，D1类信道和/或信号的参数配置之间存在关联关系时，关联关系包括以下关系中的至少一种：
关系1：根据D1类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号的参数配置值得到另一类信道和/或信号的参数配置值。
关系2：根据D1类信道和/或信号中的某一类信道和/或信号的参数配置值得到另一类信道和/或信号的参数配置值范围。
需要说明的是，D1类信道和/或信号中的某一类信道和/或信号可以是D1类信道和/或信号中的任意一类信道和/或信号，也可以是D1类信道和/或信号中指定的某一类信道和/或信号。
关系3：D1类信道和/或信号中，不同类信道和/或信号中属于第一预定参数类型集合中的参数的配置相同。
关系4：D1类信道和/或信号中，不同类信道和/或信号中属于第二预定参数类型集合中的参数的配置值不同。
需要说明的是，第二预定参数类型集合包括空域参数。其中：一个信道和/或信号的空域参数通过一个参考信号表示；信道和/或信号的空间发送滤波参数和/或空间接收滤波参数根据参考信号的空间发送滤波参数和/或空间接收滤波参数获取。
关系5：D1类信道和/或信号中，不同类信道和/或信号中属于第三预定参数类型集合中的参数的约定组合值不能同时出现。
需要说明的是，在本实施例中，约定组合表示一个参数类型，当第一类信道和/或信号配置为A值，第二类信道和/或信号的配置值不能为B。其中，第一 类信道和/或信号中对于该参数类型的配置与第二类信道和/或信号中对于该参数类型的配置构成一个组合配置。
关系6：不同类信道和/或信号关联的预编码资源组的划分对齐。
这里需要说明的是，上述对齐表示第一带宽部分中的一个预编码组包括第二带宽部分中的一个预编码组，和/或第二带宽部分中的一个预编码组包括第一带宽部分中的一个预编码组。
关系7：D1类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间的交集非空。
关系8：D1类信道和/或信号落在相同的时间单元中。
需要说明的是，本实施例中，第一预定参数配置包括如下至少之一：子载波间隔信息，循环移位长度信息，解调参考信号的时域信息，解调参考信号的序列信息，控制信道信号对应的时域配置信息，传输预编码是否使能信息，参考信号的加扰序列产生参数，同步信号，时隙结构配置，测量参考信号配置。
第二预定参数类型集合包括如下至少之一：信道和/或信号的空域参数，信道的加扰序列产生参数。
第三预定参数类型集合包括信道和/或信号的空域参数。
还需要说明的是，本实施例中的参数包括如下至少之一：
子载波间隔信息，循环移位长度信息，解调参考信号的时域信息，解调参考信号的序列信息，控制信道信号对应的时域配置信息，传输预编码是否使能信息，同步信号，测量参考信号，时隙结构指示。
即在参数包括如上中的至少之一时，参数配置之间才可能存在关联关系。
在本实施例中，N个带宽部分可以满足如下特征中的至少之一：
特征21：N个带宽部分中存在至少一个带宽部分处于周期性激活状态；周期性激活状态的周期大于或等于一个时间单元。
在本实施例中，所述周期性激活状态，即带宽部分按照设定周期，自动在满足周期间隔的时间单元中处于激活状态。例如有时间单元[1-10]，周期为2(即每个周期有两个时间单元)，在周期中第一个时间单元上激活，即带宽部分在时间单元1、3、5、7、9上激活，而在时间单元2、4、6、8、10上处于未激活。
特征22：N个带宽部分中存在至少一个带宽部分处于半持续激活状态。
这里需要说明的是，所述半持续激活状态是指带宽部分通过接收到的信令来控制该带宽部分处于激活状态还是非激活状态。还需要说明的是，在半持续激活状态中，带宽部分处于激活状态时，实质是自动处于周期性激活状态。
特征23：N个带宽部分中存在至少一个主带宽部分。
特征24：N个带宽部分中存在至少一个辅带宽部分。
值得注意的是，在本实施例中，在N个带宽部分满足存在有主带宽部分和/或辅带宽部分时，带宽部分应当满足如下特征中的至少一种：
特征31：主带宽部分的控制信道调度的信道和/或信号在辅带宽部分中。
特征32：主带宽部分处于激活状态的时间单元集合中，时间单元之间的最小间隔小于或者等于预定间隔值。
特征33：主带宽部分所在的时间单元是连续的。
特征34：一个时间单元中至少存在一个主带宽部分。
特征35：在主带宽部分进行切换时存在的时间间隙之外的时间单元中至少存在一个主带宽部分。
特征36：辅带宽部分周期处于激活状态；其中辅带宽部分的一个周期中包括一个或者多个时间单元。
特征37：主带宽部分中包括公共控制信道。
特征38：辅带宽部分中不包括公共控制信道。
特征39：辅带宽部分中只包括专有控制信道。
特征310：辅带宽部分处于半持续激活状态；其中，辅带宽部分激活后周期处于激活状态，辅带宽部分的一个周期中包括一个或者多个时间单元。
特征311：辅带宽部分中不包括控制信道。
特征312：辅带宽部分处于激活状态时的周期和/或周期偏置是根据预定规则或者接收的信令信息来确定的。
特征313：N个带宽部分中的主带宽部分和辅带宽部分是根据预定规则或者接收的信令信息来确定的。
例如，通过BWP的标识(Identifier，ID)确定哪个是主带宽部分，哪个是辅带宽部分。比如ID最小的为主带宽部分，ID最大的辅带宽部分。
特征314：N个带宽部分所属的CC为一个CC组中的主CC时，N个带宽部分中存在主带宽部分。
需要说明的是，在本实施例中一个CC组中的主CC表示MCG(Master Cell Group，主小区组)中的PCell(Primary Cell，原单元)，和/或SCG(Secondary Cell Group，第二小区组)中的PSCell(Primary Secondary Cell，SCG中的主Cell)。
特征315：N个带宽部分所属的CC为一个CC组中的辅CC时，N个带宽部分都为辅带宽部分。
例如，MCG中的PCell中必须有主带宽部分，MCG中的其他CC中可以没有主带宽部分；SCG中的PSCell中必须有主带宽部分，SCG中的其他CC中可以没有主带宽部分。
特征316：N个带宽部分所属的CC为激活CC时，所述N个带宽部分中存在主带宽部分。
特征317：N个带宽部分所属的CC为非激活CC时，所述N个带宽部分都为辅带宽部分。
特征318：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中携带主带宽部分的动态切换指示信息。
特征319：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中携带辅带宽部分的动态切换指示信息。
特征320：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据CC中配置的带宽部分的个数确定。
特征321：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据CC中配置的带宽部分集合的个数确定。
特征322：辅带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数为0。
在本实施例中，N个带宽部分还可以是满足的如下特征至少之一：
特征41：N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分存在关联关系。
在本实施例中，第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分存在关联关系表示如下信息至少之一：1、根据其中一个带宽部分可以确定另一个带宽部分；2、一个带宽部分的激活信令也同时激活了另一个带宽部分；3、这两个带宽部分中某些参数组合不希望同时出现。
特征42：N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分属于第一带宽部分组。
特征43：N个带宽部分中的第二带宽部分属于第二带宽部分组。
特征44：N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分共享一套信道和/或信号的参数配置。
特征45：N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分上所承载的信道和/或信号的参数配置和第二带宽部分上所承载的信道和/或信号的参数配置之间满足预定配置条件。
特征46：第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分是一个信令信息触发的。
这里需要说明的是，本实施例中的第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分为N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分。其中，第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分可以为N个带宽部分中的任意两个带宽部分；第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分也可以为N个带宽部分中的特定的两个带宽部分。比如N个带宽部分为带宽部分{1，2，3}，则上述第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分的组合对应带宽部分{1，2}，或者所述第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分为所述N个带宽部分的所有不同带宽部分的组合，比如所述第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分的组合对应带宽部分{1，2}，带宽部分{1，3}，带宽部分{2，3}。
在本实施例中，确定出的N个带宽部分还可以是满足以下特征中的至少一种特征：
特征51：N个带宽部分为在同一时间单元中处于激活状态的N个带宽部分。
特征52：N个带宽部分属于一个CC。
特征53：N个带宽部分中不同带宽部分处于激活状态的时间资源之间有交集。
特征54：N个带宽部分中，存在至少一个带宽部分的控制信道调度的信道和/或信号在另一个带宽部分中的情况。
特征55：N个带宽部分的信息传输方向相同，其中所述信息传输方向包括：下行传输方向和上行传输方向。
特征56：N大于预定值时，所述N个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分所对应的参数集合中的参数为固定值。
本实施例中，参数为固定值表示参数值不在DCI中动态通知。此外，参数集合中包括如下参数中的至少一种：解调参考信号的加扰序列参数；解调参考信号占有的一组连续的时域符号中包括的时域符号个数。
特征57：N个带宽部分中的一个带宽部分中的控制信令包括的信息域根据N的值确定。
例如，在N的值大于或等于预定值时，信令信息中不包括预定指示信息。在N的值小于预定值时，信令信息中包括预定指示信息。而根据预定指示信息即可以确定信息域。
特征58：N个带宽部分中M1个带宽部分中的物理层动态控制信息中可以携带带宽部分动态切换指示信息。
特征59：N个带宽部分中M2个带宽部分中的物理层动态控制信息中不能 携带带宽部分动态切换指示信息。
特征60：N个带宽部分中的M3个带宽部分中包括预定格式的物理层动态控制信息。
需要说明的是，本实施例中预定格式的物理层动态控制信息包括下行控制信息格式(Downlink Control Information format，DCI format)2_0。
特征61：N个带宽部分中的M4个带宽部分中不包括预定格式的物理层动态控制信息。
特别需要注意的是，在本实施例中，M1、M2、M3、M4为小于或等于N的非负整数；和/或，所述M1与M2的和等于所述N值，M3与M4的和等于所述N值。
特别需要注意的是，在本实施例中，物理层控制信道指示的带宽部分索引对应的带宽部分属于N个带宽部分时，不启动带宽部分切换流程；物理层控制信道指示的带宽部分索引对应的带宽部分不属于所述N个带宽部分时，启动带宽部分切换流程。
此外，在本实施例所提供的信息传输方法应用于终端上时，由于终端可以接收到多个TRP发来的信息，因此终端盲检时可能存在候选控制信道的总个数超过终端盲检能力的情况。对此，本实施例中提供了候选控制信道的总个数超过终端盲检能力时的候选控制信道筛选方式。具体的：
方式一：在N个带宽部分包括的候选控制信道的总个数大于第一预定数值时，可以按照预定的规则和/或信令信息监听M个带宽部分中的候选控制信道。
需要说明的是，M为小于或者等于N的整数，M个带宽部分是N个带宽部分中的M个带宽部分。此外还需要说明的是，M个带宽部分中的候选控制信道的个应当数小于或等于第一预定数值。
此外，在本实施例中，N个带宽部分可以位于同一个时间单元中。
方式二：在D个控制信道资源组中包括的控制信道的总个数大于第二预定数值时，按照预定的规则和/或信令信息监听D4个控制信道资源组中的控制信道。
需要说明的是，D4个控制信道资源组是D个控制信道资源组中的D4个控制信道资源组。
在本实施例中，选出的M个带宽部分应当满足以下特征中的至少一种：
特征61：M个带宽部分是所N个带宽部分中的具有较高优先级的带宽部分。
特征62：M个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分中监听的候选控制信道个数小于 或者等于该带宽部分中配置的候选信道个数。
特征63：M个带宽部分来自Q个带宽部分组。
需要说明的是，Q为小于或等于M的正整数，且N个带宽部分属于Q个带宽部分组中的带宽部分的集合。
特征64：需要监听的候选控制信道在M个带宽部分中按照预定比例分配。
在本实施例中，M个带宽部分满足M个带宽部分来自Q个带宽部分组时，包括：Q个带宽部分组的每个带宽部分组和M个带宽部分构成的集合之间的交集非空；和/或，M个带宽部分中至少存在一个带宽部分属于Q个带宽部分组的一个带宽部分组。
在本实施例中，还可以根据信令信息和/或约定规则确定如下至少之一：
1.可以确定N个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分对应的时间单元集合。
在本实施例中，带宽部分会在其对应的时间单元集合中处于激活状态。
2.可以确定T1个时间单元集合和T1个带宽部分集合之间的对应关系。
在本实施例中，T1个带宽部分集合中的每个带宽部分集合中存在至少一个带宽部分在该带宽部分集合对应的时间单元集合中处于激活状态；和/或，N个带宽部分属于N个带宽部分所在的时间单元对应的带宽部分集合中。
3.可以确定一个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分的个数获取。
在本实施例中，当带宽部分指示域不能根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分个数获取时，动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数为0；当带宽部分指示域能根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分个数获取时，动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分的个数获取。
4.可以确定一个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分集合的个数获取。
在本实施例中，当带宽部分指示域不能根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分集合个数获取时，动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数为0；当带宽部分指示域能根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分集合个数获取时，动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分集合的个数获取。
5.可以确定一个带宽部分中是否包括预定格式的动态控制信息。
在本实施例中，预定格式的动态控制信息可以包括DCI format 2_0。
6.可以确定一个控制信道资源组中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是 否根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分的个数获取。
7.可以确定一个控制信道资源组中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分集合的个数获取。
8.可以确定一个控制信道资源组中是否能包括预定格式的动态控制信息。
在本实施例中，信息传输方法还包括：确定一个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否需要根据CC中配置的带宽部分的个数得到；和/或，确定一个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否需要根据CC中配置的带宽部分集合的个数得到。
在本实施例中，确定出的N个带宽部分应当来自于X个CC(X为大于1的正整数)，和/或确定出的N个带宽部分应当来自于X1个CC组(X1为大于1的正整数)。进而可以根据N个带宽部分所在的CC确定N个带宽部分所在的带宽部分组。
此外，在本实施例中，确定出的D个控制信道资源组应当来自于Y个CC，和/或应当来自于Y1个CC组(Y和Y1为大于1的正整数)。
在本实施例中，各CC应当满足以下条件中的至少一种：
条件41：第一CC和第二CC的频域资源之间有重叠。
需要说明的是，第一CC和第二CC为X个CC中的两个CC；这两个CC可以是X个CC中的任意两个CC，也可以是X个CC中的特定两个CC。
条件42：第一CC组中的CC在第二CC组中存在至少一个关联的CC。
需要说明的是，第一CC组和第二CC组为X1个CC组中的两个CC组，这两个CC组可以是X1个CC组中的任意两个CC组，也可以是X1个CC中的特定两个CC组。X1小于等于X且大于等于2。
和/或，第一CC组和所述第二CC组为Y1个CC组中的两个CC组，这两个CC组可以是Y1个CC组中的任意两个CC组，也可以是Y1个CC中的特定两个CC组。Y1小于等于Y且大于等于2。
和/或，关联的两个CC的参数配置之间存在关联关系。
条件43：一个CC组中包括的带宽部分属于一个带宽部分组。
条件44：不同CC组中包括的带宽部分属于不同的带宽部分组。
条件45：一个CC中包括的带宽部分属于一个带宽部分组。
条件46：不同CC中包括的带宽部分属于不同的带宽部分组。
条件47：X个CC中的两个CC的参数配置存在关联关系。
需要说明的是，上述参数配置可以包括时隙结构指示信息。
条件48：Y个CC中的两个CC的参数配置存在关联关系。
需要说明的是，上述参数配置可以包括时隙结构指示信息。
在本实施例中，D个控制信道资源组对应D个参考信号集合，其中，D个控制信道资源组中的每个控制信道资源组对应一个参考信号集合。
在本实施例中，参考信号集合满足如下特征至少之一：
特征71：参考信号集合为用途为代码本(codebook)的上行参考信号集合。
特征72：参考信号集合为用途为非代码本(non codebook)的上行参考信号集合。
特征73：参考信号集合为非周期参考信号集合。
特征74：参考信号集合之间的差集非空。
特征75：D个控制信道资源组中的一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度的解调参考信号的空间发送滤波参数关联的参考信号属于所述一个控制信道资源组对应的参考信号集合。
特征76：D个控制信道资源组中的一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度的解调参考信号的空间接收滤波参数关联的参考信号属于所述一个控制信道资源组对应的参考信号集合。
特征77：D个控制信道资源组中的一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度的参考信号属于所述一个控制信道资源组对应的参考信号集合。
在本实施例中，还可以确定G个CC。G个CC之间满足如下中的特征至少之一：
1.G个CC包括的频域资源之间有重叠。
2.G个CC的参数配置之间满足第八类约定条件。
需要说明的是，在本实施例中，第八类约定条件包括如下至少之一：频域有重叠的不同CC的同步信号占有的资源的交集为空间；频域有重叠的不同CC的相同资源上的信道或信号的传输方向要一致；频域有重叠的不同CC共享一套时隙结构配置信息。
3.G个CC中的信道和/或信号的参数配置之间有关联。
其中G为大于或者等于2的正整数。
此外，还需要说明的是，在实际应用中，可能存在传输的信道和/或信号间 有冲突的情况。例如两个TRP分别对应两个CC，两个CC之间的频域有重叠，为此两个TRP调度的上行信号就有可能冲突。
在本实施例中，Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突时，可以根据信令信息和/或约定规则传输Z类信道和/或信号中的Z1类信道和/或信号；和/或，Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突时，可以根据信令信息和/或约定规则传输第三类信道和/或信号。其中，第三类信道和/或信号是根据Z类信道和/或信号中的至少两类信道和/或信号的参数信息得到的，和/或所述第三类信道和/或信号和所述Z类信道和/或信号的交集为空。
这里需要说明的是，Z为大于或者等于2的正整数，Z1为小于或者等于Z的正整数。此外，所述Z类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号属于确定出的N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分(即Z类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号承载域确定出的N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分上)；和/或，所述Z类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号由确定出的D个控制信道资源组中的Z个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度；和/或所述Z类信道包括如下信道类型至少之一：数据信道、控制信道，所述Z类信号包括如下信号类型至少之一：测量参考信号、解调参考信号、随机接入信号、同步信号、资源请求信号、相位跟踪信号；和/或所述Z类信道和/或信号中的不同类信道和/或信号关联不同的组信息标识。
在本实施例中，冲突包括如下冲突中的至少一种：
冲突1：Z类信道和/或信号占有的时域资源之间有重叠。
冲突2：Z类信道和/或信号占有的频域资源之间有重叠。
冲突3：Z类信道包括的解调参考信号资源之间有重叠。
冲突4：Z类信号包括的参考信号资源之间有重叠。
冲突5：Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源之间有重叠。
冲突6：Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源在第一通信节点上不能同时传输。
冲突7：Z类信道和/或信号占有的天线资源之间有重叠。
冲突8：Z类信道和/或信号占有的天线资源在第一通信节点上不能同时传输。
冲突9：Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源对应的参考信号所属的组信息不满足约定条件。
特别需要注意的是，在本实施例的一种具体实施方式中，可认为出现冲突 1-9中的任意一种时即认为Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突。但是在本实施例的另一种具体实施方式中，可以在Z类信道和/或信号占有的时域资源和/或频域资源有重叠，且Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源有重叠时，才认为Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突；和/或，可以在Z类信道和/或信号占有的时域资源和/或频域资源有重叠，且Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源第一通信节点不能同时传输时，才认为Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突；和/或，可以在Z类信道和/或信号占有的时域资源和/或频域资源有重叠，且Z类信道和/或信号占有的天线资源有重叠时，才认为Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突。
这里特别需要说明的是，第一通信节点为传输所述Z1类信道和/或信号的通信节点。
在本实施例中，Z类信道和/或信号满足以下条件中的至少一种：
条件51：Z类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源通过参考信号表示，信道和/或信号的空间发送滤波参数和/或空间接收滤波参数根据参考信号的空间发送滤波参数和/或空间接收滤波参数获取。
需要说明的是，本实施例中，Z类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号可以是Z类信道和/或信号中的任意一类信道和/或信号，也可以是Z类信道和/或信号中特定的某一类信道和/或信号。
条件52：Z类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源通过参考信号表示，信道和/或信号和参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关系。
条件53：Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源在第一通信节点上不能同时传输，包括Z类信道和/或信号占有的多个空域资源关联的多个参考信号所属的组信息不满足约定条件，和/或所述包括Z类信道和/或信号占有的多个空域资源关联的多个参考信号是同一个参考信号。
其中，所述多个参考信号所属的组信息不满足约定条件，所述约定条件包括所述多个参考信号属于相同的参考信号组，其中，相同参考信号组中的不同参考信号能同时发送或者能同时接收，不同参考信号组的参考信号不能同时发送或者不能同时接收，或者所述约束条件包括所述多个参考信号属于不同的参考信号组，其中，不同参考信号组中的参考信号可以同时发送或者同时接收，相同参考信号组中的参考信号不能同时发送或者不能同时接收。
在本实施例中，参考信号资源组中包括的参考信号资源可以是第二通信节点通过信令信息指示给第一通信节点的，和/或第一通信节点反馈给第二通信节点的。
例如Z类信道和/或信号为上行信号，Z类信道和/或信号的空域资源通过调度请求指示(Schduling Request Indication，SRI)指示，SRI指示的Z类信道和/或信号对应的至少Z个SRS资源属于相同的组，但是是不同的SRS，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号不能同时发送；SRI指示的Z类信道和/或信号对应的至少Z个SRS资源属于不同的组，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号能同时发送。
在本实施例的另一示例中，也可以是：SRI对应的SRS测量参考信号资源属于相同的组，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号能同时发送，属于不同的组则表明这Z类信道和/或信号不能同时发送。
类似地，Z类信道和/或信号为下行信号，所述Z类信道和/或信号的空域资源通过TCI(transmission configuration indicator，传输配置指示器)指示，TCI中指示的Z类信道和/或信号对应的至少Z个下行参考信号或同步信号资源属于相同的组，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号不能同时接收；TCI中指示的Z类信道和/或信号对应的至少Z个下行参考信号或同步信号资源属于不同的组，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号能同时接收。
在本实施例的另一示例中，也可以是：TCI对应的Z个下行参考信号/同步信号资源属于相同的组，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号能同时接收；TCI对应的Z个下行参考信号/同步信号资源属于不同的组，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号不能同时接收。
这里需要说明的是，本实施例中的参考信号所属的组信息可以与组信息标识相同，也可以不同。
条件54：Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源在第一通信节点上不能同时传输，包括Z类信道和/或信号占有的多个空域资源关联的多个参考信号在第一通信节点上不能同时传输。
在本实施例中，在存在冲突时，还会进行以下至少一种操作：
1.根据如下信息中的至少之一确定Z1类信道和/或信号：
Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的控制信道资源组的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组的优先级。
其中，Z1类信道和/或信号是Z类信道和/或信号中具有较高优先级的信道和/或信号。
2.根据Z1类信道和/或信号确定如下信息中的至少之一：
Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的控 制信道资源组的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组的优先级。
3.根据如下信息中的至少之一确定Z1类信道和/或信号：
Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分是否相同；Z类信道和/或信号关联的控制信道资源组是否相同；Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组是否相同；Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组是否相同；所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的组信息标识是否相同。
比如SRS和上行物理控制信道(Physical Uplink Control Channel，PUCCH)的时域资源有重叠时，如果SRS和PUCCH的上述信息中的至少之一相同，则视为有冲突，需要舍弃其一，比如舍弃SRS或者舍弃PUCCH，SRS和PUCCH的上述信息中的至少之一不同，则视为两者没有冲突，两者都发送。
4.第一通信节点不传输Z类信道和/或信号和Z1类信道和/或信号的差集中包括的信道和/或信号。
5.调整Z1类信道和/或信号中的Z2类信道和/或信号中的属于第一预定参数集合中的参数信息，根据调整之后的参数信息发送Z1类信道和/或信号。
其中，Z2为小于或者等于Z1的非负整数。其中，第一预定参数集合中的参数信息包括如下信息中的至少之一：时间提前量信息，序列信息，天线信息，解调参考信号信息和传输码块数。
6.调整Z1类信道和/或信号中的Z2类信道和/或信号中的时间提前量信息，根据调整之后的功率参数发送所述Z1类信道和/或信号。其中，Z2为小于或者等于Z1的非负整数。
在本实施例中，在Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突时，还包括进行以下至少一种操作：
1.Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突时，根据信令信息和/或约定规则传输所述Z类信道和/或信号中的Z1类信道和/或信号。
2.Z类测量参考信号占有的资源之间有冲突时，根据信令信息和/或约定规则传输所述第三类信道和/或信号。
本实施例中第三类信道和/或信号的参数信息是根据Z类信道和/或信号中的Z1类信道和/或信号中的至少两类信道和/或信号的配置信息得到的。其中，参数信息包括如下信息中的至少之一：功率信息，时间提前量信息，序列信息，天线信息和端口信息。在本实施例中，第三类信道和/或信号的参数信息还可以根据信令信息或者约定规则得到。
在本实施例中，Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源有冲突包括：
Z类信道和/或信号关联的第一信息相同。
其中，第一信息包括如下至少之一：Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分、Z类信道和/或信号关联的控制信道资源组、Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组、Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组、Z类信道和/或信号关联的组信息标识。
其中，Z类信道包括如下信道类型中的至少之一：数据信道和控制信道；Z类信号包括如下信号类型中的至少之一：测量参考信号、解调参考信号、随机接入信号、同步信号、资源请求信号和相位跟踪信号。
在本实施例中，Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源和/或参考信号有重叠时，Z类信道和/或信号关联的第一信息相同，Z类信道和/或信号发生冲突，且Z1小于所述Z值；和/或，Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠时，Z类信道和/或信号关联的第一信息不同，Z类信道和/或信号没有发生冲突，且Z1等于所述Z值。
需要说明的是，上述资源包括以下资源的至少一种：时域资源、频域资源和空域资源。
根据本公开实施例提供的信息传输方法，通过确定N个处于激活状态的带宽部分；在激活的N个带宽部分上传输信道和/或信号；和/或，确定D个控制信道资源组，在D个控制信道资源组中监听控制信息，根据监听到的控制信息传输信道和/或信号。在各个TRP和/或终端都进行信息传输时，即可有效支持波束机制下多个TRP给一个终端有效服务。
实施例二：
在本实施例中，为了实现多TRP传输，增加系统频谱效率，和/或提高通信的鲁棒性。终端在同一时刻可以同时接收来自多个TRP的数据传输，如图3所示，终端在同一时隙(slot)中可以同时接收PDSCH1和PDSCH2，其中，PDSCH1是TRP1发送的，PDSCH2是TRP2发送的，两个TRP之间没有理想Backhaul，所以PDSCH1由DCI1调度，PDSCH2由DCI2调度。由于PDSCH1和PDSCH2占有的资源可能有重叠，而且如果允许两个TRP传输的信道和/或信号的参数配置可以不同，可以通过如下方案实现。
在一个时间单元中，在一个CC中给一个终端配置N个处于激活状态的BWP，每个BWP的配置信息配置该BWP中的信道和/或信号的参数信息。如图4所述，BWP1和BWP2可以各自配置各自的物理下行共享信道配置(pdsch-config)，物理下行控制信道配置(pdcch-config)，半静态调度配置 (sps-configure)和无线链路监测配置(radiolinkmonitoringconfigure)，从而可以使得不同的TRP可以有不同的参数配置。其，中pdsch-config，pdcch-config，sps-configure和radiolinkmonitoringconfigure的配置的具体意义可以参考协议38.331。
图4中BWP1和BWP2各自配置各自的pdsch-config，pdcch-config，sps-configure和radiolinkmonitoringconfigure。本实施例也不排除BWP1和BWP2只有部分配置是各自独立配置的，部分配置是共享的，如图5所示，radiolinkmonitoringconfigure是共享的，其他都是BWP各自独立配置的，当然图5中共享的配置只是示例，本文并不排除共享的配置是其他配置。例如图6所示，BWP1和BWP2共享的配置是radiolinkmonitoringconfigure和pdsch-config。总之共享的配置可以是pdsch-config，pdcch-config，sps-configure和radiolinkmonitoringconfigure中的一种或者多种。
本实施例中，一个时间单元中处于激活状态的N个BWP之间需要满足预定的条件。如图4中BWP2是BWP1的子集。本实施例中，BWP1和BWP2满足的预定的条件还可以是如下条件中的一种或者多种：
特征一：BWP1和BWP2属于一个CC。
特征二：BWP1包括的频域资源和BWP2包括的频域资源之间有重叠，如图7所示。
特征三：BWP1的最高频域位置和BWP2的最低频域位置之间的间隔小于或者等于第一预定值。如图8所示，第一频域间隔小于或者等于第一预定值，其中，BWP的最低频域位置对应的子载波号小于或者等于BWP2的最低频域位置对应的子载波号。
特征四：BWP1的最低频域位置和BWP2的最高频域位置之间的间隔小于或者等于预定阀值。如图9所示，第二频域间隔小于或者等于第二预定值，其中，BWP的最低频域位置对应的子载波号小于或者等于BWP2的最低频域位置对应的子载波号。
特征五：BWP1和BWP2都属于预定的一个BWP，如图10所示，一个时间单元中处于激活状态的BWP1和BWP2占有的频域资源都是BWP3占有的频域资源的子集。
特征六：BWP1和BWP2的有效时间之间有重叠。比如在一个slot中两个BWP都是处于激活的状态。
在图7-9中所示的低子载波号到高子载波号的方向也是低频域位置到高频域位置的方向。
需要特别说明的一点是，当支持同一个CC中激活的多个BWP之间的子载波间隔可以配置不同时，他们的子载波编号就会不一致。为此，上述第一频域间隔、第二频域间隔，第一预定值和第二预定值可以是通过关联一个参考子载波间隔进行描述。频域资源有重叠表示两个BWP占有的频域资源有重叠，此处重叠也可以通过关联一个参考子载波间隔进行描述。
上述的对于在同一时间段都处于激活状态的N个BWP强制满足一定的条件，主要目的是，在保证不同TRP对应不同的参数配置的同时，降低终端的处理复杂度，即在同一时间段都处于激活状态的N个BWP之间的间隔不要太大，甚至是重叠的，从而终端侧实际只是以一个BWP进行射频接收，只是高层配置可以是：不同的BWP有各自不同的配置。终端的不同接收panel以对应的BWP进行信号的处理。或者终端采用不同的数字接收波束接收各自的BWP，但是射频段只以一个能包括所述N个BWP的并集的频域资源接收。
图4-6中，BWP1和BWP2可以独立配置一些参数，独立配置的参数之间没有一定的约束关联。本实施例的另一种实施方式中，可以进一步限制：虽然各个BWP可以独立配置参数，但独立配置的多套参数之间需要满足一定的条件。特别是BWP1和BWP2占有的频域资源有重叠，或者BWP1中的信道和/或信号和BWP2中的信道和/或信号占有的频域资源之间有重叠时，BWP1中的信道和/或信号的配置和BWP2中的信道和/或信号的配置需要满足预定条件。比如BWP1中的信道和/或信号配置和BWP2中的信道和/或信号配置需要满足的预定条件包括如下条件中的一种或者多种：
条件一：所述N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分对应的控制信道占有的资源是正交的。比如BWP1中的所有专有search space(搜索空间)占有的时域资源和/或频域资源与BWP2中的所有专有search space占有的时域资源和/或频域资源之间的交集为空。因为由于TRP1和TRP2之间没有理想Backhual，他们各自独立调度，他们的数据空分达到提高频谱效率的同时，需要保证他们的控制信道是正交的，增加控制信道的鲁棒性，要不然两个TRP在相同的时频资源上都传输控制信道，当空分效果不好的时候，控制信道的鲁棒性无法保证。
条件二：所述N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分中的参考信号占有的资源是正交的，比如BWP1中的DMRS(Demodulation Reference Signal，解调参考信号)占有的资源和BWP2中的DMRS占有的资源是正交的。其中，解调参考信号包括控制信道的解调参考信号以及数据信道的解调参考信号中的一种或者多种。当解调参考信号包括控制信道的解调参考信号时，可以是两个BWP中的DCI占有的时频资源有重叠，但两个BWP的解调参考信号是正交的；或者是两个BWP中的DCI占有的时频资源之间也没有交集，两个BWP的控制信道的解 调参考信号也是正交的。和/或，BWP1中的CSI-RS(信道状态信息参考信号)占有的资源和BWP2中的CSI-RS占有的资源是正交的；和/或BWP1中的PTRS(Phase-tracking reference signals，相位跟踪参考信号)占有的资源和BWP2中的PTRS占有的资源是正交的；和/或BWP1中的SSB(Single Side Band，单边带)/PBCH(Physical Broadcast Channel物理广播信道)占有的资源和BWP2中的SSB/PBCH占有的资源是正交的。两个参考信号占有的资源正交表示两个参考信号占有的资源的交集为空。其中，资源包括如下资源至少之一：时域资源，频域资源，码域资源，端口资源和空域资源。其中，码域资源可以是参考信号的伪噪声码(Pseudo-Noise Code，PN)序列，也可以是参考信号的端口码分复用采用的码。比如两个端口通过长度为2的码进行码分复用，端口1采用[1，1]码，端口2采用[1，-1]的码。本实施例中，一个空域资源关联一个参考信号，比如关联波束训练阶段的一个参考信号。不同参考信号关联的空间接收滤波参数不同，或者不同参考信号关联的空间发送滤波参数不同。
条件三：所述N个带宽部分包括的候选控制信道的总个数大于预定值时，按照预定的规则和/或信令信息监听M个带宽部分中的候选控制信道，其中，所述M个带宽部分属于所述N个带宽部分，M为小于或者等于N的整数。比如在slotn中BWP1中的候选控制信道个数为C1，BWP2中候选控制信道的个数为C2，C1+C2大于预定值C3，则可以通过如下方案之一确定在slotn中终端监听的候选控制信道：
方案3.1:：只监听一个BWP中的候选控制信道。比如BWP1是主BWP，BWP1对应的TRP1到达该终端的性能较BWP2对应的TRP2到达该终端的性能好，则只监听BWP1中的候选控制信道。
方案3.2：slotn中监听的候选控制信道在M个BWP中按预定比例分配，其中，所述M个BWP是N个BWP中的M个BWP，M为小于或者等于N的正整数。比如以两个TRP为例，为了保证通信的鲁棒性，两个TRP中的链路都需要保持，为此在BWP1中监听(2/3)C个候选控制信道，在BWP2中监听(2/3)C个候选控制信道。上述是slotn中监听的候选控制信道在BWP1和BWP2中均匀分布的情况，当然本实施例也不排除slotn中的监听候选控制信道在M个BWP中不是等比例分配的。比如主BWP中分配更多比例，和/或BWP的带宽越大分配的候选信道个数越多。进一步地，所述M个带宽部分来自于Q个带宽部分组，Q个带宽部分组中的每个带宽部分组和所述M个带宽部分之间的交集非空，Q个带宽部分组中的每个带宽部分组在所述M个带宽部分中至少有一个带宽部分属于所述带宽部分组。所述Q个带宽部分组根据基站给终端发送的信令确定，和/或根据基站和终端预先约定的规则得到。
条件三：所述N个带宽部分中的N个信道和/或信号的参数配置之间存在关联关系，其中，所述两个参数配置存在关联关系表示如下至少之一：根据一个信道和/或信号的参数配置可以得到另一个信道和/或信号的参数配置；两个信道和/或信号的某些参数组合不希望同时出现，即比如第一信号的参数1配置为第一值的时候，第二信号的参数2不希望配置为第二值。其中，参数1和参数2可以是同一类型的参数，也可以是不同类型的参数。具体地可以有如下参数配置情况：
参数一：所述N个带宽部分中的信道的加扰序列产生参数不同。比如PDSCH的加扰序列的产生初始化参数为公式(1)所示，具体加扰序列的产生可以参考38.211协议。可以为BWP1中的PDSCH配置n ID，1，可以为BWP2中的PDSCH配置n ID，2，从而使得图11中的PDSCH1和PDSCH2占有相同时频资源的时候，在空分的基础上再通过加扰序列进行干扰随机化，达到一定的干扰消除效果。上述是两个BWP对应公式(1)中的n ID不同，当然也可以是不同BWP的n RNTI，n ID参数中的一个参数或者多个参数不同。其中，n RNTI是终端的暂时识别号，q是传输块索引，n ID是高层配置的参数，可以视为虚拟小区号，公式(1)中各个参数的具体意义可以进一步参考协议38.211和38.331
C init＝n RNTI·2 15+q·2 14+n ID  (1)
参数二：所述N个带宽部分中的参考信号的加扰序列的产生参数相同，比如PDSCH的DMRS的序列产生初始化如公式(2)所示，为了两个BWP中的DMRS正交，则这两个BWP中的DMRS序列要相同，从而公式(2)中的
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000001
n SCID，l和
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000002
中的一项或者多项相同。为了保证相同，一种方案是
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000003
还可以动态变，只是TRP1和TRP2通过实现的方式沟通在相同时间单元中两个BWP中的
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000004
动态调度的时候要相同。另一种方案是
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000005
不在DCI中通知了，即n SCID不包括在DCI中，可以通过配置N ID只有一个值这样的方式来实现。公式(2)中各个参数的具体意义可以参考协议38.211和38.331。
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000006
进一步地，为了不同BWP中的
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000007
相同，此时可以有如下方案：
方案1：限制不同BWP中的子载波间隔相同，不同BWP中的循环移位长度相同。
方案2：所述N个BWP在获取公式(2)中的DMRS信息时，所述N个BWP都参考同一套(子载波间隔，循环移位长度)得到公式(2)中的
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000009
和l。比如BWP1，BWP2都参考(子载波间隔3，循环移位长度3)得到
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000010
和
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000011
并将解调参考信号所在的时域符号位置，这算成(子载波间隔3，循环移 位长度3)对应的时间单元中的时域符号索引。
另一方面为了不同BWP中的解调参考信号占有的时域资源相同，限制不同BWP中的解调参考信号占有的一组连续的时域符号中包括的时域符号个数相同。即38.211中的single symbol和double symbol不能动态变化。参考协议38.211，38.212和38.331，为了实现single symbol和double symbol不动态变化，一种方式是通过将maxLength配置为1，从而就固定为single symbol。另一种方式是将maxLength配置为2，但是DCI中不携带single symbol和double symbol动态变化的通知信息，固定为double symbols。比如所述N值大于预定值时，DCI中包括第一信息指示信息，所述N值小于或者等于预定值时，DCI中包括第一信息指示信息。第一信息包括如下信息中的至少之一：single symbol或是double symbol指示信息，以及n SCID的指示信息。
参数三：所述N个带宽部分中的预编码资源组的划分是对齐的。对齐表示第一带宽部分中的一个预编码组包括第二带宽部分中的一个预编码组，和/或第二带宽部分中的一个预编码组包括第一带宽部分中的一个预编码组，如图12所述，BWP1的一个预编码组和BWP2中的一个预编码组是相同的，即BWP1的一个预编码组包括BWP2中的一个预编码组，BWP2的一个预编码组也包括BWP1中的一个预编码组。其中，一个预编码组表示落在一个预编码组中的信道信号(比如PDSCH)的预编码相同，和/或落在一个预编码组中的参考信号(比如解调参考信号)的预编码相同。这是因为两个BWP中的信道都是一个终端的目标信道，如果预编码组对齐，对于终端做干扰消除是有帮助的。否则图11中的PDSCH1中的一个预编码组包括PDSCH2的两个预编码组，终端在接收PDSCH1的时候不容易消除PDSCH2造成的干扰。
参数四：所述N个带宽部分中的信道和/或信号的属于预定参数集合中的参数的配置相同。如图5中的radiolinkmonitoring的配置两个BWP共享，或者如图6中的radiolinkmonitoring和pdsch-config共享。图5和图6中是共享的方式，本实施例中也不排除每个BWP独立配置radiolinkmonitoring和/或pdsch-config，只是要求两个BWP中配置的radiolinkmonitoring和/或pdsch-config的参数是相同的。预定参数集合中的参数还可以是如下至少之一：速率匹配信息，测量参考信号信息，预编码资源组的通知方式(具体可以参考协议38.331中的prb-BundlingType)和非周期测量参考信号。
参数五：所述N个带宽中的信道和/或信号占有的时域资源和/或频域资源和/或参考信号之间有交集时，所述N个带宽中的信道和/或信号的传输方向要相同，不能在相同的资源上。一个TRP指示终端进行上行传输，另一个TRP指示终端进行下行传输。进一步地，所述N个带宽部分中的时隙结构配置之间有关 联，比如BWP1(对应TRP1)中指示终端进行上行传输的时域和/或频域资源上，BWP2(对应TRP2)不能指示终端进行下行传输；和/或BWP1(对应TRP1)中指示终端保留(reserved)的时域和/或频域资源上，BWP2(对应TRP2)不能指示终端进行信道和/或信号传输。reserved域表示终端在这些域上要对信道和/或信号做速率匹配，不能进行信道和/或信号传输，和/或BWP1和BWP2共享一个时隙结构指示信息。
上述是以一个CC中激活两个BWP为例讲述的，本文也不排除激活N个BWP，N为大于2的整数。
上述为了实现不同TRP的配置参数可以不同，采用为不同TRP配置不同的BWP，只是为一个终端配置的激活N个BWP之间需要满足约定条件。
进一步地，N个带宽部分中的信道和/或信号的配置参数之间需要满足约定条件。本实施例的另一种实施方式中，为了实现不同TRP之间的配置参数不同，可以采用如下方式：一个CC中一个时刻处于激活状态的BWP只有一个，通过一个BWP中包括的不同的控制信道资源组对应不同的TRP，一个BWP中可以包括多套PDSCH/PUCCH(Physical Uplink Control CHannel，物理上行链路控制信道)/PUSCH(Physical Uplink Shared Channel，物理上行共享信道)/参考信号的配置，建立多套控制信道资源组和多套PDSCH/PUCCH/PUSCH/参考信号之间的对应关系，也可以实现不同TRP的信道和/或信号的配置不同的目的。如图13所示，图13中一个CORESET即为一个控制信道资源，CORESET组1中可以包括一个或者多个CORESET。CORESET组1中的控制信息调度的第一类信道和/或信号与CORESET组2中的控制信息调度的且与第二类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有交集时，这两类信道和/或信号的配置参数之间需要满足类似于上述属于不同带宽部分的不同类信道和/或信号的配置参数之间需要满足的约定条件。
另一方面也可以CORESET1和CORESET2中包括的DCI都可以指示BWP，但是需要两个CORESET组指示的同一个时间单元处于激活状态的两个BWP之间需要满足上述N个BWP需要满足的约定条件，或者约定CORESET组1和CORESET组2激活的处于相同时间单元的BWP是相同的。
图13中一个控制信道资源为一个CORESET，当然本实施例中一个控制信道资源可以为一个搜索空间集合，或者为一个搜索空间，或者为一个候选控制信道，当然也可以为其他控制信道资源。
当然也可以直接给一个信道和/或信号配置组信息标识，比如组信息标识为0则来自TRP1的或者发送给TRP2的，比如组信息标识为1则来自TRP2的或者发送给TRP2的，关联不同组标识的信道和/或信号为不同类信道和/或信号， 他们的配置需要满足上述约束条件，或者他们的参数配置之间存在上述关联关系。
实施例三：
在实施例二中，一个CC中相同时间段中处于激活状态的BWP有N个，支持各个TRP对应的BWP独立配置参数的同时，限制N个BWP需要尽量不要离得太远，从而使得终端侧可以基于一个能包括这N个BWP的大一点的BWP去接收信道和/或信号，降低终端功耗。
在本实施例中，从另一个角度描述。一个CC中相同时间段中处于激活状态的N个BWP需要频分，如图14所示，两个TRP之间没有理想Backhaul，为了降低这两个TRP之间的干扰，可以让两个TRP对应的BWP是频分的，从而增加鲁棒性，降低功耗。终端侧的每个panel只处理比较小的带宽，如图14所示，终端的panel1只处理BWP1带宽，终端的panel2只处理BWP2带宽。终端和一个TRP之间的链路发生中断，还可以和另一个TRP之间保持链接。其中，图14中的BWP1和BWP2的频域分布情况如图15所示，可见BWP1和BWP2占有的频域资源之间没有重叠。
BWP的切换在NR协议中可以有如下三种方式：动态切换，RRC重配以及开启时间窗计时(计时到达之后就切换到预定BWP中)。在本实施例的另一种实施方式中，在增加链路鲁棒性，降低终端功耗的同时，可以使RRC信令配置的不同的时间段激活的BWP集合不同。即在RRC信令中建立时间单元集合和激活BWP集合之间的关联关系。如图16所示，RRC(Radio Resource Control，无线资源控制)信令或媒体接入控制层控制单元(Medium Access Control-Control Element，MAC-CE)信令中通知第一时间单元集合中(即斜线表示的时间单元中)BWP1是激活BWP，第二时间单元集合中(即方格表示的时间单元中)BWP2是激活BWP，或者RRC信令/MAC-CE信令中通知第一时间单元集合中(即斜线表示的时间单元中)BWP1是default(默认)BWP，第二时间单元集合中(即方格表示的时间单元中)BWP2是default BWP，其中，default BWP和激活BWP的具体意义可以参考协议38.213。图16中不同时间单元集合的划分只是示例，并不排除其他的划分情况。本实施例中一个时间单元可以是一个slot，也可以是一个OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing，正交频分复用)符号对应的时域长度，也可以是一个子帧，当然本实施例也不排除其他的时间单元的情况。
进一步地，可以确定T1个时间单元集合和T1个激活BWP集合之间的对应关系，和/或T1个时间单元集合和T1个default BWP集合之间的对应关系。在 本实施例中，对应关系可以是在一个控制信令中通知得到的。本实施例中T1个时间单元集合中的一个时间单元集合中包括的时间单元是非连续的。其中，所述T1是大于或者等于1的正整数。可选地，T1个时间单元中的时间单元轮流出现。
实施例四：
在上述实施例二和实施例三中，同一时间单元中处于激活状态的N个BWP之间满足预定的条件，如图17所示，t1时刻处于激活状态的BWP集合是{BWP1，BWP2}，t2时刻处于激活状态的BWP集合是{BWP3，BWP4}，而且是t1时刻处于激活状态的BWP1和/或BWP2中的控制信道触发激活t2时段的BWP为{BWP3，BWP4}。当多个BWP对应多个TRP，这些TRP之间没有理想Backhaul的时候，需要考虑N个BWP的切换问题。
当图17中的BWP1对应TRP1，BWP2对应TRP2，而且TRP1和TRP2之间没有理想Backhaul，如果TRP1和TRP2都可以动态指示BWP切换指示信息，就会导致TRP1对应的BWP1中的动态控制信令触发的BWP和TRP2对应的BWP2的动态控制信令触发的BWP之间不能满足同一时间段处于激活状态的N个BWP之间需要满足的预定条件。为此可以有如下方案：
方案1：只允许N个BWP中一个BWP中的传输的DCI中有BWP动态切换指示信息，比如主BWP中的DCI中有BWP的动态切换指示信息，另一个BWP中不能有动态切换指示信息，一个BWP切换之后，另一个BWP也要切换。或者一个BWP切换之后，另一个BWP如果不满足约定条件就需要进行切换，或者去激活，(需要注意的是，“去激活”即表明所述BWP不处于激活状态)。从而即使一个CC中配置了多个BWP。本实施例中也需要在BWP的配置信息中指示此BWP中包括的控制信道是否包括BWP切换指示信息，即协议38.212中DCI 1_1或者DCI 0_1中的带宽部分指示信息(Bandwidth part indicator)指示域的比特数不仅根据CC中配置的BWP个数获取，也要根据DCI1_1或者DCI0_1所在的BWP中是否配置了BWP_Indicator_Present来确定。其中，BWP_Indicator_Present使能的时候，此BWP中传输的DCI1_1和/或DCI0_1的Bandwidth part indicator指示域的比特数根据CC中配置的BWP个数获取，当BWP_Indicator_Present不使能的时候，此BWP中传输的DCI1_1和/或DCI0_1的Bandwidth part indicator指示域的比特数为0，即使该BWP所在的CC中配置的BWP个数大于1。上述BWP_Indicator_Present信令也可以称为DCI中的BWP指示域是否可以根据CC中配置的带宽部分个数获取的使能域，BWP_Indicator_Present也可以称为其他名称。
比如BWP1中配置BWP_Indicator_Present使能，则BWP1中的DCI1_1和/或DCI0_1中的Bandwidth part indicator指示域的比特数可以大于0，从而可以指示BWP的动态切换。BWP2中配置BWP_Indicator_Present不使能，BWP2中的DCI1_1和/或DCI0_1中的Bandwidth part indicator指示域的比特数为0，即BWP2中的DCI1_1和/或DCI0_1不能指示BWP的动态切换。
上述DCI1_1和/或DCI0_1中的Bandwidth part indicator指示域值指示一个BWP。进一步地，BWP1中的DCI1_1和/或DCI0_1中指示BWP切换的时候，比如图17中所示，指示从{BWP1，BWP2}切换到{BWP3，BWP4}，DCI1_1和/或DCI0_1中的Bandwidth part indicator中的每个指示值可以对应一个或者多个BWP，高层信令要建立表1所示的对应关系。当DCI中Bandwidth part indicator指示的BWP集合和当前激活的BWP集合之间的差集为空时，不启动BWP切换动作，当DCI中Bandwidth part indicator指示的BWP集合和当前激活的BWP集合之间的差集非空时，启动BWP切换动作。表1中如果当前激活的BWP有2个，而DCI中指示的BWP激活为表1中的{BWP5}时，激活的BWP就可以从2个变为1个。BWP_Indicator_Present信令就应该称为DCI中的BWP指示域是否可以根据CC中配置的带宽部分集合的个数获取的使能域。使能时，Bandwidth part indicator指示域的比特数根据CC中配置的带宽部分集合个数获取，如表1所示，配置了{BWP1，BWP2}，{BWP3，BWP4}，{BWP5}，{BWP6，BWP7}4个BWP集合，从而Bandwidth part indicator指示域的比特数为4；不使能时，即使CC中配置了多个BWP集合，但是该BWP中的控制信令中Bandwidth part indicator指示域的比特数为0。表1中不同带宽部分集合中包括的带宽部分之间的交集为空，本实施例也不排除不同带宽部分集合包括的带宽部分之间的交集为非空。表1中一个带宽部分集合中只包括最多2个BWP，当然本实施例也不排除可以包括多于2个BWP的情况。当然本实施例中，一个BWP集合也可以为空集，当为空集时，表示当前激活的多个BWP进行去激活。
表1
Bandwidth part indicator值 激活的BWP
00 {BWP1，BWP2}
01 {BWP3，BWP4}
10 {BWP5}
11 {BWP6，BWP7}
上述是在BWP中配置BWP_Indicator_Present，当然也可以在CORESET中或者搜索空间中配置此值，当然也可以通过约定规则得到BWP_Indicator_Present是否使能，比如N个BWP中有主BWP和辅BWP，主BWP中BWP_Indicator_Present使能，辅BWP中BWP_Indicator_Present不使能。
类似地，如果如图13所示，不同TRP对应不同的CORESET组，则多个CORESET组中，只有一个CORESET组中的控制信息中的BWP_Indicator_Present使能，另一个CORESET组中的控制信息中的BWP_Indicator_Present不使能。即该CORESET组中的DCI中的BWP指示域的比特数为0，即使该CC中包括的候选BWP集合个数大于1个。
方案2：两个BWP/两个CORESET组都可以动态触发新的BWP，如果同一时刻处于激活状态的N个BWP不满足于实施例二或者实施例三中约定的条件，终端就去激活其中部分BWP，进一步地终端可以将此去激活的BWP信息告知基站，或者只将此去激活的动作告知基站。或者N个BWP不满足约束条件时，终端向基站之间请求去激活一个或者多个BWP。
实施例五：
在本实施例中，一个BWP是周期处于激活状态的，比如一个BWP在{slotn，slotn+T，slotn+2T，...，slotn+kT，....}上处于激活状态，在其他slot上处于非激活状态，其中，T为大于或者等于1的正整数。这在配置此BWP的控制信令中需要配置此BWP的周期以及周期偏置信息，如图18所示，BWP1周期处于激活状态，在两个周期之间处于非激活状态。
在本实施例的另一种实施方式中，一个BWP是半持续处于激活状态的，即可以通过控制信令激活此BWP处于周期激活状态，也可以通过控制信令去激活此BWP，使得此BWP处于非激活状态，类似于半持续参考信号。
当BWP可以是周期或者半持续时，就会出现一个CC中在某些时间单元中没有激活的BWP的情况，终端在这些时间单元上就可以不接收任何信号，达到降低终端功耗的目的。即使在这些BWP上有之前配置的信道和/或信号，终端也不接收任何信道和/或信号，起码不接收此CC中的任何信道和/或信号。
实施例六：
在本实施例中，同一时间段处于激活状态的N个BWP中，存在主BWP和辅BWP，其中，主BWP和辅BWP有如下特征中的至少之一的区别：
特征一：所述主带宽部分的控制信道调度的信号在所述辅带宽部分中。即主带宽部分的控制信息可以调度辅带宽部分的信道和/或信号，但是辅带宽部分的控制信息不能调度主带宽部分的信道和/或信号；或者辅带宽部分中不包括控制信道。和/或，本实施例中主带宽部分中包括公共控制信道，辅带宽部分中不包括公共控制信道。基于主带宽部分的公共控制信息得到的信息可以用于辅带宽部分。
特征二：所述主带宽部分处于激活状态的时间单元集合中时间单元之间的最小间隔小于或者等于预定值。所述主带宽部分所在的时间单元是连续的。
特征三：一个时间单元中至少存在一个主带宽部分。
特征四：除了两个主带宽部分的切换时间(即主带宽部分进行切换时存在的时间间隙)，一个时间单元中至少存在一个主带宽部分。
通过上面特征三和特征四的约束，使得主带宽部分不能是周期处于激活状态的，其中，一个周期中包括大于一个的时间单元，也即每个时间单元中至少存在一个主带宽部分，即每个时间单元中基站发送给终端的信号至少可以通过主带宽部分发送下来，否则一个时间单元中基站需要给终端发送信号，但是此时间单元中没有主带宽部分，控制信道无法发送，或者信号也没法发送，比如辅带宽部分是周期的，或者半持续的的情况。
特征五：辅带宽部分处于周期激活状态，其中，辅带宽部分的一个周期中包括一个或者多个时间单元。
特征六：辅带宽部分半持续处于激活状态，其中，辅带宽部分的一个周期中包括一个或者多个时间单元。
需要理解的是，辅带宽部分被激活时处于周期激活状态，从而具有周期。
特征七：终端根据预定规则或者接收的信令信息，确定辅带宽部分处于激活状态的周期和/或周期偏置。比如信令信息中通知辅带宽部分的周期以及周期偏置。
特征八：根据预定规则或者接收的信令信息确定N个带宽部分中主带宽部分和辅带宽部分。
比如信令信息中通知N个带宽部分中哪些是主带宽部分，哪些是辅带宽部分。优选地，N个带宽部分中只有一个主带宽部分，其他的都是辅带部分；或者根据带宽部分识别号(比如协议38.331中的bwp-Id)，确定N个带宽部分中 哪些是主带宽部分，哪些是辅带宽部分，比如最低bwp-Id对应的BWP为主带宽部分，其他的为辅带宽部分。
特征九：N个带宽部分属于的成员载波为一个成员载波组中的主成员载波时，N个带宽部分中存在主带宽部分。
N个带宽部分属于的成员载波为一个成员载波组中的辅成员载波时，N个带宽部分中都为辅带宽部分。
比如MCG中的PCell中必须有主带宽部分，MCG中的其他CC中可以没有主带宽部分，SCG中的PSCell中必须有主带宽部分，SCG中的其他CC中可以没有主带宽部分。
特征十：N个带宽部分属于的成员载波为激活成员载波时，N个带宽部分中存在主带宽部分。
N个带宽部分属于的成员载波为非激活成员载波时，N个带宽部分中都为辅带宽部分。
特征十一：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中携带主带宽部分的动态切换指示信息。
特征十二：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中携带辅带宽部分的动态切换指示信息。
特征十三：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分的个数获取。参考实施例七所示，即BWP_Indicator_Present在主带宽部分中是使能的。
特征十四：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分集合的个数获取。
特征十五：辅带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数为0。参考实施例七所示，即BWP_Indicator_Present在辅带宽部分中是不使能的。
实施例七：
在本实施例中，两个CC中包括的处于激活状态的BWP之间需要满足预定条件。如图19所示，CC1中处于激活状态的BWP为BWP1，CC2中处于激活状态的BWP为BWP2。其中，BWP1和BWP2之间需要满足约定的条件，和/或BWP1中包括的信道和/或信号和BWP2中包括的信道和/或信号之间的参数需要满足约定的条件。其中，所述约定的条件可以为实施例一和实施例二中的约束条件中的一种或多种。在图19中CC1和CC2占有的频域资源是重叠的，只 是它们的配置可以是每个CC按照协议38.331中的配置独立配置。本实施例也不排除存在关联关系的两个CC占有的频域有交集，不一定是完全重叠的。当然两个存在关联关系的CC也可以是占有的频域之间没有交集。如图20所示，两个CC分别对应两个TRP。
进一步地，两个CC中包括的处于激活状态的BWP之间需要满足约定条件，具体包括一个时间单元中两个CC中包括的处于激活状态的BWP之间需要满足约定条件。
进一步地，由于两个CC中处于激活状态的BWP之间需要满足约定条件，CC中的BWP之间的切换就不能是随意的，为此可以有如下方案：
方案1：两个存在关联关系的CC中，只有一个CC的控制信令中包括BWP切换指示信息。优选地，该BWP切换指示信息指示两个CC中的BWP切换情况，比如图19中只有CC1中的控制信令中包括BWP切换指示信息，指示CC1和CC2中的BWP动态切换指示信息，当BWP动态切换指示信息指示的是当前BWP时，对应CC中不启动BWP切换相关流程。此时CC2中依然可以包括控制信道。
方案2：两个CC中都可以包括BWP动态切换指示信息的控制信道。当两个CC中动态触发的BWP不满足约束条件时，终端将此信息告知基站，和/或终端放弃一个BWP中信道和/或信号的接收。
进一步地，由于两个CC之间有关联，如果两个CC位于两个不同的CC组，比如CC1位于MCG，CC2位于SCG，为此需要建立MCG中的CC和SCG中的CC之间的关联关系。存在关联关系的两个CC的配置参数需要满足约定条件，和/或存在关联关系的两个CC中的信道和/或信号的配置参数需要满足约定条件。优选地，存在关联关系的两个CC之间的频域资源有重叠，当然也不排除存在关联关系的两个CC之间的频域资源没有重叠，但是两个CC占有的空域资源有重叠。
比如两个CC的时隙结构指示有限定，CC1(对应TRP1)指示UE做上行传输的时域和/或频域上，CC2(对应TRP2)中不能指示UE做上行传输，和/或两个CC共享一个时隙结构指示域，其中，时隙结构指示信息包括DCI format 2_0中指示的时隙格式指示(Slot Format Indicator，SFI)，以及高层公共信息tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon，tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon2，专有信令tdd-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated通知的时隙结构，也包括高层配置的半持续信道，周期参考信号，半持续参考信号，DCI中通知的信道和/或信号。这些信令的具体意义，请参考协议38.331和38.213。即CC1中的信道和/或信号和CC2中的信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠时，这两类信道和/或信号的传输方向相同，比 如都是下行信号，或者都是上行信号，否则一个是上行一个是下行会导致比较强的干扰。
实施例八：
在本实施例中，如图21所示，一个终端UE和两个TRP保持连接，两个TRP之间没有理想Backhaul，两个TRP可以独立调度，通过增加空域维度提高吞吐率的同时，增加UE的鲁棒性。
比如两个TRP分别对应两个CORESET组或者两个BWP或者两个CC。优选地，两个BWP，和/或两个CC之间的频域有重叠，为此两个TRP调度的上行信号就有可能冲突。
比如TRP1调度了PUSCH1，TRP2调度了PUSCH2，PUSCH1和PUSCH2如果仅是时域资源，和/或频域资源有重叠，但是他们占有的解调参考信号是正交的，占有的空域资源，即空间发送滤波参数是不同的，而且终端能同时打出他们的发送波束，他们的发送功率的总也没有超过门限，从而认为PUSCH1和PUSCH2没有发生冲突。终端采用两个panel分别给两个TRP发送PUSCH1和PUSCH2。
如果PUSCH1和PUSCH2发生如下情况中的至少之一则认为他们之间有冲突：他们占有的解调参考信号集合中存在不正交的解调参考信号；占有的空间发送滤波参数相同的；或者占有的空间发送滤波参数终端不能同时打出；他们的发送功率的总和超过门限。
发生冲突之后有如下解决方案：
方案一：根据信令信息和/或约定规则，选择其中之一发送。
例如选择的PUSCH是优先级比较高的PUSCH。比如根据两个TRP的优先级，确定选择哪个PUSCH发送。其中，TRP的优先级，可以通过如下信息的优先级体现：CORESET组/BWP/CC。
比如PUSCHi是通过CORESETi组中的控制信息调度的，或者PUSCHi落在BWPi中，或者PUSCHi落在CCi中，i＝1，2。根据CORESET组1和CORESET组2的优先级，确定选择PUSCH1发送还是选择PUSCH2发送；或者根据BWP1和BWP2的优先级，确定选择PUSCH1发送还是选择PUSCH2发送；或者根据CC1和CC2的优先级，确定选择PUSCH1发送还是选择PUSCH2发送。
方案二：在两个PUSCH中存在重叠的部分，选择其中一个PUSCH发送。在两个PUSCH中不重叠的部分，还是两个PUSCH都发送。
比如PUSCH1占有解调参考信号端口{1，2，3}，PUSCH2占有解调参考信号端口{3，4，5}，他们占有相同的解调参考信号端口3。在此解调参考信号端口上只能发送一个信道，比如选择PUSCH1。则PUSCH1在解调参考信号端口{1，2，3}上发送，PUSCH2在端口{4，5}上发送。
类似地，比如PUSCH1占有{panel1中的波束1，panel2中的波束2}，PUSCH2占有{panel1中的波束3，panel3中的波束4}。由于一个panel一个时刻只能打出一个发送波束，所以如果panel有重叠，就发生冲突。具体地如果每个panel对应一个探测参考信号集合(SRS set)，每个波束对应一个探测参考信号资源(SRS resouce)，不同SRS set中的不同SRS resource能同时发送，相同SRS set中的resource不能同时发送，则PUSCH1的空间发送滤波参数对应{set1中的resource1，set2中的resource2}，PUSCH2的空间滤波参数对应{set1中的resource3，set3中的resource4}，它们因为对应相同set1，终端不能同时打出set1中的resouce 1和set1中的resource3，为此采用{set1中的resource1，set2中的resource2}发送PUSCH1，采用{set3中的resource3}发送PUSCH2。
进一步地，如果一个PUSCH由于和另一个PUSCH占有的资源存在部分重叠，要舍弃一部分解调参考信号或者舍弃一部分发送波束，则可以舍弃这个解调参考信号或者发送波束所在的TB(Transmission block，传输块)。比如PUSCH1占有解调参考信号端口{1，2，3，4}，PUSCH2占有解调参考信号端口{3，5，6}，由于端口3两个PUSCH发生碰撞，端口3上只传输PUSCH2，而PUSCH1的端口{1，2}为一个传输块(每个传输块可以独立进行信道解码)，{3，4}为另一个传输块，为此虽然仅在端口3上发生冲突，舍弃的时候是将端口{3，4}都舍弃。
如果TRP1调度的SRS1和TRP2调度的SRS2，如果SRS1和SRS2占有的端口不能正交，和/或两个SRS占有的空域资源之间有重叠，则表明这两个SRS出现冲突，可以采用上述两个PUSCH的处理方式进行处理，也可以采用如下方式：
如图33所示，SRS1和SRS2占有的时域资源有重叠，且SRS1和SRS2的空域资源相同，即使这两个SRS资源占有的端口可以正交(比如占有的频域不同，和/或占有的序列正交，其中，序列正交包括正交码(Orthogonal Cover Code，OCC)正交，或者占有相同Zadoff-chu(ZC)序列的不同循环移位)，它们也是冲突的。由于两个TRP都希望测量同一个发送波束，为此可以将SRS1和SRS2合并为一个测量参考信号SRS3(即所述第三类信号)。进一步地，SRS3的序列长度为SRS1和SRS2占有的频域资源中非交集的部分+交集部分的长度，如图34所示。还可以对于SRS3的时间提前量(time advance，TA)和功率信息进 行调整，使得两个TRP都能收到SRS3。比如SRS3的TA为SRS1和SRS2对应的TA中的最大值，功率为两者的功率最大值。当然SRS3的功率/TA信息也可以是基站通过信令信息和/或约定规则告知终端，使得终端知道当SRS1和SRS2发生冲突采用SRS3发送时，SRS3的功率/TA信息采用何值。
上述是以两类上行信道和/或信号冲突为例讲述的，本实施例的另一种实施方式中，一个TRP调度的多类信道和/或信号占有的资源有冲突时，采用丢弃其中之一的方法，比如当SRS/PUSCH占有的时域资源有重叠，则根据优先级丢弃其中一种，比如PUSCH和PUCCH占有的时域资源有冲突，则根据优先级丢弃其中一种。但是如果这两类信道和/或信号是发送给不同的TRP，而这两个TRP之间又没有理想Backhaul，则不应该采样这样的规则。比如发送给不同TRP的SRS和PUSCH的时域有重叠时，不视为是冲突的，可以同时分别发送给不同的TRP，发送给同一个TRP的SRS和PUSCH的时域有重叠时，视为是冲突的，按照约定规则调度其中之一。
上述是以上行信号的冲突为例，进行讲述，类似地，多类下行信道和/或信号的冲突问题也可以采用类似的方式处理。
TRP1调度了PDSCH1，TRP2调度了PDSCH2，PDSCH1和PDSCH2如果仅是时域资源，和/或频域资源有重叠，但是他们占有的解调参考信号是正交的，占有的空域资源，即空间发送滤波参数是不同的，而且终端能同时打出他们的接收波束，从而认为PDSCH1和PDSCH2没有发生冲突，终端采用两个panel分别接收两个TRP发送的PDSCH1和PDSCH2。
如果PDSCH1和PDSCH2发生如下情况中的至少之一则认为PDSCH1和PDSCH2之间有冲突：PDSCH1和PDSCH2占有的解调参考信号集合中存在不正交的解调参考信号，占有的空间发送滤波参数相同的，或者占有的空间接收滤波参数终端不能同时打出。为此就需要采用上述类似PUSCH1和PUSCH2的冲突解决方案，解决PDSCH1和PDSCH2之间的冲突问题。
其中，所述两类上行信道和/或信号占有的空域资源有重叠，表示这两类上行信道和/或信号的发送空间滤波器关联的参考信号是同一个参考信号，比如PUSCH1的发送空间滤波器关联SRS1，即PUSCH1的发送空间滤波器根据SRS1的发送空间滤波器获取。
所述两类上行信道和/或信号占有的空域资源有重叠，表示这两类上行信道和/或信号的发送空间滤波器关联的参考信号是同一个参考信号，比如PUSCH1的发送空间滤波器关联SRS1，即PUSCH1的发送空间滤波器根据SRS1的发送空间滤波器获取。
所述两类上行信道和/或信号占有的空域资源终端不能同时发送，包括所述两类信道和/或信号的发送空间滤波参数关联的两个参考信号属于的组信息不满足约定条件，比如两个参考信号属于相同的组但是是不同的SRS，则表明这两个参考信号的空间发送滤波参数不能同时发送，两个参考信号属于不同的组则表明这两类类信道和/或信号的空间滤波参数终端可以同时发送。
或者两个参考信号属于相同的组，则表明这两个参考信号的空间发送滤波参数能同时发送，两个参考信号属于不同的组则表明这两类信道和/或信号的空间滤波参数终端不能同时发送。
所述两类下行信道和/或信号占有的空域资源终端不能同时接收，包括所述两类信道和/或信号的接收空间滤波参数关联的两个参考信号属于的组信息不满足约定条件，比如两个参考信号属于相同的组但是是不同的下行信号，则表明这两个参考信号的空间接收滤波参数不能同时接收，两个参考信号属于不同的组则表明这两类信道和/或信号的空间滤波参数终端可以同时接收。
或者两个参考信号属于相同的组，则表明这两个参考信号的空间接收滤波参数能同时接收，两个参考信号属于不同的组则表明这两类信道和/或信号的空间滤波参数终端不能同时接收。
在本文中，所述两个空域资源有重叠包括如下至少之一：所述两个空域资源关联的参考信号相同；所述两个空域资源关联的参考信号所属的组信息不满足约定条件；所述两个空域资源关联的参考信号通信节点不能同时发送。
所述两个参考信号有重叠包括这两个参考信号不正交。
在本文中，不同类信道和/或信号，包括如下情况中的一种或多种：第一类信道与第二类信道，第一类信道与第二类信号，第一类信号与第二类信号，第一类信道和信号与第二类信道和信号，第一类信道与第二类信道和信号，其中，不同类信道和/或信号属于所述N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分；和/或，所述不同类信道和/或信号由所述D个控制信道资源组中Z个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度，和/或所述Z类信道包括如下信道类型至少之一：数据信道和控制信道，所述Z类信号包括如下信号类型至少之一：测量参考信号，解调参考信号，随机接入信号，同步信号，资源请求信号和相位跟踪信号。
所述信道包括如下信道中的一种或多种：控制信道，数据信道，广播信道。
所述信号包括如下信号至少之一：解调参考信号，相位跟踪参考信号，测量参考信号，同步信号和随机接入信号。
在本文中，所述两个信息之间有关联包括以下至少之一：根据一个信息可 以得到另一个信息，根据一个信息的配置可以得到另一个信息的配置范围，两个信息的某些组合值不能同时出现。
在本文中，所述资源包括如下资源至少之一：时域资源，频域资源，空域资源，序列资源，天线资源和端口资源。
当然也可以直接给上行信道和/或信号配置组信息标识，比如组信息标识为0则所述上行信道和/或信号是发送给TRP1的信道和/或信号，比如组信息标识为1则为所述上行信道和/或信号是发送给TRP2的信道和/或信号，关联不同组标识的信道和/或信号为不同类信道和/或信号。
实施例十：
本实施例中提供了一种信息传输方法，参见图22所示，包括：
S221：确定第一资源。
在本实施例中，可以根据获取到的第一控制信令来确定第一资源。需要说明的是，本实施例所提供的信息传输方法既可以应用到TRP(如基站)上，也可以应用于终端上。在应用于基站上时，第一控制信令可以是基站自己生成的。而在应用于终端上时，第一控制信令可以是基站发送给终端的。
在本实施例中，基站和/或终端上本身是具有资源的，基站和/或终端可以根据获取到的第一控制信令来在现有资源中确定出哪些资源来作为第一资源。例如终端中原有100个资源块，终端可以根据第一控制信令来确定出哪些资源块为第一资源。
S222：确定第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H。
需要说明的是，本实施例中资源组是指第一资源所划分的组，资源组由至少一个基本资源单元(如资源块)构成。例如，第一资源有编号1-20的20个资源块，那么可以将编号1-10的资源块分为一个资源组，将编号11-20的资源块分为一个资源组。
S223：根据H值在第一资源上传输信道和/或信号。
在本实施例中，资源包括时域资源和/或频域资源。
在本实施例中，H个资源组和信道和/或信号的H套配置信息对应。
在本实施例中，H个资源组满足以下特征中的至少一种：
特征1：H个资源组中的每个资源组对应K个准共址参考信号集合，资源组中的K组解调参考信号和资源组对应的K个所述准共址参考信号集合对应。
需要说明的是，其中，K为正整数，解调参考信号组中的解调参考信号和与其对应的准共址参考信号集合中的参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关系。
特征2：H个资源组中的每个资源组对应一个解调参考信号集合，资源组中的信道在所述解调参考信号集合上传输。
需要说明的是，其中，一个解调参考信号集合包括K1个解调参考信号组，K1为正整数。
特征3：H个资源组中的每个资源组对应一个信道，信道占有的频域资源属于资源组。
特征4：H个资源组对应H组正确应答(Acknowledgement，ACK)/不正确应答(Non-Acknowledgement，NACK)信息；其中，一组ACK/NACK信息中包括预定个数个比特数，和/或一组ACK/NACK信息中的信息联合反馈。
其中，一个解调参考信号组中的解调参考信号满足准共址关系，不同解调参考信号组中的解调参考信号不满足准共址关系。
在本实施例中，还包括获取第一控制信息和/或第二控制信息；以及根据第一控制信息和/或第二控制信息确定第一资源中所包括的H个资源组的划分信息和/或H个配置信息的步骤。其中，第一控制信息可以是在确定第一资源之前获取，而第二控制信息可以是在确定第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H之前获取。
在本实施例中，可以根据第一控制信息中指示的信息，和/或根据解码第一控制信息需要的参数信息，和/或根据第一控制信息中指示的配置信息中的一种或多种来确定H值。
例如，第一控制信息中可以直接携带分组信息，进而即可根据分组信息直接确定H值。
需要说明的是，在本实施例中，第一控制信息满足以下特征中的至少一种：
第一控制信息中包括H1个资源组信息。
第一控制信息中包括H3套配置信息。
第二控制信息满足以下特征中的至少一种：
第二控制信息中包括H2个资源组信息。
第二控制信息中包括H4套配置信息。
其中：所述H1、H2、H3、H4均为非负整数。
这里需要说明的是，第一控制信息和第二控制信息可以指示终端或TRP进行资源组的划分。这里的资源组信息即可指示资源组的划分。同时，由于H个资源组和信道和/或信号的H套配置信息对应，即一套配置信息对应一套资源组，因此根据配置信息也可以指示资源组的划分。
在本实施例中，配置信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
信道的准共址参考信号集合，信道的解调参考信号信息，信道的ACK/NACK信息，信道的个数信息以及信号的信息。
本公开实施例中通过确定第一资源；确定第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H；根据所述H值在所述第一资源上传输信道和/或信号；其中，所述H个资源组和所述信道和/或信号的H套配置信息对应；所述资源包括时域资源和/或频域资源。这样在各个TRP和/或终端都这样进行信息传输时，即可有效支持了波束机制下多个TRP给一个终端有效服务。
实施例十一：
在本实施例中，第一控制信令中通知第一资源，终端根据信令信息或者约定规则确定第一资源包括的资源组的个数H。第二控制信令中指示资源组的划分情况，和/或资源组对应的如下信息中的至少之一：准共址参考信号集合，解调参考信号集合，ACK/NACK信息，信道个数。
如图23所示，不同的频域组对应不同的TRP，即TRP1发送的下行数据在频域组1中传输，TRP2发送的下行数据在频域组2中传输。
为此第一控制信令中通知第一频域，比如第一频域是在一个BWP(比如此BWP中包括100个物理资源块(Physical Resource Block，PRB))中占有的PRB，第一频域包括PRB{3，4，6，10，11，25，45}，终端通过信令信息或者约定规则确定第一频域包括的频域组。如果确定为1个频域组，则没有第二控制信令，如果确定为2个频域组，第二控制信令中进一步通知第一频域包括的频域组的划分。如图24所示，第一频域组包括PRB{4，11，45，57}，第二频域组包括PRB{3，6，10，25}。在图24中两个频域组包括的PRB之间的没有交集，为此第二控制信令中可以只通知其中一个频域组占有的频域资源块，另一个频域组为第一频域和已经通知的一个频域组的差集。
本实施例的另一种实施方式中，第一频域组和第二频域组之间有交集。为此第二控制信令中可以通知每个频域组在第一频域中占有的PRB。特别是BWP中包括的PRB个数比较多的时候，可以通过第一控制信令中通知的第一频域得到两个TRP传输的数据占有的PRB的并集，然后再在第二控制信令中通知频域 组的划分。相比每个TRP传输的数据占有的PRB以其在BWP中的位置通知的方式，本实施例的方式可以节省开销，而且当多TRP和单TRP动态切换的时候，也可以降低终端盲检控制信道的复杂度。
确定频域组之后，就需要确定每个频域组对应的第二信息。其中，第二信息包括如下至少之一：准共址参考信号信息，解调参考信号信息，ACK/NACK信息，信道个数。每个频域组对应的第二信息中的一种或者多种可以在第一控制信令中通知，和/或频域组的划分也可以在第一控制信令中通知。然后终端根据这些信息得到频域组的个数H，从而可以确定是否有第二控制信令。第二控制信令中可以通知第一控制信令中没有通知的每个频域组对应的第二信息。
比如第一控制信令通知了两个准共址参考信号集合，终端就知道频域组个数H为2，如果第一控制信令中通知了一个准共址参考信号集合，终端就知道频域组个数H为1。其中，解调信号信息既可以是每个资源组对应的解调参考信号端口集合，也可以是每个资源组对应的解调参考信号的图样信息。即不同资源组中的pattern(式样)信息可以不同，比如不同资源组中解调参考信号类型(Demodulation Reference Signal type，DMRS type)1和DMRS type2信息可以不同。当然pattern还包括其他的时域，序列等信息。
进一步地，准共址参考信号集合的通知一种方式是：一个准共址参考信号集合和一个解调参考信号集合对应。所述解调参考信号集合中的解调参考信号满足准共址关系，所述解调参考信号集合中的解调参考信号和所述一个准共址参考信号集合中的一个参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关系。
比如表2所述，{DMRS1，DMRS2}和参考信号(Reference Signal，RS)1关于typeA中包括的准共址参数满足准共址关系，{DMRS1，DMRS2}和RS2关于typeD中包括的准共址参数满足准共址关系，其中，typeA和typeD包括的准共址参数可以参考协议38.214。上述方式中所述解调参考信号集合包括一个解调参考信号组。
当然另一种实施方式中，一个所述一个解调参考信号集合可以包括多于一个的解调参考信号组。如表3所示，其中，位于一个解调参考信号组中的解调参考信号满足准共址关系；不同解调参考信号组不满足准共址关系；一个DMRS集合中包括一个或者两个DMRS组，每个DMRS组对应一个准共址参考信号集合。所述DMRS组中的DMRS和DMRS对应的准共址参考信号集合中参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关系。
表2
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000012
表3
Figure PCTCN2019099861-appb-000013
本实施例中也可以是两个频域组共享第二信息中的一个或者多个信息，比如两个频域组对应的解调参考信号集合相同。
优选地，图23中给终端服务的两个TRP之间有理想Backhaul。
H值的确定方法采用如下一种或多种：
方法一：第一控制信息中指示的信息，比如显示指示H值。
方法二：解码第一控制信息需要的参数信息。所述解码所述第一控制信息需要的参数信息可以包括如下参数之一：第一控制信息的循环冗余校验(Cyclic Redundancy Check，CRC)信息，第一控制信息的解调参考信号信息。比如CRC为第一序列，则H为第一值，比如CRC为第二序列，则H为第二值。
比如所述第一控制信息的解调参考信号序列为第一序列，则H为第一值。所述第一控制信息的解调参考信号序列为第二序列，则H为第二值。其中，第一控制信息的解调参考信号表示第一控制信息所在的控制信道的解调参考信号。或者第一控制信息的解调参考信号的准共址参考信号属于第一组，则H为第一值；第一控制信息的解调参考信号的准共址参考信号信息属于第二组，则H为第二值。其中，准共址参考信号组的划分是预先协商好的。
方法三：第一控制信息中指示的信道的解调参考信号信息。如上述解调参考信号集合中包括的解调参考信号组的个数即为H值。
方法四：第一控制信息中指示的频域组划分信息。如上述频域组的个数即为H的值。
方法五：第一控制信息中指示的准共址参考信号集合信息。如上述准共址参考集合的个数即为H的值；
上述第一资源可以为频域资源。本实施例中，第一资源也可以是时域资源。此时确定第一时域资源包括的时域资源组的个数即为H。
上述方法中，H个资源组对应H套配置信息。其中，所述配置信息包括如下至少之一：解调参考信号集合，准共址参考信号集合，ACK/NACK信息，信道的个数信息，H个资源组中的H1个资源组信息在第一控制信令中通知，H2个资源组信息在第二控制信令中通知。和/或H3套配置信息在第一控制信令中通知，H4套配置信息在第二控制信令中通知。其中，H1，H2，H3，H4为非负整数，可选地H1+H2＝H，H3+H4＝H，H1＝H3，H2＝H4。
实施例十二：
本实施例中提供了一种监听方法，参见图25所示，包括：
S251：第一通信节点根据如下信息中的至少之一确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道：一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分，控制信道资源组，搜索空间组的集合，所述时间单元中的候选控制信道的准共址参考信号配置信息，所述时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案。
S252：在确定监听的候选控制信道上监听控制信息。
这里需要说明的是，在以下情况中的任意一种情况下，时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数冲突：
1、时间单元中多个控制信道的解调参考信号关于空间接收参数不满足准共址(Quasi Co-Location，QCL)关系时。
2、时间单元中时域存在重叠的多个控制信道的解调参考信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系。
3、时间单元中多个控制信道不能被所述第一通信节点同时接收。
4、时间单元中时域存在重叠的多个控制信道不能被第一通信节点同时接收。
在本实施例中，根据如下信息中的至少之一确定多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数冲突解决方案：
1、一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分。
2、控制信道资源组。
3、搜索空间组的集合。
在本实施例中，确定出的所述候选控制信道应当满足：
在一个时间单元中，第一通信节点监听的候选控制信道的解调参考信号和所述时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收参数冲突解决方案中选择的空间接收参数关联的参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关系。
和/或，
如果一个时间单元中存在至少一个候选控制信道的解调参考信号和时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收参数冲突解决方案中选择的空间接收参数关联的参考信号关于一类准共址参数不满足准共址关系时，第一通信节点不监听所述候选控制信道。
在本实施例中，候选控制信道满足如下特征中的至少一种：
特征11：多个控制信道资源组中的每个控制信道资源组中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道。
特征12：多个搜索空间组的集合中的每个搜索空间组的集合中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道。
特征13：一个成员载波中激活的多个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道。
在本实施例中，确定监听的候选控制信道满足如下特征中的至少一种：
特征21：一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个控制信道资源组中按照预定比例分配。
特征22：一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个搜索空间组的集合中按照预定比例分配。
特征23：一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在所一个成员载波中激活的多个带宽部分中按照预定比例分配。
特征24：根据时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个控制信道资源组中的分配情况。
特征25：根据时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案，确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个搜索空间组的集合中的分配情况。
特征26：根据时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案，确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在一个成员载波中激活的多个带宽部分中的分配情况。
在本实施例中，根据控制信道资源所在的频域带宽可以确定控制信道资源所属的控制信道资源组，其中频域带宽包括如下至少之一：成员载波和带宽部分。
在本实施例中，一个时间单元中的控制信道满足如下特征中的至少之一：
特征31：一个时间单元中的控制信道的个数大于预定控制信道个数阀值。
特征32：一个时间单元中的控制信道的个数大于或等于时间单元中确定监听的候选控制信道的个数。
本公开实施例中通过第一通信节点根据如下信息中的至少之一确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道：一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分，控制信道资源组，搜索空间组的集合，所述时间单元中的候选控制信道的准共址参考信号配置信息，所述时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案；进而在确定监听的所述候选控制信道上监听控制信息。从而保证了在波束机制下多个TRP给终端进行服务时，终端对控制信道的盲检有效性，有效支持了波束机制下多个TRP给一个终端有效服务。
实施例十三：
在本实施例中，终端(即第一通信节点)根据如下信息中的至少之一确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道：一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分，控制信道资源组，搜索空间组的集合，所述时间单元中的候选控制信道的准共址参考信号配置信息，所述时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案。
进而在确定监听的候选控制信道上监听控制信息。
进一步地，在如下情况至少之一，时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数冲突：
时间单元中多个候选控制信道的解调参考信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系，不满足QCL关系。
时间单元中时域存在重叠的多个候选控制信道的解调参考信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系；所述多个控制信道的解调参考信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系，包括所述多个控制信道的解调参考信号的关于空间接收滤波参数的准共址参考信号不满足QCL关系。不满足准共址关系表明多个控制信道在终端侧的接收波束不同，当终端在一个时间单元或者一个时域符号中只能打出一个接收波束时，需要确定这多个接收波束的取舍问题。
时间单元中多个候选控制信道不能被所述第一通信节点同时接收。
时间单元中时域存在重叠的多个候选控制信道不能被第一通信节点同时接收；所述多个候选控制信道不能被所述第一通信节点同时接收，包括所述多个候选控制信道的解调参考信号不能被所述第一通信节点同时接收，和/或所述多个候选控制信道的关于空间接收参数的准共址参考信号不能被所述第一通信节点接收。
进一步地，一个时间单元中第一通信节点监听的候选控制信道的解调参考信号和时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收参数冲突解决方案中选择的空间接收参数关联的参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关系；和/或，
如果一个时间单元中的一个候选控制信道的解调参考信号和时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收参数冲突解决方案中选择的空间接收参数关联的参考信号关于一类准共址参数不满足准共址关系时，第一通信节点不监听候选控制信道。
比如接收波束冲突时，采用部分接收波束，另一个接收波束对应的候选控制信道就舍弃；或者接收波束冲突时，采用部分接收波束，被舍弃的接收波束对应的候选控制信道的接收波束改为冲突解决方案中选择的接收波束。
进一步地，满足如下特征至少之一：
多个控制信道资源组中的每个控制信道资源组中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道。
多个搜索空间组的集合中的每个搜索空间组的集合中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道。
一个成员载波中激活的多个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道。
比如，图3和图13中的不同TRP对应不同的CORESET组/不同的搜索空间组/BWP，则候选控制信道波束冲突的时候，和/或控制信道的个数大于终端能力时，每个TRP都要预留部分候选控制信道，从而保证TRP都能和终端保持工作。
进一步地，
一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个控制信道资源组中按照预定比例分配。
一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个搜索空间组的集合中按照预定比例分配。
一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在所述一个成员载波中激活的多个带宽部分中按照预定比例分配。
比如图3和图13中的不同TRP对应不同的CORESET组/不同的搜索空间组/BWP，则候选控制信道波束冲突时和/或控制信道的个数大于终端能力时，TRP之间的候选控制信道的去留取决于上述预定比例。具体可以每个TRP都要预留部分候选控制信道，从而保证TRP都能和终端保持工作，也可以只保留到终端性能比较强的TRP和终端通信。
进一步地，根据控制信道资源所在的频域带宽确定控制信道资源所属的控制信道资源组。其中，频域带宽包括如下至少之一：成员载波和带宽部分。比如一个CC/BWP中包括的控制信道资源属于一个控制信道资源组。
一个时间单元中的控制信道的个数大于预定阀值。这里需要说明的是，一个时间单元中的控制信道即为根据配置信息得到的一个时间单元中的控制信道。比如根据配置信息slotn中包括8个控制信道，但是终端最多只能监听6个控制信道，为此需要舍弃2个，确定监听的候选控制信道为所述8个中的6个。
一个时间单元中的控制信道的个数大于或等于所述时间单元中所述确定监听的候选控制信道的个数，其中，一个时间单元中包括的控制信道为根据基站配置信息得到的一个时间单元中包括的控制信道。比如根据配置信息确定一个 时间单元中包括的控制信道为80个，但是终端能力受限，一个时间单元中终端能监听的候选控制信道的个数只有44个，则需要确定该时间单元中怎么从80个控制信道中选取44个控制信道。
进一步地，当一个时间单元中控制信道既有波束冲突又有个数超过预定值，则先确定波束冲突解决方案(即在多个准共址参考信号集合中选择部分准共址参考信号集合)。比如从4个接收波束中选择了2个接收波束，其余2个接收波束对应的控制信道都不监听。如果选择的接收波束对应控制信道个数不超过预定值，则选择的接收波束对应的控制信道确定为终端需要监听的控制信道，这些控制信道不再进行舍弃。当选择的接收波束对应的控制信道的个数超过预定值之后，就进一步按照上述控制信道资源组/搜索空间组/BWP信息选择要监听的控制信道。或者当控制信道的波束冲突的时候，先保证不同控制信道资源组/搜索空间组/BWP信息都有至少一个控制信道需要监听，再确定控制信道的波束冲突解决方案。比如每个TRP包括2个接收，总共有4个接收波束，而终端只能打出两个接收波束，则需要2个接收波束对应两个TRP，而不是对应一个TRP。当然也可以终端选择的2个接收波束只来自于一个TRP。
实施例十四：
在本实施例中提供了一种控制信道的监听方法，包括：
根据如下信息中的至少之一确定第一类控制信息格式的负载：所述第一类控制信息格式所在的时间单元，所述第一类控制信息格式关联的负载种数，M类控制信息格式对应的负载总种数，信令信息，所述第一类控制信息格式调度的信号所在的带宽部分，所述第一类控制信息格式调度的信号所在的成员载波。
在本实施例中，控制信息格式为DCI format。
进一步地，根据如下信息中的至少之一确定第一类控制信息格式关联的负载种数：
所述第一类控制信息格式中带宽部分指示域对应的比特数。
所述第一类控制信息格式中成员载波指示域对应的比特数。
所述第一类控制信息格式中带宽部分指示域对应的带宽部分集合中包括的带宽部分数。
所述第一类控制信息格式中成员载波指示域对应的成员载波集合中包括的成员载波数。
所述第一类控制信息格式中带宽部分指示域对应的带宽部分集合中包括的 每个带宽部分的参数配置。
在本实施例中，一个带宽部分的参数配置包括如下至少之一：所述带宽部分占有的资源的配置信息，所述带宽部分中的信号的参数配置。
所述第一类控制信息格式中成员载波指示域对应的成员载波集合中包括的每个成员载波的参数配置。
所述第一类控制信息格式所在的多个搜索空间所在的成员载波数。
所述第一类控制信息格式所在的多个搜索空间所在的带宽部分数。
所述第一类控制信道格式所在的多个控制信道资源中的一类参数的配置数。
所述第一类控制信道格式所在的多个搜索空间中的一类参数的配置数。
所述第一类控制信道格式对应的多种负载包括的比特数的差值。
进一步地，所述第一类控制信道信息格式在不同的时间单元中满足以下条件中的至少一种：
所述第一类控制信道信息格式在不同的时间单元中负载不同。
所述第一类控制信道信息格式在不同的时间单元中负载种数不同。
如图26所示，DCI1_1可以调度两个CC中的两个PDSCH。第一个DCI1_1调度PDSCH1，第二个DCI1_1调度PDSCH2。第一个DCI1_1中包括的信息需要以CC1中配置的参数去理解，第二个DCI1_1中包括的信息需要以CC1中配置的参数去理解。比如第一个DCI1_1中的频域资源通知域要以CC1中包括的BWP的频域资源去理解，第二个DCI1_1中的频域资源通知域要以CC2中包括的BWP的频域资源去理解。由于两个BWP包括的频域资源可能不同，从而DCI1_1中频域指示域需要的比特数就不同，从而一个slot中DCI1_1的负载种数就可以有2个。另一方面，DCI1_1所在的CORESET中的参数多样性越多，比如CORESET1中配置CORESET1包括的DCI中包括TCI指示域，CORESET2中配置CORESET2包括的DCI中不包括TCI指示域，如图27所示。就会使得一个slot汇总的DCI1_1的负载种数大于1。上述因素都会影响一个DCI1_1的负载种数，从而就会出现DCI1_1在不同时间单元中的负载种数/负载不同的情况。
在本实施例中，可以根据所述确定的负载监听所述控制信息格式。
进一步地，第一类控制信息格式的负载满足如下特征中的至少之一：
时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式关联的负载种数小于或者等于第一预定阀值时，所述时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式的负载种数大于或者等于 1。
时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式关联的负载种数大于第二预定阀值时，所述时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式的第一负载调整为第二负载。
在本实施例中，第一负载调整为第二负载，可以通过如下方式之一调整：第一负载通过补0的方式调整为第二负载，和/或第一负载通过截断的方式调整为第二负载。
时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式关联的负载种数大于第三预定阀值时，所述时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式的负载种数调整为预定值。
需要说明的是，所述调整为预定值，表示通过第一负载调整为第二负载的方式，将F1种负载调整为F2种负载，其中，F2为小于或者等于F1的整数。
时间单元中所述M类控制信息格式对应的负载总种数小于或者等于第四预定阀值时，所述时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式的负载种数大于或者等于1。
时间单元中所述M类控制信息格式对应的负载总种数大于第五预定阀值时，所述时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式的第三负载调整为第四负载。
需要说明的是，所述第三负载调整为第四负载，可以通过如下方式之一调整：第三负载通过补0的方式调整为第四负载，和/或第三负载通过截断的方式调整为第四负载。
时间单元中所述M类控制信息格式对应的负载总种数大于第六预定阀值时，所述时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式的负载种数调整为预定种数值。
其中，所述第一负载和第二负载为所述时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式的两种负载，所述第三负载和第四负载为所述时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式的两种负载。
比如一个slot中包括的DCI1_1的负载种数大于或者等于2时，就需要将该DCI1_1的负载调整成两种负载。具体的调整方式包括：
将大负载截断为小负载，或者将小负载补0补为大负载，从而降低终端的盲检负载度。但是一个slot中包括的DCI1_1的负载种数小于2时，DCI1_1的负载就不需要调整。
或者，一个slot中包括所有DCI类型(包括DCI1_1，DCI0_1，DCI1_0，DCI0_0)负载种数大于或者等于4时，就需要将DCI1_1调整成两种负载，从而降低终端的盲检负载度。但是一个slot中包括所有DCI类型的负载总种数小于4时，DCI1_1的负载就不需要调整，此时DCI1_1的负载种数就可以大于2， 比如一个slot中终端只需要监听DCI1_1，不需要监听其他的DCI format类型。
进一步地，所述一类控制信息格式的负载满足如下特征至少之一：
所述第一类控制信息格式关联的负载种数小于或者等于第七预定阀值时，所述第一类控制信息格式的负载种数大于或者等于1。
所述第一类控制信息格式关联的负载种数大于第八预定阀值时，所述第一类控制信息格式的第一负载调整为第二负载。
所述第一类控制信息格式关联的负载种数大于第九预定阀值时，所述第一类控制信息格式的负载种数调整为预定值。
所述M类控制信息格式对应的负载总种数小于或者等于第十预定阀值时，所述第一类控制信息格式的负载种数大于或者等于1。
所述M类控制信息格式对应的负载总种数大于第十一预定阀值时，所述第一类控制信息格式的第三负载调整为第四负载。
所述M类控制信息格式对应的负载总种数大于第十二预定阀值时，所述第一类控制信息格式的负载种数调整为预定值。
其中，所述第一负载和第二负载为所述时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式的两种负载，所述第三负载和第四负载为所述时间单元中所述第一类控制信息格式的两种负载。
其中，所述一类控制信息格式关联的负载种数为在一个带宽部分中该类控制信息格式所在的多个搜索空间对应的负载种数。
图26和图27中是以一个时间单元中DCI1_1的负载种数是否大于预定值，或者一个时间单元中包括的所有DCI format的负载种数是否大于预定值，确定一个时间单元中包括的一类DCI format的负载是否调整。本实施例的另一种实施方式中，以终端在一定时间段包括的多个时间单元中需要监听一类DCI format的负载种数是否大于预定值，或者所述多个时间单元中需要监听的M类DCI format的负载种数是否大于预定值，确定一类DCI format的负载是否调整。
进一步地，负载种数小于预定值，但是不同负载包括的比特数的差值的绝对值小于预定值。所述一类DCI format的负载种数也没必要有多种，就采用一种，因此此时对于DCI负载的节省很有限，还增加了终端盲检负载度。
进一步地，所述根据信令信息确定所述第一类控制信息格式的负载，其特征在于：
所述信令信息中包括所述第一类控制信息格式的负载的确定方式信息；和/或，
所述信令信息中包括指示信息，所述指示信息指示是否根据第一信息确定所述第一类控制信息格式的负载；其中，所述第一信息包括如下信息至少之一：所述第一类控制信息格式所在的时间单元，所述第一类控制信息格式关联的负载种数以及所述M类控制信息格式对应的负载总种数。
也即根据信令信息确定是否采用如上方式确定一类控制信息格式的负载，当通知根据第一信息确定负载时，就可以采用上述方法确定；当不根据第一信息确定负载时，就可以采用约定规则，比如一类控制信息格式在所有时间单元中都只有一种负载。
进一步地，所述M类控制信道格式满足如下特征之一：
所述M类控制信道格式是在一个时间单元中第一通信节点需要监听的M类控制信道格式。
所述M类控制信道格式是在一个时间单元的一个带宽部分中第一通信节点需要监听的M类控制信道格式。
所述M类控制信道格式是在带宽部分中第一通信节点需要监听的M类控制信道格式。
其中，所述第一通信节点是监听所述M类控制信道格式的通信节点。
进一步地，在所述时间单元中的一个带宽部分中，所述第一类控制信息格式的负载根据如下方式至少之一确定：
所述第一类控制信息格式所在的多个控制信道资源中的一类参数配置数大于预定参数配置数值时，所述第一类控制信息格式的第一负载调整为第二负载。其中，所述第一负载是根据第一控制信道资源中的所述一类参数的第一配置得到，第二负载是根据第二控制信道资源中的所述一类参数的第二配置得到。比如所有CORESET中都配置不包括TCI，则负载种数只有一种，如果部分配置包括TCI，部分配置不包括TCI时，则负载种树就可以有2种。
所述第一类控制信息格式调度的D个信号所在的频域带宽数为预定频域带宽数E时，所述不同带宽中信号的配置不同导致的所述第一类控制信息格式的负载种数大于预定值。比如调度的多个CC的配置虽然不同，但是多个CC的配置导致的负载相同时，负载数也没有随着CC个数的增加而增加。
实施例十五：
本实施例提供了一种信息传输装置。需要说明的是，本实施例中的信息传输装置可以应用于终端上，也可以应用于TRP上(如基站上)。参见图28，图 28为本实施例提供的一种信息传输装置28，包括：第一确定模块281和第一传输模块282。其中：
第一确定模块281，用于确定N个处于激活状态的带宽部分。
应当理解的是，在本实施例中，第一确定模块281可以在所有的BWP中选择符合预定要求的N个带宽进行激活从而确定出N个处于激活状态的BWP。或者终端和/或TRP约定处于激活状态的N个带宽部分需要满足约定要求。
第一传输模块282，用于在激活的N个带宽部分上传输信道和/或信号。
应当理解的是，本实施例中传输的信道实质指的是信道信号。例如所谓传输控制信道实质即为传输控制信道信号。
和/或，
第一确定模块281，用于确定D个控制信道资源组。
应当理解的是，在本实施例中，第一确定模块281可以在所有的控制信道资源组中选择符合预定要求的D个控制信道资源组。
第一传输模块282，用于在D个控制信道资源组中监听控制信息，根据监听到的控制信息传输信道和/或信号。
还应当理解的是，本实施例中所述的传输信道和/或信号包括：发送信道和/或信号，和/或接收信道和/或信号。
在本实施例中，N个带宽部分和/或D个控制信道资源组应当满足如下特征中的至少一种：
特征1：N个带宽部分满足第一类预定条件。
特征2：D个控制信道资源组满足第二类预定条件。
特征3：D个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息触发的N个带宽部分满足前述第一类预定条件。
特征4：D1类信道和/或信号满足第三类预定条件。
这里需要说明的是，D1类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号属于N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分；和/或，D1类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号由D个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度。
特别需要说明的是，在一个带宽部分中往往是存在一类信道和/或信号的，即D1类信道和/或信号往往是对应有D1个带宽部分。因此本实施例中D1可以小于等于N。
在本实施例中，信号包括如下信号中的一种或者多种：参考信号，同步信 号，信道信号等。信道包括如下信道中的一种或者多种：控制信道，数据信道，随机接入信道等。
在本实施例中，一个信号只属于一个带宽部分，在N个带宽部分中，不同的带宽部分中的信号不同。
在本实施例中，第一类预定条件包括以下条件中的至少一种：
条件11：N个带宽部分属于一个CC(component carrier，成员载波)。
条件12：N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分占有的频域资源之间有重叠。
需要说明的是，本实施例中的重叠可以是全部重叠，也可以是部分重叠。在全部重叠时，即两个带宽部分占有的频域资源之间的差集为空；在部分重叠时，即两个带宽部分占有的频域资源之间的差集非空。
条件13：N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分之间的频域间隔满足第四类预定条件。
在本实施例中，第四类预定条件包括以下条件131-134中的至少一种：
条件131：两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最高频域位置和高频域带宽部分的最低频域位置之间的间隔小于或等于第一预定阀值。
条件132：两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最低频域位置和高频域带宽部分的最高频域位置之间的间隔小于等或于第二预定阀值。
条件133：两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最高频域位置和高频域带宽部分的最低频域位置之间的间隔大于第三预定阀值。
条件134：两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最低频域位置和高频域带宽部分的最高频域位置之间的间隔大于第四预定阀值。
需要说明的是，上述第一预定阀值、第二预定阀值、第三预定阀值和第四预定阀值可以由工程师根据实际需要或大量实验分析后预先设定。其中，第一预定阀值可以小于第二预定阀值，第三预定阀值可以小于第四预定阀值；同时，第一预定阀值可以大于第三预定阀值，第二预定阀值可以大于第四预定阀值。
条件14：N个带宽部分的并集是预定的一个带宽部分的子集。
条件15：N个带宽部分的子载波间隔配置满足第五类预定条件。
在本实施例中，第五类预定条件可以是：N个带宽部分中的不同子载波间隔的个数小于或等于N1；所N1为小于或等于N的正整数。
例如N个带宽部分中，每个带宽部分中需要配置一个子载波间隔，此时N个带宽部分配置的不同子载波数应当小于或者等于N1。
条件16：N个带宽部分的循环前缀满足第六类预定条件。
在本实施例中，第六类预定条件可以是：N个带宽部分中的不同循环前缀类型的个数小或于等于N2；N2为小于或等于N的正整数。
例如N个带宽部分中，每个带宽部分中需要配置一个循环前缀类型，但是N个带宽部分配置的不同环前缀类型的个数应当小于或者等于N2。
条件17：N个带宽部分的时隙结构指示信息满足第七类预定条件。
在本实施例中，第七类预定条件可以包括以下条件171-173中的至少一种：
条件171：N个带宽部分服从同一个时隙结构指示信息。
需要说明的是，在本实施例中，时隙结构指示信息包括SFI以及高层公共信息tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon，tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon2，专有信令tdd-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated通知的时隙结构，这些信令的具体意义，可以参考协议38.331和38.213。
条件172：N个带宽部分中的一个带宽部分中下行传输域占有的资源和另一个带宽部分的上行传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。
这里需要说明的是，具体可以是：N个带宽部分中，一个带宽部分中下行传输域占有的资源和其余的(N-1)个带宽部分中的任意一个带宽部分的上行传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。或者，可以是：N个带宽部分中，一个带宽部分中下行传输域占有的资源和其余的(N-1)个带宽部分中的至少一个带宽部分的上行传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。
条件173：N个带宽部分中的一个带宽部分中预留域占有的资源和另一个带宽部分的信道和/或信号的传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。
这里需要说明的是，具体可以是：N个带宽部分中，一个带宽部分中预留域占有的资源和其余的(N-1)个带宽部分中的任意一个带宽部分的信道和/或信号的传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。或者，可以是：N个带宽部分中，一个带宽部分中预留域占有的资源和其余的(N-1)个带宽部分中的至少一个带宽部分的信道和/或信号的传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。
还需要说明的是，本实施例中所述的N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分可以是N个带宽部分中的任意两个带宽部分，也可以是N个带宽部分中的特定两个带宽部分。
在本实施例中，第二类预定条件包括以下条件中的至少一种：
条件21：D个控制信道资源组占有的资源之间交集为空。
条件22：D个控制信道资源组中的控制信息之间需要满足预设条件。
条件23：D个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息指示的相同时间单元处于激活状态的带宽部分指示信息需要满足预设约定条件。
在本实施例中，预设约定条件包括不同控制资源组中的控制信息指示的相同时间单元中处于激活状态的带宽部分是相同的。
条件24：D2个控制信道资源组中的控制信息中带宽部分指示域包括的比特数根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分个数确定。
条件25：D3个控制信道资源组中的控制信息中带宽部分指示域包括的比特数不根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分个数确定。
条件26：D4个控制信道资源组中包括预定格式的控制信息。
条件27：D5个控制信道资源组中不包括预定格式的控制信息。
条件28：D个控制信道资源组中不同控制信息资源组指示的时隙结构之间需要满足约定条件；
本实施例中，约定条件包括：一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息指示的下行传输域占有的资源和另一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息指示的上行传输域占有的资源之间交集为空；和/或，一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息指示的预留域占有的资源和另一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息指示的传输域占有的资源之间交集为空。
条件29：根据控制信道资源所在的频域带宽或者频域带宽组确定控制信道资源所在的控制信道资源组。
本实施例中，频域带宽包括成员载波，和/或带宽部分。
其中：所述D2、D3、D4、D5个控制信道资源组属于所述D个控制信道资源组；D2、D3、D4、D5为小于或者等于D的整数，和/或，D2与D3的和等于所述D值，和/或，D4与D5的和等于所述D值。
在本实施例中，第三类预定条件包括以下条件中的至少之一：
条件31：D1类信道和/或信号的参数配置之间存在关联关系。
条件32：D1类信道和/或信号的发送功率总和不能超过预定第一门限。
条件33：D1类信道和/或信号的接收功率总和不能超过预定第二门限。
条件34：D1类信道和/或信号的发送功率总和超过预定功率值时，根据信令信息和/或约定规则确定所述D1类信道和/或信号的功率优先级。
条件35：D1类信道和/或信号的发送功率总和超过预定功率值时，根据信令信息或者约定规则确定所述D1类信道和/或信号中的每一类信道和/或信号的 功率缩放权值。
条件36：D1类信道和/或信号对应的不同带宽部分之间的交集非空。
条件37：D1类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠。
条件38：D1类信道和/或信号中的两类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠时，两类信道和/或信号的传输方向相同。
需要说明的是，传输方向包括下行传输和上行传输(即接收和发送)。
应当理解的是，本实施例中所述的资源包括时域资源、频域资源、码域资源、空域资源和端口资源中的至少一种。
还应当理解的是，在D1类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号属于N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分时，第三类预定条件可以包括以下条件中的至少一种：
条件39：N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分中的控制信道占有的资源正交。
条件40：N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分中的参考信号集合占有的资源之间的交集为空。
需要说明的是，在以下情况中的至少一种情况下，D1类信道和/或信号满足第三类预定条件：
在D1个带宽部分之间的交集非空时，D1类信道和/或信号可以满足第三类预定条件。其中：D1个带宽部分中的每一个带宽部分包括D1类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号。
需要说明的是，在D1个带宽部分之间的交集为空时，D1类信道和/或信号可以不满足第三类预定条件。
还需要说明的是，由于不同带宽部分中的信道和/或信号类不同，因此D1个带宽部分即为D1类信道和/或信号对应的带宽部分。
在D1类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠时，D1类信道和/或信号可以满足第三类预定条件。
需要说明的是，在D1类信道和/或信号占有的资源没有重叠时，D1类信道和/或信号可以不满足第三类预定条件。
应当说明的是，本实施例中，两个信号的参数配置存在关联关系表现出如下至少一种特性：1、根据一个信号的参数配置可以得到另一个信号的参数配置；2、两个信号的某些参数组合不希望同时出现(例如第一信号的参数1配置为第一值的时候，第二信号的参数2不希望配置为第二值。其中参数1和参数2可 以是同一类型的参数，也可以是不同类型的参数)。
本实施例中，D1类信道和/或信号的参数配置之间存在关联关系时，关联关系包括以下关系中的至少一种：
关系1：根据D1类信道和/或信号中的某一类信道和/或信号的参数配置值得到另一类信道和/或信号的参数配置值范围。
需要说明的是，D1类信道和/或信号中的某一类信道和/或信号可以是D1类信道和/或信号中的任意一类信道和/或信号，也可以是D1类信道和/或信号中指定的某一类信道和/或信号。
关系2：D1类信道和/或信号中，不同类信道和/或信号中属于第一预定参数类型集合中的参数的配置相同。
关系3：D1类信道和/或信号中，不同类信道和/或信号中属于第二预定参数类型集合中的参数的配置值不同。
需要说明的是，第二预定参数类型集合包括空域参数。其中：一个信道和/或信号的空域参数通过一个参考信号表示；信道和/或信号的空间发送滤波参数和/或空间接收滤波参数根据参考信号的空间发送滤波参数和/或空间接收滤波参数获取。
关系4：D1类信道和/或信号中，不同类信道和/或信号中属于第三预定参数类型集合中的参数的约定组合值不能同时出现。
需要说明的是，在本实施例中，约定组合表示一个参数类型，当第一类信道和/或信号配置为A值，第二类信道和/或信号的配置值不能为B。其中，第一类信道和/或信号中对于该参数类型的配置与第二类信道和/或信号中对于该参数类型的配置构成一个组合配置。
不同类信道和/或信号关联的预编码资源组的划分对齐。
这里需要说明的是，上述对齐表示第一带宽部分中的一个预编码组包括第二带宽部分中的一个预编码组，和/或第二带宽部分中的一个预编码组包括第一带宽部分中的一个预编码组。
关系5：D1类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间的交集非空。
关系6：D1类信道和/或信号落在相同的时间单元中。
需要说明的是，本实施例中，第一预定参数类型集合包括如下至少之一：子载波间隔信息，循环移位长度信息，解调参考信号的时域信息，解调参考信号的序列信息，控制信道信号对应的时域配置信息，传输预编码是否使能信息，参考信号的加扰序列产生参数。
第二预定参数类型集合包括如下至少之一：信道和/或信号的空域参数，信道的加扰序列产生参数。
第三预定参数类型集合包括信道和/或信号的空域参数。
还需要说明的是，本实施例中的参数包括如下至少之一：
子载波间隔信息，循环移位长度信息，解调参考信号的时域信息，解调参考信号的序列信息，控制信道信号对应的时域配置信息，传输预编码是否使能信息。
即在参数包括如上中的至少之一时，参数配置之间才可能存在关联关系。
在本实施例中，N个带宽部分可以满足如下特征中的至少之一：
特征21：N个带宽部分中存在至少一个带宽部分处于周期性激活状态；周期性激活状态的周期大于或等于一个时间单元。
在本实施例中，所述周期性激活状态，即带宽部分按照设定周期，自动在满足周期间隔的时间单元中处于激活状态。例如有时间单元[1-10]，周期为2(即每个周期有两个时间单元)，在周期中第一个时间单元上激活，即带宽部分在时间单元1、3、5、7、9上激活，而在时间单元2、4、6、8、10上处于未激活。
特征22：N个带宽部分中存在至少一个带宽部分处于半持续激活状态。
这里需要说明的是，所述半持续激活状态是指带宽部分通过接收到的信令来控制该带宽部分处于激活状态还是非激活状态。还需要说明的是，在半持续激活状态中，带宽部分处于激活状态时，实质是自动处于周期性激活状态。
特征23：N个带宽部分中存在至少一个主带宽部分。
特征24：N个带宽部分中存在至少一个辅带宽部分。
值得注意的是，在本实施例中，在N个带宽部分满足存在有主带宽部分和/或辅带宽部分时，带宽部分应当满足如下特征中的至少一种：
特征31：主带宽部分的控制信道调度的信道和/或信号在辅带宽部分中。
特征32：主带宽部分处于激活状态的时间单元集合中，时间单元之间的最小间隔小于或者等于预定间隔值。
特征33：主带宽部分所在的时间单元是连续的。
特征34：一个时间单元中至少存在一个主带宽部分。
特征35：在主带宽部分进行切换时存在的时间间隙之外的时间单元中至少存在一个主带宽部分。
特征36：辅带宽部分周期处于激活状态；其中辅带宽部分的一个周期中包括一个或者多个时间单元。
特征37：主带宽部分中包括公共控制信道。
特征38：辅带宽部分中不包括公共控制信道。
特征39：辅带宽部分中只包括专有控制信道。
特征310：辅带宽部分处于半持续激活状态；其中，辅带宽部分激活后周期处于激活状态，辅带宽部分的一个周期中包括一个或者多个时间单元。
特征311：辅带宽部分中不包括控制信道。
特征312：辅带宽部分处于激活状态时的周期和/或周期偏置是根据预定规则或者接收的信令信息来确定的。
特征313：N个带宽部分中的主带宽部分和辅带宽部分是根据预定规则或者接收的信令信息来确定的。
例如，通过BWP的ID确定哪个是主带宽部分，哪个是辅带宽部分。比如ID最小的为主带宽部分，ID最大的辅带宽部分。
特征314：N个带宽部分所属的CC为一个CC组中的主CC时，N个带宽部分中存在主带宽部分。
需要说明的是，在本实施例中一个CC组中的主CC表示MCG中的PCell，和/或SCG中的SPCell。
特征315：N个带宽部分所属的CC为一个CC组中的辅CC时，N个带宽部分都为辅带宽部分。
例如，MCG中的PCell中必须有主带宽部分，MCG中的其他CC中可以没有主带宽部分；SCG中的PSCell中必须有主带宽部分，SCG中的其他CC中可以没有主带宽部分。
特征316：N个带宽部分所属的CC为激活CC时，所述N个带宽部分中存在主带宽部分。
特征317：N个带宽部分所属的CC为非激活CC时，所述N个带宽部分都为辅带宽部分。
特征318：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中携带主带宽部分的动态切换指示信息。
特征319：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中携带辅带宽部分的动态切换指示信息。
特征320：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据CC中配置的带宽部分的个数确定。
特征321：主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据CC中配置的带宽部分集合的个数确定。
特征322：辅带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数为0。
在本实施例中，N个带宽部分还可以是满足的如下特征中的至少之一：
特征41：N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分存在关联关系。
在本实施例中，第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分存在关联关系表示如下信息至少之一：1、根据其中一个带宽部分可以确定另一个带宽部分；2、一个带宽部分的激活信令也同时激活了另一个带宽部分；3、这两个带宽部分中某些参数组合不希望同时出现。
特征42：N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分属于第一带宽部分组。
特征43：N个带宽部分中的第二带宽部分属于第二带宽部分组。
特征44：N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分共享一套信道和/或信号的参数配置。
特征45：N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分上所承载的信道和/或信号的参数配置和第二带宽部分上所承载的信道和/或信号的参数配置之间满足预定配置条件。
特征46：第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分是一个信令信息触发的。
这里需要说明的是，本实施例中的第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分为N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分。其中，第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分可以为N个带宽部分中的任意两个带宽部分；第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分也可以为N个带宽部分中的特定的两个带宽部分。
在本实施例中，确定出的N个带宽部分还可以是满足以下特征中的至少一种特征：
特征51：N个带宽部分为在同一时间单元中处于激活状态的N个带宽部分。
特征52：N个带宽部分属于一个CC。
特征53：N个带宽部分中不同带宽部分处于激活状态的时间资源之间有交集。
特征54：N个带宽部分中，存在至少一个带宽部分的控制信道调度的信道和/或信号在另一个带宽部分中的情况。
特征55：N个带宽部分的信息传输方向相同，其中所述信息传输方向包括：下行传输方向，上行传输方向。
特征56：N大于预定值时，所述N个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分所对应的参数集合中的参数为固定值。
本实施例中，参数为固定值表示参数值不在DCI中动态通知。此外，参数集合中包括如下参数中的至少一种：解调参考信号的加扰序列参数；解调参考信号占有的一组连续的时域符号中包括的时域符号个数。
特征57：N个带宽部分中的一个带宽部分中的控制信令包括的信息域根据N的值确定。
例如，在N的值大于或等于预定值时，信令信息中不包括预定指示信息；在N的值小于预定值时，信令信息中包括预定指示信息。而预定指示信息即可以确定信息域。
特征58：N个带宽部分中M1个带宽部分中的物理层动态控制信息中可以携带带宽部分动态切换指示信息。
特征59：N个带宽部分中M2个带宽部分中的物理层动态控制信息中不能携带带宽部分动态切换指示信息。
特别需要注意的是，在本实施例中，M1和M2均为为小于或等于N的正整数，且M1与M2的和小于或等于N。
特别需要注意的是，在本实施例中，物理层控制信道指示的带宽部分索引对应的带宽部分属于N个带宽部分时，不启动带宽部分切换流程；物理层控制信道指示的带宽部分索引对应的带宽部分不属于所述N个带宽部分时，启动带宽部分切换流程。
此外，在本实施例所提供的信息传输装置应用于终端上时，由于终端可以接收到多个TRP发来的信息，因此终端盲检时可能存在候选控制信道的总个数超过终端盲检能力的情况。对此，本实施例中提供了候选控制信道的总个数超过终端盲检能力时信息传输装置可以进行的候选控制信道筛选方式。具体的：
方式一：在N个带宽部分包括的候选控制信道的总个数大于第一预定数值时，可以按照预定的规则和/或信令信息监听M个带宽部分中的候选控制信道。
需要说明的是，M为小于或者等于N的整数，M个带宽部分是N个带宽部分中的M个带宽部分。此外还需要说明的是，M个带宽部分中的候选控制信道的个应当数小于或等于第一预定数值。
此外，在本实施例中，N个带宽部分可以位于同一个时间单元中。
方式二：在D个控制信道资源组中包括的控制信道的总个数大于第二预定数值时，按照预定的规则和/或信令信息监听D4个控制信道资源组中的控制信道。
需要说明的是，D4个控制信道资源组是D个控制信道资源组中的D4个控制信道资源组。
在本实施例中，选出的M个带宽部分应当满足以下特征中的至少一种：
特征61：M个带宽部分是所N个带宽部分中的具有较高优先级的带宽部分。
特征62：M个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分中监听的候选控制信道个数小于或者等于该带宽部分中配置的候选信道个数。
特征63：M个带宽部分来自Q个带宽部分组。
需要说明的是，Q为小于或等于M的正整数，且N个带宽部分属于Q个带宽部分组中的带宽部分的集合。
特征64：需要监听的候选控制信道在M个带宽部分中按照预定比例分配。
在本实施例中，M个带宽部分满足M个带宽部分来自Q个带宽部分组时，包括：Q个带宽部分组的每个带宽部分组和M个带宽部分构成的集合之间的交集非空；和/或，M个带宽部分中至少存在一个带宽部分属于Q个带宽部分组的一个带宽部分组。
在本实施例中，还可以根据信令信息和/或约定规则确定如下至少之一：
1.可以确定N个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分对应的时间单元集合。
在本实施例中，带宽部分会在其对应的时间单元集合中处于激活状态。
2.可以确定T1个时间单元集合和T1个带宽部分集合之间的对应关系。
在本实施例中，T1个带宽部分集合中的每个带宽部分集合中存在至少一个带宽部分在该带宽部分集合对应的时间单元集合中处于激活状态；和/或，N个带宽部分属于N个带宽部分所在的时间单元对应的带宽部分集合中。
3.可以确定一个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分的个数获取。
在本实施例中，当带宽部分指示域不能根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分个数获取时，动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数为0；当带宽部分指示域能根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分个数获取时，动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分的个数获取。
4.可以确定一个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否根据 成员载波中配置的带宽部分集合的个数获取。
在本实施例中，当带宽部分指示域不能根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分集合个数获取时，动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数为0；当带宽部分指示域能根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分集合个数获取时，动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分集合的个数获取。
5.可以确定一个带宽部分中是否包括预定格式的动态控制信息。
在本实施例中，预定格式的动态控制信息可以包括DCI format 2_0。
6.可以确定一个控制信道资源组中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分的个数获取。
7.可以确定一个控制信道资源组中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否根据成员载波中配置的带宽部分集合的个数获取。
在本实施例中，信息传输方法还包括：确定一个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否需要根据CC中配置的带宽部分的个数得到；和/或，确定一个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否需要根据CC中配置的带宽部分集合的个数得到。
在本实施例中，确定出的N个带宽部分应当来自于X个CC(X为大于1的正整数)，和/或确定出的N个带宽部分应当来自于X1个CC组(X1为大于1的正整数)。进而可以根据N个带宽部分所在的CC确定N个带宽部分所在的带宽部分组。
此外，在本实施例中，确定出的D个控制信道资源组应当来自于Y个CC，和/或应当来自于Y1个CC组(Y和Y1为大于1的正整数)。
在本实施例中，各CC应当满足以下条件中的至少一种：
条件41：第一CC和第二CC的频域资源之间有重叠。
需要说明的是，第一CC和第二CC为X个CC中的两个CC；这两个CC可以是X个CC中的任意两个CC，也可以是X个CC中的特定两个CC。
条件42：第一CC组中的CC在第二CC组中存在至少一个关联的CC。
需要说明的是，第一CC组和第二CC组为X1个CC组中的两个CC组，这两个CC组可以是X1个CC组中的任意两个CC组，也可以是X1个CC中的特定两个CC组。X1小于等于X且大于等于2。
和/或，第一CC组和所述第二CC组为Y1个CC组中的两个CC组，这两个CC组可以是Y1个CC组中的任意两个CC组，也可以是Y1个CC中的特定两个CC组。Y1小于等于Y且大于等于2。
和/或，关联的两个CC的参数配置之间存在关联关系。
条件43：一个CC组中包括的带宽部分属于一个带宽部分组。
条件44：不同CC组中包括的带宽部分属于不同的带宽部分组。
条件45：一个CC中包括的带宽部分属于一个带宽部分组。
条件46：不同CC中包括的带宽部分属于不同的带宽部分组。
条件47：X个CC中的两个CC的参数配置存在关联关系。
需要说明的是，上述参数配置可以包括时隙结构指示信息。
条件48：Y个CC中的两个CC的参数配置存在关联关系。
需要说明的是，上述参数配置可以包括时隙结构指示信息。
在本实施例中，D个控制信道资源组对应D个参考信号集合，其中，D个控制信道资源组中的每个控制信道资源组对应一个参考信号集合。
在本实施例中，参考信号集合满足如下特征中的至少之一：
特征71：参考信号集合为用途为codebook的上行参考信号集合。
特征72：参考信号集合为用途为non codebook的上行参考信号集合。
特征73：参考信号集合为非周期参考信号集合。
特征74：参考信号集合之间的差集非空。
特征75：D个控制信道资源组中的一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度的解调参考信号的空间发送滤波参数关联的参考信号属于所述一个控制信道资源组对应的参考信号集合。
特征76：D个控制信道资源组中的一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度的解调参考信号的空间接收滤波参数关联的参考信号属于所述一个控制信道资源组对应的参考信号集合。
特征77：D个控制信道资源组中的一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度的参考信号属于所述一个控制信道资源组对应的参考信号集合。
此外，还需要说明的是，在实际应用中，可能存在传输的信道和/或信号间有冲突的情况。例如两个TRP分别对应两个CC，两个CC之间的频域有重叠，为此两个TRP调度的上行信号就有可能冲突。
在本实施例中，Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突时，可以根据信令信息和/或约定规则传输Z类信道和/或信号中的Z1类信道和/或信号；和/或，Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突时，可以根据信令信息和/或约定规则 传输第三类信道和/或信号。其中，第三类信道和/或信号是根据Z类信道和/或信号中的至少两类信道和/或信号的参数信息得到的，和/或所述第三类信道和/或信号和所述Z类信道和/或信号的交集为空。
这里需要说明的是，Z为大于或者等于2的正整数，Z1为小于或者等于Z的正整数。此外，所述Z类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号属于确定出的N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分(即Z类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号承载域确定出的N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分上)；和/或，所述Z类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号由确定出的D个控制信道资源组中的Z个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度；和/或所述Z类信道包括如下信道类型至少之一：数据信道、控制信道，所述Z类信号包括如下信号类型至少之一：测量参考信号、解调参考信号、随机接入信号、同步信号、资源请求信号、相位跟踪信号。
在本实施例中，冲突包括如下冲突中的至少一种：
冲突1：Z类信道和/或信号占有的时域资源之间有重叠。
冲突2：Z类信道和/或信号占有的频域资源之间有重叠。
冲突3：Z类信道包括的解调参考信号资源之间有重叠。
冲突4：Z类信号包括的参考信号资源之间有重叠。
冲突5：Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源之间有重叠。
冲突6：Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源在第一通信节点上不能同时传输。
冲突7：Z类信道和/或信号占有的天线资源之间有重叠。
冲突8：Z类信道和/或信号占有的天线资源在第一通信节点上不能同时传输。
冲突9：Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源对应的参考信号所属的组信息不满足约定条件。
特别需要注意的是，在本实施例的一种具体实施方式中，可认为出现冲突1-9中的任意一种时即认为Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突。但是在本实施例的另一种具体实施方式中，可以在Z类信道和/或信号占有的时域资源和/或频域资源有重叠，且Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源有重叠时，才认为Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突；和/或，可以在Z类信道和/或信号占有的时域资源和/或频域资源有重叠，且Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源第一通信节点不能同时传输时，才认为Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突； 和/或，可以在Z类信道和/或信号占有的时域资源和/或频域资源有重叠，且Z类信道和/或信号占有的天线资源有重叠时，才认为Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突。
这里特别需要说明的是，第一通信节点为传输所述Z1类信道和/或信号的通信节点。
例如Z类信道和/或信号为上行信号，Z类信道和/或信号的空域资源通过SRI指示，SRI指示的Z类信道和/或信号对应的至少Z个SRS测量参考信号资源属于相同的组，但是是不同的SRS，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号不能同时发送；属于不同的组，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号能同时发送。
在本实施例的另一示例中，也可以是：SRI对应的SRS测量参考信号资源属于相同的组，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号能同时发送，属于不同的组则表明这Z类信道和/或信号不能同时发送。
类似地，Z类信道和/或信号为下行信号，所述Z类信道和/或信号的空域资源通过TCI(transmission configuration indicator，传输配置指示器)指示，TCI中指示的Z类信道和/或信号对应的至少Z个下行参考信号或同步信号资源属于相同的组，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号不能同时接收；相反属于不同的组则表明这Z类信道和/或信号能同时接收。
在本实施例的另一示例中，也可以是：TCI对应的Z个下行参考信号/同步信号资源属于相同的组，则表明这Z类信道和/或信号能同时接收；属于不同的组则表明这Z类信道和/或信号不能同时接收。
在本实施例中，Z类信道和/或信号满足以下条件中的至少一种：
条件51：Z类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源通过参考信号表示，信道和/或信号的空间发送滤波参数和/或空间接收滤波参数根据参考信号的空间发送滤波参数和/或空间接收滤波参数获取。
需要说明的是，本实施例中，Z类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号可以是Z类信道和/或信号中的任意一类信道和/或信号，也可以是Z类信道和/或信号中特定的某一类信道和/或信号。
条件52：Z类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源通过参考信号表示，信道和/或信号和参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关系。
条件53：Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源在第一通信节点上不能同时传输，包括Z类信道和/或信号占有的多个空域资源关联的多个参考信号所属的组信息不满足约定条件，和/或所述包括Z类信道和/或信号占有的多个空域资源关联的多个参考信号是同一个参考信号。
在本实施例中，参考信号资源组中包括的参考信号资源可以是第二通信节点通过信令信息指示给第一通信节点的，和/或第一通信节点反馈给第二通信节点的。
条件54：Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源在第一通信节点不能同时传输，包括Z类信道和/或信号占有的多个空域资源关联的多个参考信号在第一通信节点不能同时传输。
在本实施例中，在存在冲突时，还会进行以下至少一种操作：
1.根据如下信息中的至少之一确定Z1类信道和/或信号：
Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的控制信道资源组的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组的优先级。
其中，Z1类信道和/或信号是Z类信道和/或信号中具有较高优先级的信道和/或信号。
2.根据Z1类信道和/或信号确定如下信息中的至少之一：
Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的控制信道资源组的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组的优先级；Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组的优先级。
3.根据如下信息中的至少之一确定Z1类信道和/或信号：
Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分是否相同；Z类信道和/或信号关联的控制信道资源组是否相同；Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组是否相同；Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组是否相同。
4.第一通信节点不传输Z类信道和/或信号和Z1类信道和/或信号的差集中包括的信道和/或信号。
5.调整Z1类信道和/或信号中的Z2类信道和/或信号中的属于第一预定参数集合中的参数信息，根据调整之后的参数信息发送Z1类信道和/或信号。
其中，Z2为小于或者等于Z1的非负整数。其中，第一预定参数集合中的参数信息包括如下信息至少之一：时间提前量信息，序列信息，天线信息，解调参考信号信息，传输码块数。
6.调整Z1类信道和/或信号中的Z2类信道和/或信号中的时间提前量信息，根据调整之后的功率参数发送所述Z1类信道和/或信号。其中，Z2为小于或者等于Z1的非负整数。
在本实施例中，在Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突时，还包括进 行以下至少一种操作：
1.Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突时，根据信令信息和/或约定规则传输所述Z类信道和/或信号中的Z1类信道和/或信号。
2.Z类测量参考信号占有的资源之间有冲突时，根据信令信息和/或约定规则传输所述第三类信道和/或信号。
本实施例中第三类信道和/或信号的参数信息是根据Z类信道和/或信号中的Z1类信道和/或信号中的至少两类信道和/或信号的配置信息得到的。其中参数信息包括如下信息中的至少之一：功率信息，时间提前量信息，序列信息，天线信息和端口信息。在本实施例中，第三类信道和/或信号的参数信息还可以根据信令信息或者约定规则得到。
在本实施例中，Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源有冲突包括：
Z类信道和/或信号关联的第一信息相同。
其中，第一信息包括如下至少之一：Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分、Z类信道和/或信号关联的控制信道资源组、Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组、Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组。
其中，Z类信道包括如下信道类型中的至少之一：数据信道和控制信道；Z类信号包括如下信号类型中的至少之一：测量参考信号、解调参考信号、随机接入信号、同步信号、资源请求信号和相位跟踪信号。
在本实施例中，Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源和/或参考信号有重叠时，Z类信道和/或信号关联的第一信息相同，Z类信道和/或信号发生冲突，且Z1小于所述Z值；和/或，Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠时，Z类信道和/或信号关联的第一信息不同，Z类信道和/或信号没有发生冲突，且Z1等于所述Z值。
需要说明的是，上述资源包括以下资源的至少一种：时域资源、频域资源和空域资源。
根据本公开实施例提供的信息传输装置，通过确定N个处于激活状态的带宽部分；在激活的N个带宽部分上传输信道和/或信号；和/或，确定D个控制信道资源组，在D个控制信道资源组中监听控制信息，根据监听到的控制信息传输信道和/或信号。在各个TRP和/或终端都进行信息传输时，即可有效支持波束机制下多个TRP给一个终端有效服务。
实施例十六：
本实施例提供了一种信息传输装置。需要说明的是，本实施例中的信息传输装置可以应用于终端上，也可以应用于TRP上(如基站上)。参见图29，图29为本实施例提供的一种信息传输装置29，包括：第二确定模块291和第二传输模块292。其中：
第二确定模块291，用于确定第一资源；以及确定第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H。
第二传输模块292，用于根据H值在第一资源上传输信道和/或信号。
其中，H个资源组和所述信道和/或信号的H套配置信息对应；资源包括时域资源和/或频域资源。
在本实施例中，第二确定模块291可以根据获取到的第一控制信令来确定第一资源。需要说明的是，本实施例所提供的信息传输装置既可以应用到TRP(如基站)上，也可以应用于终端上。在应用于基站上时，第一控制信令可以是基站自己生成的。而在应用于终端上时，第一控制信令可以是基站发送给终端的。
在本实施例中，基站和/或终端上本身是具有资源的，第二确定模块291可以根据获取到的第一控制信令来在现有资源中确定出哪些资源来作为第一资源。例如终端中原有100个资源块，第二确定模块291可以根据第一控制信令来确定出哪些资源块为第一资源。
需要说明的是，本实施例中资源组是指第一资源所划分的组，资源组由至少一个基本资源单元(如资源块)构成。例如，第一资源有编号1-20的20个资源块，那么可以将编号1-10的资源块分为一个资源组，将编号11-20的资源块分为一个资源组。
在本实施例中，H个资源组满足以下特征中的至少一种：
特征1：H个资源组中的每个资源组对应K个准共址参考信号集合，资源组中的K组解调参考信号和资源组对应的K个所述准共址参考信号集合对应。
需要说明的是，其中，K为正整数，解调参考信号组中的解调参考信号和与其对应的准共址参考信号集合中的参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关系。
特征2：H个资源组中的每个资源组对应一个解调参考信号集合，资源组中的信道在所述解调参考信号集合上传输。
需要说明的是，其中，一个解调参考信号集合包括K1个解调参考信号组，K1为正整数。
特征3：H个资源组中的每个资源组对应一个信道，信道占有的频域资源属于资源组。
特征4：H个资源组对应H组ACK/NACK信息；其中：一组ACK/NACK信息中包括预定个数个比特数，和/或一组ACK/NACK信息中的信息联合反馈。
其中，一个解调参考信号组中的解调参考信号满足准共址关系，不同解调参考信号组中的解调参考信号不满足准共址关系。
在本实施例中，第二确定模块291还可以获取第一控制信息和/或第二控制信息；以及根据第一控制信息和/或第二控制信息确定第一资源中所包括的H个资源组的划分信息和/或H个配置信息的步骤。其中，第一控制信息可以是在确定第一资源之前获取，而第二控制信息可以是在确定第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H之前获取。
在本实施例中，可以根据第一控制信息中指示的信息，和/或根据解码第一控制信息需要的参数信息，和/或根据第一控制信息中指示的配置信息中的一种或多种来确定H值。
例如，第一控制信息中可以直接携带分组信息，进而即可根据分组信息直接确定H值。
需要说明的是，在本实施例中，第一控制信息满足以下特征中的至少一种：
第一控制信息中包括H1个资源组信息。
第一控制信息中包括H3套配置信息。
第二控制信息满足以下特征中的至少一种：
第二控制信息中包括H2个资源组信息。
第二控制信息中包括H4套配置信息。
其中：H1、H2、H3、H4均为非负整数。
这里需要说明的是，第一控制信息和第二控制信息可以指示终端或TRP进行资源组的划分。这里的资源组信息即可指示资源组的划分。同时，由于H个资源组和信道和/或信号的H套配置信息对应，即一套配置信息对应一套资源组，因此根据配置信息也可以指示资源组的划分。
在本实施例中，配置信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
信道的准共址参考信号集合，信道的解调参考信号信息，信道的ACK/NACK信息，信道的个数信息以及信号的信息。
本公开实施例中通过确定第一资源；确定第一资源中所包括的资源组的个 数H；根据所述H值在所述第一资源上传输信道和/或信号；其中，所述H个资源组和所述信道和/或信号的H套配置信息对应；所述资源包括时域资源和/或频域资源。这样在各个TRP和/或终端都这样进行信息传输时，即可有效支持了波束机制下多个TRP给一个终端有效服务。
实施例十七：
本实施例提供了一种监听装置。需要说明的是，本实施例中的监听装置可以应用于终端上。参见图30，图30为本实施例提供的一种监听装置30，包括：候选控制信道确定模块301和控制信息监听模块302。其中：
候选控制信道确定模块301，用于根据如下信息中的至少之一确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道：一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分，控制信道资源组，搜索空间组的集合，所述时间单元中的候选控制信道的准共址参考信号配置信息，时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案。
控制信息监听模块302，用于在确定监听的候选控制信道上监听控制信息。
这里需要说明的是，在以下情况中的任意一种情况下，时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数冲突：
1、时间单元中多个控制信道的解调参考信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系时。
2、时间单元中时域存在重叠的多个控制信道的解调参考信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系。
3、时间单元中多个控制信道不能被所述第一通信节点同时接收。
4、时间单元中时域存在重叠的多个控制信道不能被第一通信节点同时接收。
在本实施例中，监听装置30根据如下信息中的至少之一确定多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数冲突解决方案：
1、一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分。
2、控制信道资源组。
3、搜索空间组的集合。
在本实施例中，确定出的候选控制信道应当满足：
在一个时间单元中，第一通信节点监听的候选控制信道的解调参考信号和 所述时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收参数冲突解决方案中选择的空间接收参数关联的参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关系。
和/或，
如果一个时间单元中存在至少一个候选控制信道的解调参考信号和时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收参数冲突解决方案中选择的空间接收参数关联的参考信号关于一类准共址参数不满足准共址关系时，第一通信节点不监听所述候选控制信道。
在本实施例中，候选控制信道满足如下特征中的至少一种：
特征11：多个控制信道资源组中的每个控制信道资源组中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道。
特征12：多个搜索空间组的集合中的每个搜索空间组的集合中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道。
特征13：一个成员载波中激活的多个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道。
在本实施例中，确定监听的候选控制信道满足如下特征中的至少一种：
特征21：一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个控制信道资源组中按照预定比例分配。
特征22：一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个搜索空间组的集合中按照预定比例分配。
特征23：一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在所一个成员载波中激活的多个带宽部分中按照预定比例分配。
特征24：根据时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个控制信道资源组中的分配情况。
特征25：根据时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案，确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个搜索空间组的集合中的分配情况。
特征26：根据时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案，确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在一个成员载波中激活的多个带宽部分中的分配情况。
在本实施例中，根据控制信道资源所在的频域带宽可以确定控制信道资源所属的控制信道资源组，其中频域带宽包括如下至少之一：成员载波和带宽部 分。
在本实施例中，一个时间单元中的控制信道满足如下特征中的至少之一：
特征31：一个时间单元中的控制信道的个数大于预定控制信道个数阀值。
特征32：一个时间单元中的控制信道的个数大于或等于时间单元中确定监听的候选控制信道的个数。
本公开实施例中，先根据如下信息中的至少之一确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道：一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分，控制信道资源组，搜索空间组的集合，所述时间单元中的候选控制信道的准共址参考信号配置信息，所述时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案；进而在确定监听的所述候选控制信道上监听控制信息。从而保证了在波束机制下多个TRP给终端进行服务时，终端对控制信道的盲检有效性，有效支持了波束机制下多个TRP给一个终端有效服务。
实施例十八：
本实施例提供了一种基站，参见图31所示，其包括第一处理器311、第一存储器312以及第一通信总线313。其中：
第一通信总线313用于实现第一处理器311和第一存储器312之间的连接通信。
第一处理器311用于执行第一存储器312中存储的一个或者多个第一程序，以实现如实施例一至实施例八任一项所述的信息传输方法。
和/或，第一处理器311用于执行第一存储器312中存储的一个或者多个第一程序，以实现如实施例十和/或实施例十一所述的信息传输方法。
本实施例提供了一种终端，参见图32所示，其包括第二处理器321、第二存储器322以及第二通信总线323。其中：
第二通信总线323用于实现第二处理器321和第二存储器322之间的连接通信。
第二处理器321用于执行第二存储器322中存储的一个或者多个第三程序，以实现如实施例一至实施例八任一项所述的信息传输方法。
或，第二处理器321用于执行第二存储器322中存储的一个或者多个第四程序，以实现如实施例十和/或实施例十一所述的信息传输方法。
或，第二处理器321用于执行第二存储器322中存储的一个或者多个第五 程序，以实现如实施例十二和/或实施例十三所述的信息传输方法。
本实施例还提供了一种存储介质，该存储介质包括在用于存储信息(诸如计算机可读指令、数据结构、计算机程序模块或其他数据)的任何方法或技术中实施的易失性或非易失性、可移除或不可移除的介质。存储介质包括但不限于RAM(Random Access Memory，随机存取存储器)，ROM(Read-Only Memory，只读存储器)，EEPROM(Electrically Erasable Programmable read only memory，带电可擦可编程只读存储器)、闪存或其他存储器技术、CD-ROM(Compact Disc Read-Only Memory，光盘只读存储器)，数字多功能盘(DVD)或其他光盘存储、磁盒、磁带、磁盘存储或其他磁存储装置、或者可以用于存储期望的信息并且可以被计算机访问的任何其他的介质。
本实施例提供的存储介质中存储有计算机可执行指令，该计算机可执行指令可被一个或者多个处理器执行，以实现实施例一至实施例八任一项所述的信息传输方法的步骤，和/或实现如实施例十和/或实施例十一所述的信息传输方法的步骤；和/或实现如实施例十二和/或实施例十三所述的信息传输方法的步骤。在此不再赘述。
可见，本领域的技术人员应该明白，上文中所公开方法中的全部或某些步骤、系统、装置中的功能模块/单元可以被实施为软件(可以用计算装置可执行的计算机程序代码来实现)、固件、硬件及其适当的组合。在硬件实施方式中，在以上描述中提及的功能模块/单元之间的划分不一定对应于物理组件的划分；例如，一个物理组件可以具有多个功能，或者一个功能或步骤可以由若干物理组件合作执行。某些物理组件或所有物理组件可以被实施为由处理器，如中央处理器、数字信号处理器或微处理器执行的软件，或者被实施为硬件，或者被实施为集成电路，如专用集成电路。
此外，本领域普通技术人员公知的是，通信介质通常包含计算机可读指令、数据结构、计算机程序模块或者诸如载波或其他传输机制之类的调制数据信号中的其他数据，并且可包括任何信息递送介质。所以，本申请不限制于任何特定的硬件和软件结合。
以上内容是结合具体的实施方式对本发明实施例所作的进一步详细说明，不能认定本申请的具体实施只局限于这些说明。对于本申请所属技术领域的普通技术人员来说，在不脱离本申请构思的前提下，还可以做出若干简单推演或替换，都应当视为属于本申请的保护范围。

Claims (55)

  1. 一种信息传输方法，包括：
    确定N个处于激活状态的带宽部分，在激活的所述N个带宽部分上传输信道和/或信号；
    和/或，
    确定D个控制信道资源组，在所述D个控制信道资源组中监听控制信息，根据监听到的控制信息传输信道和/或信号；
    其中，N和D均为正整数。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，满足如下特征中的至少一种：
    所述N个带宽部分满足第一类预定条件；
    所述D个控制信道资源组满足第二类预定条件；
    所述D个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息触发的N个带宽部分满足所述第一类预定条件；
    D1类信道和/或信号满足第三类预定条件，其中，所述D1类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号满足如下特征中的至少之一：所述不同类信道和/或信号属于所述N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分；所述不同类信道和/或信号由所述D个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度；所述不同类信道和/或信号属于不同的成员载波CC；所述不同类信道和/或信号关联不同的组信息标识；其中，D1为正整数。
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法，其中，所述第一类预定条件包括以下条件中的至少一种：
    所述N个带宽部分属于一个CC；
    所述N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分占有的频域资源之间有重叠；
    所述N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分之间的频域间隔满足第四类预定条件；
    所述N个带宽部分的并集是一个预定的带宽部分的子集；
    所述N个带宽部分的子载波间隔配置满足第五类预定条件；
    所述N个带宽部分的循环前缀满足第六类预定条件；
    所述N个带宽部分的时隙结构指示信息满足第七类预定条件。
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述第四类预定条件包括以下条件中的至少一种：
    所述两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最高频域位置和高频域带宽部分的最低频域位置之间的间隔小于或等于第一预定阀值；
    所述两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最低频域位置和高频域带宽部分的最高频域位置之间的间隔小于或等于第二预定阀值；
    所述两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最高频域位置和高频域带宽部分的最低频域位置之间的间隔大于第三预定阀值；
    所述两个带宽部分中，低频域带宽部分的最低频域位置和高频域带宽部分的最高频域位置之间的间隔大于第四预定阀值。
  5. 如权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述第五类预定条件包括：
    所述N个带宽部分中的不同子载波间隔的个数小于或等于N1；N1为小于或等于N的正整数。
  6. 如权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述第六类预定条件包括：
    所述N个带宽部分中的不同循环前缀类型的个数小于或等于N2；N2为小于或等于N的正整数。
  7. 如权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述第七类预定条件包括如下条件中的至少之一：
    所述N个带宽部分服从同一个时隙结构指示信息；
    所述N个带宽部分中的一个带宽部分的下行传输域占有的资源和所述N个带宽部分中的另一个带宽部分的上行传输域占有的资源之间的交集为空；
    所述N个带宽部分中的一个带宽部分的预留域占有的资源和所述N个带宽部分中的另一个带宽部分的信道和/或信号的传输域占有的资源之间的交集为空。
  8. 如权利要求2所述的方法，其中，所述第三类预定条件包括以下条件中的至少之一：
    所述D1类信道和/或信号的参数配置之间存在关联关系；
    所述D1类信道和/或信号的发送功率总和不超过预定第一门限；
    所述D1类信道和/或信号的接收功率总和不超过预定第二门限；
    在所述D1类信道和/或信号的发送功率总和超过预定功率值的情况下，确定所述D1类信道和/或信号的功率优先级；
    在述D1类信道和/或信号的发送功率总和超过预定功率值的情况下，确定所述D1类信道和/或信号中的每一类信道和/或信号的功率缩放权值；
    所述D1类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠；
    在所述D1类信道和/或信号中的两类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠的情况下，所述两类信道和/或信号的传输方向相同；
    在所述信号为同步信号的情况下，D1类同步信号占有的资源之间的交集为空。
  9. 如权利要求2所述的方法，其中，在所述D1类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号属于所述N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分的情况下，所述第三类预定条件包括以下条件中的至少一种：
    所述N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分中的控制信道占有的资源之间的交集为空；
    所述N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分中的参考信号集合占有的资源之间的交集为空。
  10. 如权利要求2所述的方法，其中，在以下情况中的至少一种情况下，所述D1类信道和/或信号满足所述第三类预定条件：
    在D1个带宽部分之间的交集非空的情况下，所述D1类信道和/或信号满足所述第三类预定条件，其中，所述D1个带宽部分中的每一个带宽部分包括所述D1类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号；
    在所述D1类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠的情况下，所述D1类信道和/或信号满足所述第三类预定条件。
  11. 如权利要求8所述的方法，其中，在所述D1类信道和/或信号的参数配置之间存在关联关系的情况下，所述关联关系包括以下至少一种：
    根据所述D1类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号的参数配置值得到所述D1类信道中的另一类信道和/或信号的参数配置值；
    根据所述D1类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号的参数配置值得到所述D1类信道中的另一类信道和/或信号的参数配置值范围；
    所述D1类信道和/或信号中，不同类信道和/或信号中属于第一预定参数类型集合中的参数的配置相同；
    所述D1类信道和/或信号中，不同类信道和/或信号中属于第二预定参数类型集合中的参数的配置值不同；
    所述D1类信道和/或信号中，不同类信道和/或信号中属于第三预定参数类型集合中的参数的约定组合值不能同时出现；
    所述D1类信道和/或信号中，不同类信道和/或信号关联的预编码资源组的划分对齐；
    所述D1类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间的交集非空；
    所述D1类信道和/或信号位于相同的时间单元中。
  12. 如权利要求11所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一预定参数类型集合包括如下至少之一：子载波间隔信息，循环移位长度信息，解调参考信号的时域信息，解调参考信号的序列信息，控制信道信号对应的时域配置信息，传输预编码是否使能信息，参考信号的序列产生参数；
    所述第二预定参数类型集合包括以下至少之一：信道和/或信号的空域参数，信道的加扰序列产生参数；
    所述第三预定参数类型集合包括信道和/或信号的空域参数。
  13. 如权利要求8所述的方法，其中，所述参数包括如下至少之一：
    子载波间隔信息，循环移位长度信息，解调参考信号的时域信息，解调参考信号的序列信息，控制信道信号对应的时域配置信息，传输预编码是否使能信息，同步信号，测量参考信号，时隙结构指示。
  14. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述N个带宽部分满足如下特征中的至少之一：
    所述N个带宽部分中存在至少一个带宽部分处于周期性激活状态，所述周期性激活状态的周期大于或等于一个时间单元；
    所述N个带宽部分中存在至少一个带宽部分处于半持续激活状态；
    所述N个带宽部分中存在至少一个主带宽部分；
    所述N个带宽部分中存在至少一个辅带宽部分。
  15. 如权利要求14所述的方法，其中，所述带宽部分还满足如下特征中的至少一种：
    所述主带宽部分的控制信道调度的信道和/或信号在所述辅带宽部分中；
    所述主带宽部分处于激活状态的时间单元集合中，所述时间单元集合中的时间单元之间的最小间隔小于或者等于预定间隔值；
    所述主带宽部分所在的时间单元是连续的；
    一个时间单元中至少存在一个主带宽部分；
    在所述主带宽部分进行切换的时间间隙之外的时间中至少存在一个主带宽部分；
    所述辅带宽部分周期处于激活状态，其中，所述辅带宽部分的一个周期中包括至少一个时间单元；
    所述主带宽部分中包括公共控制信道；
    所述辅带宽部分中不包括公共控制信道；
    所述辅带宽部分中只包括专有控制信道；
    所述辅带宽部分处于半持续激活状态，其中，所述辅带宽部分激活后周期处于激活状态，所述辅带宽部分的一个周期中包括至少一个时间单元；
    所述辅带宽部分中不包括控制信道；
    所述辅带宽部分处于激活状态时的周期和/或周期偏置是根据预定规则或者接收的信令信息来确定的；
    所述N个带宽部分中的主带宽部分和辅带宽部分是根据预定规则或者接收的信令信息来确定的；
    在所述N个带宽部分所属的CC为一个CC组中的主CC的情况下，所述N个带宽部分中存在所述主带宽部分；
    在所述N个带宽部分所属的CC为一个CC组中的辅CC的情况下，所述N个带宽部分都为所述辅带宽部分；
    在所述N个带宽部分所属的CC为激活CC的情况下，所述N个带宽部分中存在所述主带宽部分；
    在所述N个带宽部分所属的CC为非激活CC的情况下，所述N个带宽部分都为所述辅带宽部分；
    所述主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中携带所述主带宽部分的动态切换指示信息；
    所述主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中携带所述辅带宽部分的动态切换指示信息；
    所述主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据CC中配置的带宽部分的个数确定；
    所述主带宽部分中传输的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数根据CC中配置的带宽部分集合的个数确定；
    所述辅带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域的比特数为0。
  16. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述N个带宽部分满足如下特征中的至少之一：
    所述N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分存在关联关系；
    所述N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分属于第一带宽部分组；
    所述N个带宽部分中的第二带宽部分属于第二带宽部分组；
    所述N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分共享一套信道和/或信号的参数配置；
    所述N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分上所承载的信道和/或信号的参数配置和所述N个带宽部分中的第二带宽部分上所承载的信道和/或信号的参数配置之间满足预定配置条件；
    所述N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分由一个信令信息触发；
    所述N个带宽部分中的第一带宽部分和第二带宽部分为所述N个带宽部分中的两个带宽部分。
  17. 如权利要求1所述的方法，还包括：
    在所述N个带宽部分配置的候选控制信道的总个数大于第一预定数值的情况下，按照预定的规则和/或信令信息监听M个带宽部分中的候选控制信道，其中，所述M个带宽部分属于所述N个带宽部分，M为小于或者等于所述N的整数；
    和/或，
    在所述D个控制信道资源组中配置的候选控制信道的总个数大于第二预定数值的情况下，按照预定的规则和信令信息中的至少之一监听D4个控制信道资源组中的候选控制信道；其中，所述D4个控制信道资源组属于所述D个控制信道资源组。
  18. 如权利要求17所述的方法，其中，所述M个带宽部分满足以下特征中的至少一种：
    所述M个带宽部分是所述N个带宽部分中的具有较高优先级的带宽部分；
    所述M个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分中监听的候选控制信道个数小于或者等于所述每个带宽部分中配置的候选控制信道个数；
    所述M个带宽部分来自Q个带宽部分组，其中，所述Q为小于或等于所述M的正整数，所述N个带宽部分属于所述Q个带宽部分组中的带宽部分构成的集合；
    待监听的候选控制信道在所述M个带宽部分中按照预定比例分配。
  19. 如权利要求18所述的方法，其中，在所述M个带宽部分来自Q个带宽部分组的情况下，所述Q个带宽部分组的每个带宽部分组和所述M个带宽部分构成的集合之间的交集非空；和/或，所述M个带宽部分中至少存在一个带宽部分属于所述Q个带宽部分组中的一个带宽部分组。
  20. 如权利要求1-19任一项所述的方法，其中，所述N个带宽部分满足以下特征中的至少一种特征：
    所述N个带宽部分为在同一时间单元中处于激活状态的N个带宽部分；
    所述N个带宽部分属于一个CC；
    所述N个带宽部分中不同带宽部分处于激活状态的时间资源之间有交集；
    所述N个带宽部分中，存在至少一个带宽部分中的控制信道调度的信道和/或信号在另一个带宽部分中的情况；
    所述N个带宽部分的信息传输方向相同，其中，所述信息传输方向包括：下行传输方向和上行传输方向；
    在所述N大于预定值的情况下，所述N个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分所对应的第四预定参数类型集合中的参数为固定值；
    所述N个带宽部分中的一个带宽部分中的控制信令包括的信息域个数根据所述N值确定；
    所述N个带宽部分中的M1个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中携带带宽部分动态切换指示信息；
    所述N个带宽部分中的M2个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中不携带带宽部分动态切换指示信息；
    所述N个带宽部分中的M3个带宽部分中包括预定格式的动态控制信息；
    所述N个带宽部分中的M4个带宽部分中不包括预定格式的动态控制信息；
    其中，M1、M2、M3和M4为小于或等于N的非负整数；和/或，M1与M2的和等于N；和/或M3与M4的和等于所述N。
  21. 如权利要求1-19任一项所述的方法，还包括，根据信令信息和/或约定规则确定如下至少之一：
    所述N个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分对应的时间单元集合，其中，所述每个带宽部分在所述每个带宽部分对应的时间单元集合中处于激活状态；
    T1个时间单元集合和T1个带宽部分集合之间的对应关系，其中，T1个带 宽部分集合中的每个带宽部分集合存在至少一个带宽部分在所述每个带宽部分集合对应的时间单元集合中处于激活状态，和/或所述N个带宽部分属于所述N个带宽部分所在的时间单元对应的带宽部分集合中；
    一个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否根据CC中配置的带宽部分的个数获取；
    一个带宽部分中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否根据CC中配置的带宽部分集合的个数获取；
    一个带宽部分中是否包括预定格式的动态控制信息；
    一个控制信道资源组中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否根据CC中配置的带宽部分的个数获取；
    一个控制信道资源组中的动态控制信息中的带宽部分指示域是否根据CC中配置的带宽部分集合的个数获取；
    一个控制信道资源组中是否包括预定格式的动态控制信息。
  22. 根据权利要求1-19任一项所述的方法，其中，所述N个带宽部分满足以下条件中的至少一种：
    所述N个带宽部分来自于X个CC；
    所述N个带宽部分来自于X1个CC组；
    其中，X和X1均为大于或等于1的正整数；
    和/或，
    所述D个控制信道资源组满足以下条件中的至少一种：
    所述D个控制信道资源组来自于Y个CC；
    所述D个控制信道资源组来自于Y1个CC组；
    其中，Y和Y1为大于或等于1的正整数。
  23. 根据权利要求22中所述的方法，其中，所述CC满足以下条件中的至少一种：
    第一CC和第二CC的频域资源之间有重叠，其中，所述第一CC和第二CC为所述X个CC中的两个CC；
    第一CC组中的CC在第二CC组中存在一个关联的CC；其中，所述第一CC组和所述第二CC组为所述X1个CC组中的两个CC组，和/或所述第一CC组和所述第二CC组为所述Y1个CC组中的两个CC组，和/或所述关联的两个 CC的参数配置之间存在关联关系；
    所述X个CC中的两个CC的参数配置存在关联关系；
    所述Y个CC中的两个CC的参数配置存在关联关系；
    一个CC组中包括的带宽部分属于一个带宽部分组；
    不同CC组中包括的带宽部分属于不同的带宽部分组；
    一个CC中包括的带宽部分属于一个带宽部分组；
    不同CC中包括的带宽部分属于不同的带宽部分组。
  24. 根据权利要求1-19任一项所述的方法，还包括：确定G个CC，所述G个CC满足如下特征中的至少之一：
    所述G个CC包括的频域资源之间有重叠；
    所述G个CC的参数配置之间满足第八类约定条件；
    所述G个CC中的信道和/或信号的参数配置之间有关联；
    其中，G为大于或者等于2的正整数。
  25. 根据权利要求1-19任一项所述的方法，其中，
    所述D个控制信道资源组对应D个参考信号集合，其中，所述D个控制信道资源组中的每个控制信道资源组对应一个参考信号集合。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其中，所述参考信号集合满足如下特征中的至少之一：
    所述参考信号集合为用途为代码本codebook的上行参考信号集合；
    所述参考信号集合为用途为非代码本non codebook的上行参考信号集合；
    所述参考信号集合为非周期参考信号集合；
    所述参考信号集合之间的差集非空；
    在所述D个控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度的D个信道占有的资源有交集的情况下，所述D个信道对应的解调参考信号集合占有的资源之间的交集为空；
    所述D个控制信道资源组中的一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度的解调参考信号的空间发送滤波参数关联的参考信号属于所述一个控制信道资源组对应的参考信号集合；
    所述D个控制信道资源组中的一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度的解调参考信号的空间接收滤波参数关联的参考信号属于所述一个控制信道资源组 对应的参考信号集合；
    所述D个控制信道资源组中的一个控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度的参考信号属于所述一个控制信道资源组对应的参考信号集合。
  27. 如权利要求1-19任一项所述的方法，其中，所述D个控制信道资源组满足的第二类预定条件包括以下条件中的至少一种：
    所述D个控制信道资源组占有的资源之间的交集为空；
    所述D个控制信道资源组中的控制信息之间满足预设条件；
    所述D个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息指示的相同时间单元中处于激活状态的带宽部分指示信息满足预设约定条件；
    D2个控制信道资源组中的控制信息中带宽部分指示域包括的比特数根据CC中配置的带宽部分个数确定；
    D3个控制信道资源组中的控制信息中带宽部分指示域包括的比特数不根据CC中配置的带宽部分个数确定；
    D4个控制信道资源组中包括预定格式的控制信息；
    D5个控制信道资源组中不包括预定格式的控制信息；
    D6个控制信道资源组中的控制信息中包括带宽部分指示信息；
    D7个控制信道资源组中的控制信息中不包括带宽部分指示信息；
    D个控制信道资源组中不同控制信息资源组指示的时隙结构之间满足约定条件；
    根据控制信道资源所在的频域带宽或者频域带宽组确定所述控制信道资源所在的控制信道资源组；
    其中，所述D2个控制信道资源组、所述D3个控制信道资源组、所述D4个控制信道资源组、所述D5个控制信道资源组、所述D6个控制信道资源组和所述D7个控制信道资源组属于所述D个控制信道资源组；D2、D3、D4、D5和D6为小于或者等于D的整数，D7为小于D的整数，和/或，D2与D3的和等于D，和/或，D4与D5的和等于D，和/或D6与D7的和等于D。
  28. 如权利要求1-19任一项所述的方法，还包括：
    在Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突的情况下，根据信令信息和/或约定规则传输所述Z类信道和/或信号中的Z1类信道和/或信号；
    和/或，
    在Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突的情况下，根据信令信息和/或约定规则传输第三类信道和/或信号；其中，所述第三类信道和/或信号是根据所述Z类信道和/或信号中的至少两类信道和/或信号的参数信息得到，和/或所述第三类信道和/或信号和所述Z类信道和/或信号的交集为空；
    其中，Z为大于或者等于2的正整数，Z1为小于或者等于Z的非负整数；所述Z类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号属于所述N个带宽部分中的不同带宽部分；和/或，所述Z类信道和/或信号中不同类信道和/或信号由所述D个控制信道资源组中Z个控制信道资源组中的不同控制信道资源组中的控制信息调度；和/或所述Z类信道包括如下信道类型中的至少之一：数据信道、控制信道，所述Z类信号包括如下信号类型中的至少之一：测量参考信号、解调参考信号、随机接入信号、同步信号、资源请求信号、相位跟踪信号；和/或所述Z类信道和/或信号中的不同类信道和/或信号关联不同的组信息标识。
  29. 如权利要求28所述的方法，其中，所述冲突包括如下冲突中的至少一种：
    所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的时域资源之间有重叠；
    所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的频域资源之间有重叠；
    所述Z类信道包括的解调参考信号资源之间有重叠；
    所述Z类信号包括的参考信号资源之间有重叠；
    所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源之间有重叠；
    所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源在第一通信节点上不能同时传输；
    所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的天线资源之间有重叠；
    所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的天线资源在第一通信节点上不能同时传输；
    所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源对应的参考信号所属的组信息不满足约定条件；
    其中，所述第一通信节点为传输所述Z1类信道和/或信号的通信节点。
  30. 如权利要求29所述的方法，其中，所述信道和/或信号满足以下条件中的至少一种：
    所述Z类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源通过参考信号表示，所述信道和/或信号的空间发送滤波参数和/或空间接收滤波参数根据所述参考信号的空间发送滤波参数和/或空间接收滤波参数获取；
    所述Z类信道和/或信号中的一类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源通过参考信号表示，所述信道和/或信号和所述参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关 系；
    所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源在第一通信节点上不能同时传输，包括：所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的多个空域资源关联的多个参考信号所属的组信息不满足约定条件，和/或所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的多个空域资源关联的多个参考信号是同一个参考信号；
    所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的空域资源在第一通信节点上不能同时传输，包括：所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的多个空域资源关联的多个参考信号在所述第一通信节点上不能同时传输。
  31. 如权利要求28所述的方法，还包括执行以下至少一种操作：
    根据如下信息中的至少之一确定所述Z1类信道和/或信号：所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分的优先级；所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的控制信道资源组的优先级；所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组的优先级；所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组的优先级，其中，所述Z1类信道和/或信号是所述Z类信道和/或信号中具有较高优先级的信道和/或信号；
    根据所述Z1类信道和/或信号确定如下信息中的至少之一：所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分的优先级；所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的控制信道资源组的优先级；所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组的优先级；所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组的优先级；
    根据如下信息中的至少之一确定所述Z1类信道和/或信号：所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分是否相同；所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的控制信道资源组是否相同；所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组是否相同；所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组是否相同；所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的组信息标识是否相同；
    第一通信节点不传输所述Z类信道和/或信号和所述Z1类信道和/或信号的差集中包括的信道和/或信号；
    调整所述Z1类信道和/或信号中的Z2类信道和/或信号中的属于第一预定参数集合中的参数信息，根据调整之后的参数信息发送所述Z1类信道和/或信号，Z2为小于或者等于Z1的非负整数；其中，所述第一预定参数集合中的参数信息包括如下信息中的至少之一：时间提前量信息，序列信息，天线信息，解调参考信号信息，传输码块数。
  32. 如权利要求28所述的方法，在所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突的情况下，还包括执行以下至少一种操作：
    在所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源之间有冲突的情况下，根据信令信息 和/或约定规则传输所述Z类信道和/或信号中的Z1类信道和/或信号；
    在Z类测量参考信号占有的资源之间有冲突的情况下，根据信令信息和/或约定规则传输所述第三类信道和/或信号；
    所述第三类信道和/或信号的参数信息是根据所述Z类信道和/或信号中至少两类信道和/或信号的配置信息得到的，其中，所述参数信息包括如下信息中的至少之一：功率信息，时间提前量信息，序列信息，天线信息，端口信息；
    所述第三类信道和/或信号的参数信息根据信令信息或者约定规则得到。
  33. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其中，所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源有冲突包括：
    所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的第一信息相同，其中，所述第一信息包括如下至少之一：所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的带宽部分、所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的控制信道资源组、所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的频域带宽组、所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的CC或CC组、所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的组信息标识；
    其中，所述Z类信道包括如下信道类型中的至少之一：数据信道、控制信道，所述Z类信号包括如下信号类型中的至少之一：测量参考信号、解调参考信号、随机接入信号、同步信号、资源请求信号、相位跟踪信号。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的方法，满足如下特征中的至少一种：
    在所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源和/或参考信号有重叠的情况下，所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的第一信息相同，所述Z类信道和/或信号发生冲突，且Z1小于Z；
    在所述Z类信道和/或信号占有的资源有重叠的情况下，所述Z类信道和/或信号关联的第一信息不同，所述Z类信道和/或信号没有发生冲突，且Z1等于Z；
    其中，所述资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：时域资源、频域资源、空域资源。
  35. 一种信息传输方法，包括：
    确定第一资源；
    确定所述第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H；
    根据所述H在所述第一资源上传输信道和/或信号；
    其中，所述H个资源组和所述信道和/或信号的H套配置信息对应；所述资源包括时域资源和/或频域资源。
  36. 如权利要求35所述的方法，其中，所述H个资源组满足以下特征中的至少一种：
    所述H个资源组中的每个资源组对应K个准共址参考信号集合，所述每个资源组中的K个解调参考信号组和所述每个资源组对应的K个准共址参考信号集合对应；其中，K为正整数，所述K个解调参考信号组中的每个解调参考信号组的解调参考信号和与所述每个解调参考信号组对应的准共址参考信号集合中的参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关系；
    所述H个资源组中的每个资源组对应一个解调参考信号集合，所述每个资源组中的信道在所述一个解调参考信号集合上传输；其中，所述一个解调参考信号集合包括K1个解调参考信号组，所述K1为正整数；
    所述H个资源组中的每个资源组对应一个信道，所述一个信道占有的频域资源属于所述每个资源组；
    所述H个资源组对应H组正确应答ACK/不正确应答NACK信息；其中,一组ACK/NACK信息中包括预定个数个比特数，和/或一组ACK/NACK信息中的信息联合反馈；
    所述H个资源组占有的资源之间的交集为空；
    其中，所述一个解调参考信号组中的解调参考信号满足准共址关系，不同解调参考信号组中的解调参考信号不满足准共址关系。
  37. 如权利要求35所述的方法，还包括：
    获取第一控制信息和/或第二控制信息；
    根据所述第一控制信息和/或第二控制信息确定所述第一资源中所包括的H个资源组的划分信息和/或所述信道和/或信号的H套配置信息。
  38. 如权利要求37所述的方法，其中，所述确定所述第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H包括：根据如下信息中的至少之一确定所述第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H：
    所述第一控制信息中指示的信息；
    解码所述第一控制信息需要的参数信息；
    所述第一控制信息中指示的配置信息中的至少一种。
  39. 如权利要求37所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一控制信息满足以下特征中的至少一种：
    所述第一控制信息中包括H1个资源组信息；
    所述第一控制信息中包括H3套配置信息；
    所述第二控制信息满足以下特征中的至少一种：
    所述第二控制信息中包括H2个资源组信息；
    所述第二控制信息中包括H4套配置信息；
    其中，H1、H2、H3和H4均为非负整数。
  40. 如权利要求35-39任一项所述的方法，其中，所述配置信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
    所述信道的准共址参考信号集合，所述信道的解调参考信号信息，所述信道的ACK/NACK信息，所述信道的个数信息以及所述信号的信息。
  41. 如权利要求38所述的方法，根据所述第一控制信息中指示的配置信息中的至少一种确定所述第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H包括：
    根据所述第一控制信息中指示的所述配置信息的套数确定所述H；
    其中，所述配置信息包括如下至少之一：准共址参考信号集合，解调参考信号组。
  42. 一种监听方法，包括：
    第一通信节点根据如下信息中的至少之一确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道：一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分，控制信道资源组，搜索空间组的集合，所述一个时间单元中的候选控制信道的准共址参考信号配置信息，所述一个时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案；
    在确定监听的所述候选控制信道上监听控制信息。
  43. 如权利要求42所述的方法，其中，在以下情况中的一种情况下，所述一个时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数冲突：
    所述一个时间单元中多个控制信道的解调参考信号关于空间接收参数不满足准共址QCL关系；
    所述一个时间单元中时域存在重叠的多个控制信道的解调参考信号关于空间接收参数不满足QCL关系；
    所述一个时间单元中多个控制信道不能被所述第一通信节点同时接收；
    所述一个时间单元中时域存在重叠的多个控制信道不能被所述第一通信节点同时接收。
  44. 如权利要求42所述的方法，还包括：根据如下信息中的至少之一确定所述多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数冲突解决方案：
    一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分；
    所述控制信道资源组；
    所述搜索空间组的集合；
    所述候选控制信道所在的频域带宽；
  45. 如权利要求42所述的方法，其中，确定监听的所述候选控制信道满足如下特征中的至少之一：
    在所述一个时间单元中，所述第一通信节点监听的候选控制信道的解调参考信号和所述一个时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收参数冲突解决方案中选择的空间接收参数关联的参考信号关于一类准共址参数满足准共址关系；
    在所述一个时间单元中存在至少一个候选控制信道的解调参考信号和所述一个时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收参数冲突解决方案中选择的空间接收参数关联的参考信号关于一类准共址参数不满足准共址关系的情况下，所述第一通信节点不监听所述候选控制信道。
  46. 如权利要求42所述的方法，其中，所述候选控制信道满足如下特征中的至少一种：
    多个控制信道资源组中的每个控制信道资源组中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道；
    多个搜索空间组的集合中的每个搜索空间组的集合中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道；
    一个成员载波中激活的多个带宽部分中的每个带宽部分中包括至少一个监听的候选控制信道。
  47. 如权利要求42所述的方法，其中，确定监听的所述候选控制信道满足如下特征中的至少一种：
    所述一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个控制信道资源组中按照预定比例分配；
    所述一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个搜索空间组的集合中按照预定比例分配；
    所述一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在一个成员载波中激活的多个带宽部分中按照预定比例分配；
    根据所述一个时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案确定所述一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个控制信道资源组中的分配情况；
    根据所述一个时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案确定所述一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在多个搜索空间组的集合中的分配情况；
    根据所述一个时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案确定所述一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道在一个成员载波中激活的多个带宽部分中的分配情况。
  48. 如权利要求42-47任一项所述的方法，还包括：
    根据控制信道资源所在的频域带宽确定所述控制信道资源所属的所述控制信道资源组，其中，所述频域带宽包括如下至少之一：成员载波，带宽部分。
  49. 如权利要求42-48任一项所述的方法，其中，所述一个时间单元中的控制信道满足如下特征中的至少之一：
    所述一个时间单元中的控制信道的个数大于预定控制信道个数阀值；
    所述一个时间单元中的控制信道的个数大于或等于所述一个时间单元中确定监听的所述候选控制信道的个数。
  50. 一种信息传输装置，包括：第一确定模块和第一传输模块；
    所述第一确定模块设置为，确定N个处于激活状态的带宽部分；
    所述第一传输模块设置为，在激活的所述N个带宽部分上传输信道和/或信号；
    和/或，
    所述第一确定模块设置为，确定D个控制信道资源组；
    所述第一传输模块设置为，在所述D个控制信道资源组中监听控制信息，根据监听到的控制信息传输信道和/或信号；
    其中，N和D均为正整数。
  51. 一种信息传输装置，包括：第二确定模块和第二传输模块；
    所述第二确定模块设置为，确定第一资源；以及所述确定第一资源中所包括的资源组的个数H；
    所述第二传输模块设置为，根据所述H在所述第一资源上传输信道和/或信号；
    其中，所述H个资源组和所述信道和/或信号的H套配置信息对应；所述资源包括时域资源和/或频域资源。
  52. 一种监听装置，包括：候选控制信道确定模块和控制信息监听模块；
    所述候选控制信道确定模块设置为，根据如下信息中的至少之一确定一个时间单元中监听的候选控制信道：一个成员载波中处于激活状态的带宽部分，控制信道资源组，搜索空间组的集合，所述一个时间单元中的候选控制信道的准共址参考信号配置信息，所述一个时间单元中多个候选控制信道的空间接收滤波参数的冲突解决方案；
    所述控制信息监听模块设置为，在确定监听的所述候选控制信道上监听控制信息。
  53. 一种基站，包括：第一处理器、第一存储器以及第一通信总线；
    所述第一通信总线设置为实现所述第一处理器和所述第一存储器之间的连接通信；
    所述第一处理器设置为执行所述第一存储器中存储的至少一个第一程序，以实现如权利要求1-34任一项所述的信息传输方法；
    或，所述第一处理器设置为执行所述第一存储器中存储的至少一个第二程序，以实现如权利要求35-41任一项所述的信息传输方法。
  54. 一种终端，包括：第二处理器、第二存储器以及第二通信总线；
    所述第二通信总线设置为实现所述第二处理器和所述第二存储器之间的连接通信；
    所述第二处理器设置为执行所述第二存储器中存储的至少一个第三程序，以实现如权利要求1-34任一项所述的信息传输方法；
    或，所述第二处理器设置为执行所述第二存储器中存储的至少一个第四程序，以实现如权利要求35-41任一项所述的信息传输方法；
    或，所述第二处理器设置为执行所述第二存储器中存储的至少一个第五程序，以实现如权利要求42-49任一项所述的监听方法。
  55. 一种计算机可读存储介质，存储有至少一个计算机程序，所述至少一个计算机程序可被至少一个处理器执行，以实现如权利要求1-34任一项所述的信息传输方法，或实现如权利要求35-41任一项所述的信息传输方法，或实现如权利要求42-49任一项所述的监听方法。
PCT/CN2019/099861 2018-08-08 2019-08-08 信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储介质 WO2020030064A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP19846887.8A EP3836680A4 (en) 2018-08-08 2019-08-08 INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD, MONITORING METHOD AND DEVICE, BASE STATION, TERMINAL AND STORAGE MEDIUM
KR1020217007016A KR20210040431A (ko) 2018-08-08 2019-08-08 정보 전송 방법, 모니터링 방법, 장치, 기지국, 단말 및 저장 매체
US17/266,990 US20210314955A1 (en) 2018-08-08 2019-08-08 Information transmission method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810899188.6 2018-08-08
CN201810899188.6A CN110536423A (zh) 2018-08-08 2018-08-08 信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储介质

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020030064A1 true WO2020030064A1 (zh) 2020-02-13

Family

ID=68657995

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/099861 WO2020030064A1 (zh) 2018-08-08 2019-08-08 信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储介质

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20210314955A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP3836680A4 (zh)
KR (1) KR20210040431A (zh)
CN (2) CN110536423A (zh)
WO (1) WO2020030064A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022015760A3 (en) * 2020-07-16 2022-02-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Wireless communication using multiple active bandwidth parts

Families Citing this family (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110830195B (zh) * 2018-08-09 2021-10-01 华为技术有限公司 一种信息的处理方法和通信装置
EP4239906A3 (en) * 2018-09-18 2023-11-08 Sony Group Corporation Communications device, infrastructure equipment and methods
JP7218809B2 (ja) * 2018-12-10 2023-02-07 日本電気株式会社 ユーザ端末、送受信ポイント及び方法
CN113826346A (zh) 2019-03-22 2021-12-21 三星电子株式会社 无线通信系统中用于控制信道接收的方法和装置
CN111757507A (zh) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-09 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法和装置
US11569951B2 (en) * 2019-08-15 2023-01-31 Ofinno, Llc Radio link monitoring in a multi-TRP scenario
KR102552254B1 (ko) * 2019-10-02 2023-07-07 아서스테크 컴퓨터 인코포레이션 무선 통신 시스템에서 대규모 전파 지연을 위한 방법 및 장치
CN115065451A (zh) * 2020-01-19 2022-09-16 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 一种被用于无线通信的节点中的方法和装置
WO2021151230A1 (en) * 2020-01-30 2021-08-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Sounding reference signal configuration
EP4097891A1 (en) * 2020-01-31 2022-12-07 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (PUBL) Bandwidth part allocation control
WO2021223216A1 (en) * 2020-05-08 2021-11-11 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for group component carrier-based beam update
CN113972970A (zh) * 2020-07-23 2022-01-25 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 一种用于无线通信的节点中的方法和装置
EP4218327A4 (en) * 2020-09-27 2023-11-29 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. DYNAMIC DISPLAY OF A CARRIER AND/OR BANDWIDTH PART FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION
US11581907B2 (en) * 2020-12-18 2023-02-14 Sr Technologies, Inc. System and method for reception of wireless local area network packets with bit errors
AU2020482982A1 (en) * 2020-12-24 2023-07-13 Zte Corporation Systems and methods for srs triggering flexibility enhancement
WO2022151411A1 (zh) * 2021-01-15 2022-07-21 华为技术有限公司 Bwp的激活方法及通信装置
WO2022193205A1 (zh) * 2021-03-18 2022-09-22 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Ue省电处理方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质
US11743864B2 (en) * 2021-03-25 2023-08-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for unlinking physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) candidates due to PDCCH candidate dropping in deployments featuring PDCCH repetition
EP4319374A4 (en) * 2021-04-02 2024-05-29 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, TERMINAL DEVICE AND NETWORK DEVICE
CN114745744A (zh) * 2022-04-06 2022-07-12 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 小区测量方法、装置、终端设备和计算机可读存储介质
WO2024030804A1 (en) * 2022-08-05 2024-02-08 Apple Inc. Sounding reference signal (srs) enhancement for multi-transmission and reception point (trp) operation

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107306147A (zh) * 2016-04-25 2017-10-31 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种信息传输方法、装置和系统
US20180049166A1 (en) * 2016-08-10 2018-02-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Low latency physical downlink control channel and physical downlink shared channel
CN107733609A (zh) * 2016-08-12 2018-02-23 华为技术有限公司 参考信号发送方法和参考信号发送装置
WO2018044114A1 (ko) * 2016-09-02 2018-03-08 엘지전자 주식회사 다수의 검색 공간에 대해 블라인드 디코딩을 수행하는 순서를 결정하는 방법 및 단말

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105099634B (zh) * 2014-05-09 2019-05-07 中兴通讯股份有限公司 动态资源的分配方法及装置、基站、终端
US11121744B2 (en) * 2015-11-04 2021-09-14 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting and receiving downlink data in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor
CN107370586B (zh) * 2016-05-13 2021-02-05 电信科学技术研究院 一种信道传输方法及装置
BR112019002748A2 (pt) * 2016-08-10 2019-05-14 Idac Holdings, Inc. método para uma unidade de transmissão/recepção sem fio, unidade de transmissão/recepção sem fio, e, estação-base
US10477457B2 (en) * 2016-11-03 2019-11-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method to support ultra-wide bandwidth in fifth generation (5G) new radio
JP6934588B2 (ja) * 2016-12-27 2021-09-15 ５ジー アイピー ホールディングス エルエルシー 帯域幅部分インジケータをシグナリングする方法及びそれを用いた無線通信装置
CN108400852B (zh) * 2017-02-06 2020-10-30 电信科学技术研究院 一种大尺度信道参数的指示、确定方法、基站及终端
CN110475260B (zh) * 2018-05-10 2021-05-25 维沃移动通信有限公司 处理方法、用户设备和网络侧设备

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107306147A (zh) * 2016-04-25 2017-10-31 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种信息传输方法、装置和系统
US20180049166A1 (en) * 2016-08-10 2018-02-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Low latency physical downlink control channel and physical downlink shared channel
CN107733609A (zh) * 2016-08-12 2018-02-23 华为技术有限公司 参考信号发送方法和参考信号发送装置
WO2018044114A1 (ko) * 2016-09-02 2018-03-08 엘지전자 주식회사 다수의 검색 공간에 대해 블라인드 디코딩을 수행하는 순서를 결정하는 방법 및 단말

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NTT DOCOMO, INC: "Remaing issues on bandwidth parts for NR", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #90, R1-1713964, 20 August 2017 (2017-08-20), XP051316756 *
SAMSUNG: "PUCCH resource configuration for bandwidth restricted UE", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #90, R1-1714539, 20 August 2017 (2017-08-20), XP051317314 *
See also references of EP3836680A4

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022015760A3 (en) * 2020-07-16 2022-02-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Wireless communication using multiple active bandwidth parts

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114598360A (zh) 2022-06-07
US20210314955A1 (en) 2021-10-07
EP3836680A1 (en) 2021-06-16
EP3836680A4 (en) 2022-05-11
KR20210040431A (ko) 2021-04-13
CN114598360B (zh) 2024-04-05
CN110536423A (zh) 2019-12-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020030064A1 (zh) 信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储介质
US11690080B2 (en) Resource scheduling method and apparatus
CN111316610B (zh) 无线通信系统中rmsi coreset配置的方法和装置
US11737081B2 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signals for ultra reliable low latency communication
CN111492694B (zh) 用于独立的nr未许可频谱上的初始接入块的方法和装置
US11641249B2 (en) Method and apparatus for determining a duration of a repetition of a transport block
JP6328696B2 (ja) 無線通信システムにおいて下りリンク制御チャネルのための検索領域を設定する方法及びそのための装置
RU2679565C1 (ru) Системы и способы для ofdm с гибкими интервалом поднесущей и продолжительностью символа
KR20200046116A (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서 제어 리소스 세트 구성을 위한 방법 및 장치
US20170332396A1 (en) Unified and Scalable Frame Structure for OFDM System
WO2019029366A1 (zh) 一种调整频域资源和发送指示信息的方法、装置及系统
KR20210121232A (ko) NR(New Radio) 구성 업링크(UL)를 위한 시간 자원
US11134488B2 (en) Base station apparatus for communicating with a terminal apparatus using multiple frequency bands
US20230131212A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting and receiving signals
US10681623B2 (en) Methods and apparatus for cell access via anchor carrier
US11456904B2 (en) Numerologies for distributing an excess cyclic prefix during orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing
CN116998208A (zh) 无线通信系统的调度增强
WO2020048481A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2021189213A1 (zh) 一种控制信息的发送、接收方法及装置
CN117694006A (zh) 用于非授权频谱中侧链路资源分配的方法和装置
US10999868B2 (en) Terminal apparatus, base station apparatus, and communication method
JP7285835B2 (ja) アップリンク制御チャネルスケジューリングユニットを決定する方法、ベースステーション、およびユーザ機器
US20210119756A1 (en) User terminal and radio communication method
KR20190086618A (ko) 무선 통신시스템의 하향링크 제어 정보 전송 방법, 장치 및 시스템
KR20230149992A (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서 사이드링크 통신을 수행하는 방법 및 장치

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19846887

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019846887

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20210309